JP7644372B2 - Ball game machine - Google Patents

Description

This relates to a pinball game machine that has a play area from which game balls are shot.

Among various pinball game machines, the so-called first-class pachinko game machines display multiple symbols while changing in a display area such as a liquid crystal display provided in the approximate center of the game board (hereinafter, such display will be referred to as "symbol change" or "changing display"). This game machine is known as a game machine that transitions to a special game called a jackpot, in which more prize balls can be obtained than in normal game, when the combination of symbols when the symbol change in multiple rows is stopped becomes a specific state. The symbol change display in the display area is not simply a display of multiple symbols, but is designed to heighten the player's sense of expectation by making the time of the changing display longer than usual when one more symbol is aligned, such as in a so-called reach screen. In addition, the player's sense of expectation is also heightened by a performance that gives a story to the changing display by using characters in the images of the symbols, etc., and a preview performance that preliminarily suggests the high expectation of transitioning to the special game (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2003-230714 A JP 2017-70532 A

However, depending on the relationship between the various presentation elements and various operability designed for each model, it is possible to achieve a synergistic effect in the presentation, but it is also possible that the effect of the presentation may be diminished, so careful design is required when combining each element.

The present invention was developed in consideration of the above problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can achieve both improved presentation effects and improved operability.

In order to solve the above problems, a pinball game machine according to one embodiment of the present invention comprises a game board on which a game area is formed, a start winning hole provided at a predetermined position in the game area and in which the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery, a large winning hole which allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter when opened, a winning/losing judgment means for executing a winning/losing judgment to determine whether or not a game will transition to a special game which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game when a ball enters the start winning hole, a pattern display device which displays a varying pattern to show the result of the winning/losing judgment, and a variation pattern decision means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the process of displaying the varying patterns is determined. the game device is provided with a setting means, a hold control means for storing as hold a lottery value corresponding to a new ball entering the start winning port up to a predetermined number when a new ball enters the start winning port and a pattern change corresponding to a ball entering the previous start winning port is displayed, a special game control means for enabling a special game involving the opening of a large winning port to be executed when the result of the win/loss determination means for determining whether or not a new ball has entered the start winning port is a predetermined result, a performance display device for displaying performance content, a performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device, and a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device. The performance display device has at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group as performance images that can be displayed, and can execute a special performance that displays a special first image obtained by transforming the first image in a predetermined manner, and can display a stage background image set according to the performance stage, and when the performance develops into a predetermined high expectation performance, the stage background image is hidden during the developed predetermined high expectation performance, and a pattern change is executed when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a specific result different from the predetermined result, and in a specific pattern change that is a pattern change accompanied by the execution of a predetermined high expectation performance, a special performance can be executed while the stage background image is displayed before the performance develops into the predetermined high expectation performance, but the special performance is not executed while the stage background image that is redisplayed after the end of the predetermined high expectation performance in the specific pattern change is displayed.

In addition, any combination of the above components, or mutual substitution of the components or expressions of the present invention among methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, etc., are also valid aspects of the present invention.

The pinball game machine of the present invention can provide a game machine that can achieve both improved presentation effects and improved operability.

A diagram showing the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko game machine. A diagram showing the basic structure of the rear side of a pachinko machine. A diagram showing the functional blocks of a pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of a main board. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of a win/loss determination table. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the range settings of the win/lose lottery values for each setting value. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a pattern determination table. A diagram showing a variation pattern table. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of a pre-entry pass/fail determination table referenced in the pre-entry pass/fail determination. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of a pre-win/lose determination table corresponding to a game setting. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a sub-board. FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a schematic overview of a mobile link system. 2 is a block diagram showing a schematic hardware configuration of a main board and a sub board. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a schematic hardware configuration of a performance control device. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the control start processing of the main board in a pachinko gaming machine. 16 is a flowchart showing the setting change process of S124 in FIG. 15 in detail. 16 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process of S126 in FIG. 15 in detail. 16 is a flowchart showing the main process of S120 in FIG. 15 in detail. 13 is a flowchart showing details of an interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing the control start processing of a sub-substrate in a pachinko gaming machine. 21 is a flowchart showing the main process of S518 in FIG. 20 in detail. 13 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a command is received from the main board. 13 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for controlling a performance display occurs. 10 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a sub CPU receives a command from a control CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying special patterns in a variable manner. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of varying and displaying decorative patterns. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of a special game. A flowchart showing the process of small win gaming. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a screen of a performance display device. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of contraction of a frame image in a screen transformation performance. 10A to 10C are diagrams illustrating an example of frame image shaking in a screen deformation effect. 13 is a diagram showing a schematic layer structure of a performance screen in a screen transformation performance. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the process of a movable character effect that is executed simultaneously with the screen transformation effect. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a frame buffer divided into a plurality of buffer areas. 10 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between the display size of a frame image and the capacity of a frame buffer area. FIG. 10A to 10C are diagrams illustrating a process of transforming a frame image stored in a buffer area. A figure showing an example screen of the third special effect pattern. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating a process of using a buffer area in a third special effect pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a guide screen for custom functions. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a change screen for a pre-read chance mode. A figure showing an example of a screen for changing the goal-reading mode. 13 is a diagram showing the relationship between whether or not a stage background image is displayed and whether or not the performance settings can be changed. FIG. This figure shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko gaming machine in the first aspect that adopts the specifications of an ECO pachinko gaming machine. A diagram showing the processing image between the ECO unit and the prize ball payout control board. A diagram showing the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko gaming machine in the second aspect that adopts the specifications of an ECO pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing details of the operation unit device in FIG. 46. A diagram showing the general electrical configuration of a pachinko game machine. A diagram showing the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko game machine in the third aspect, which adopts the specifications of an enclosed pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing details of an operation unit device.

(Based Technology)
In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, multiple games corresponding to the conventional first-class pachinko machine are mixed. The first game and the second game as the multiple games are executed preferentially so that they are not executed simultaneously. In order to balance these playability, the machine is equipped with multiple start winning holes, multiple special pattern display devices, and multiple reserved lamps. The machine is designed so that the number of balls that are awarded in the second game is generally greater than the number of balls that are awarded in the first game. For example, the second game is designed to be relatively more profitable than the first game, with a higher probability of hitting a jackpot with a probability of winning, and with a larger number of unit games constituting the special game when the jackpot is hit (including cases where a long-open unit game with a long opening time of the big prize entrance and a short-open unit game with a short opening time are mixed in one special game, and the second game has a larger number of long-open unit games than the first game even with the same number of unit games). On top of that, the gameplay is realized in which the player first aims for a first hit in the first game, and after the time reduction is granted in the first game, the player repeatedly aims for the second game to get a lot of balls.

Figure 1 shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko game machine. The pachinko game machine 100 is mainly composed of a game machine frame and a game board. The game machine frame of the pachinko game machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front frame 102, a transparent plate 103, a door 104, an upper ball tray 105, a lower ball tray 106, a launch handle 107, a speaker 108, a performance button 109, a cross key 110, and a decorative lamp 111. The outer frame 101 has an opening and is a frame body for fixing the pachinko game machine 100 in a position to be installed. The front frame 102 is a frame body that fits into the opening of the outer frame 101 and is attached to the outer frame 101 so that it can be opened and closed by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame 102 includes a mechanism for launching game balls, a mechanism for detachably storing the game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting game balls, etc.

The transparent plate 103 is made of glass or the like, and is supported by the door 104. The door 104 is attached to the front frame 102 by a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The upper ball tray 105 has a mechanism for storing game balls, sending game balls to the launch rail, and removing game balls to the lower ball tray 106. The lower ball tray 106 has a mechanism for storing and removing game balls. Speakers 108 are provided on the left and right sides of the upper part of the door 104, and output sound effects and music according to the game status and performance, etc., by a means for controlling the performance. Most of the resin material that constitutes the exterior of the door 104 is translucent, and a decorative lamp 111 is provided inside the transparent part. The decorative lamp 111 is an LED that emits light in various colors according to the game status and performance, etc., by a means for controlling the performance, and plays a role in the performance by flashing, etc.

The game board 80 includes a first start port 11, a second start port 12, a big prize port 20, a first operation port 31, a second operation port 32, a general prize port 33, an out port 34, a performance display device 60, and a center decoration 64 on a game area 81 partitioned by rails 82. The center decoration 64 is a decorative resin member provided to form the screen frame of the performance display device 60 from the approximate center of the game area 81 to its upper and right parts, and has functions such as a flow path for game balls, protection of the performance display device 60, and decoration. A stage 65 on which the game balls that flow in roll is formed at the bottom of the center decoration 64, and the falling direction from the stage 65 is divided into a direction in which the ball enters the first start port 11 and a lateral direction in which the ball does not enter the first start port 11 depending on the way the ball rolls. A movable role object 66 that is driven according to the performance content and performs a performance action is provided at the top of the center decoration 64. In the game area 81, a mechanism such as a plurality of game nails and a windmill (not shown) for forming a flow path for game balls is installed. In this specification, "ball entry", "winning", and "falling in" may be synonymous with each other. In addition, each winning port and each ball entry port may be configured as a "passing port" (also called a "gate" or "through chucker") through which game balls pass, and "ball entry", "winning", "falling in" and "passing" may also be synonymous with each other.

The first starting hole 11 is provided as a starting winning hole corresponding to the first game, and the second starting hole 12 is provided as a starting winning hole corresponding to the second game. The first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12 are configured so that the player can aim to enter one of them by shooting the game ball with strength according to his/her will. The first starting hole 11 is provided in the approximately center lower part of the game area 81, and the second starting hole 12 is provided directly below the first starting hole 11. A flow path is formed by the arrangement of the game nails so that the ball can be entered or entered easily into the first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12 when hit from the left, that is, when the ball is hit relatively weakly with the aim of flowing to the left passage of the center ornament 64, while the ball can be entered or entered easily into the second starting hole 12 when hit from the right, that is, when the ball is hit relatively strongly with the aim of flowing to the right passage of the center ornament 64, the ball can be entered or entered easily into the first starting hole 11, but the ball cannot be entered or entered easily into the first starting hole 11. However, under normal circumstances, the upper part of the opening of the second starting hole 12 is covered by the first starting hole 11, preventing the inflow of game balls, so unless the expansion mechanism of the second starting hole 12 is opened, it is impossible or difficult for a ball to enter the second starting hole 12. The winning/losing lottery is a lottery that determines whether or not to move to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than normal play, and is held every time a ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12.

The first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12 may be located far enough apart from each other that the ball can be aimed at either one depending on the strength of the shot. The first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12 may be located far away on the left and right sides of the game area 81, respectively, so that a ball aimed at one of them is unlikely to enter the other. For example, the first starting hole 11 is located at a position where the ball can or can easily enter when the ball is hit from the left, that is, when the ball is shot relatively weakly with the aim of flowing into the left passage of the center ornament 64. The second starting hole 12 is located at a position where the ball can or can easily enter when the ball is hit from the right, that is, when the ball is shot relatively strongly with the aim of flowing into the right passage of the center ornament 64.

The first starting opening 11 is equipped with a first starting winning detection device 16. The first starting winning detection device 16 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 11, and generates first starting winning information indicating the entry of the ball when the ball enters. The second starting opening 12 is equipped with a second starting winning detection device 17, a normal electric device 90 (a so-called electric tulip) that is an opening mechanism, and a normal electric device solenoid 91 for opening and closing the normal electric device 90. The second starting winning detection device 17 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 12, and generates second starting winning information indicating the entry of the ball when the ball enters.

The first operating port 31 is provided at the left side of the play area 81 and includes a first passage detection device 36. The first passage detection device 36 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the first operating port 31, and generates passage information indicating the passage when the game ball passes through. The second operating port 32 is provided at the right side of the play area 81 and includes a second passage detection device 37. The second passage detection device 37 is a sensor that detects the passage of the game ball to the second operating port 32, and generates passage information indicating the passage when the game ball passes through. The passage of the game ball through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32 triggers an opening lottery that determines whether or not to open the normal electric role object 90. When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, a normal pattern, which is a pattern indicating the judgment result of the opening lottery, is displayed variably on the normal pattern display unit 45. Therefore, the opening lottery is also called a "normal pattern lottery". After a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the display of the normal symbols stops fluctuating. When the normal symbols stop at a winning symbol, the normal electric device 90 is opened by the driving force of the normal electric device solenoid 91, increasing the possibility of the ball entering the second starting hole 12. As an alternative, the number of operating holes may be one, and it may be configured to be located on the left side of the play area 81.

The three general winning openings 33 each have a general winning detection device 38 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The general winning detection device 38 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 33, and generates general winning information indicating the entry of the ball when the ball enters.

The large prize opening 20 is equipped with a large prize detection device 25 for detecting the entry of a game ball and a large prize opening solenoid 92 for opening and closing the large prize opening 20. The large prize detection device 25 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 20, and generates large prize opening winning information indicating the entry of the ball when the ball enters. The large prize opening 20 is a horizontal rectangular winning opening that opens as a "big win" when the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52 stops in a predetermined manner. The large prize opening 20 is provided in a position to the upper right of the out opening 34. As a modified example, another large prize opening may be provided in the lower center of the game area 81 or above or below the large prize opening 20, so that multiple large prize openings are provided. The out opening 34 is an outlet through which game balls that did not enter any of the winning openings are discharged, and is provided with an out detection device 39. The out detection device 39 is a sensor that detects game balls that pass through the out port 34 and are discharged, and generates discharge information indicating the detection upon detection. The out port 34 is provided at the bottom center of the game area 81 so that all game balls that do not enter any of the winning ports can be guided through it. A plurality of out detection devices 39 may be provided side by side while ensuring a game ball passage of sufficient width to prevent balls from clogging the out port 34.

The symbol etc. display unit 120 is disposed below and outside the play area 81 on the play board 80. The symbol etc. display unit 120 is provided with various display sections, such as a first special symbol display section 41, a second special symbol display section 42, a first special symbol reserved display section 71, a second special symbol reserved display section 72, a normal symbol display section 45, a normal symbol reserved display section 75, a play status display section 76, and an abnormality notification section 77. Specifically, the first special symbol display section 41 corresponding to the first game and the second special symbol display section 42 corresponding to the second game are arranged side by side at the lower left position, and the fluctuations of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed.

The first special symbol 51 is a symbol corresponding to the result of the first winning/losing lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 11, and when the symbol stops in a predetermined winning manner, a jackpot occurs as a special game. The second special symbol 52 is a symbol corresponding to the result of the second winning/losing lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 12, and when the symbol stops in a predetermined winning manner, a jackpot occurs as a special game. The first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42 are eight-segment LED display devices consisting of eight segments, for example, seven segments forming a "figure of eight" and one segment representing a "dot". In an eight-segment LED, eight segments can be combined to represent eight bits of numerical value. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, which are represented by a combination of segments, do not necessarily take the form of letters or numbers, and may be symbols that do not generally have meaning and are formed by the combination of each segment. These symbols are displayed in rapid succession on the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42, or a predetermined display (e.g., "-") and non-display (e.g., all lights off) are repeated for a predetermined time, and then a pattern corresponding to the judgment result is displayed, thereby realizing the display of the varying patterns of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. Note that the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42 may be an LED dot array other than an 8-segment LED, and a plurality of types of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 may be expressed by a combination of lighting patterns and lighting colors.

In addition, since the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 do not necessarily have to play a role in the presentation, in this embodiment they are displayed in an inconspicuous size on the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42 at the lower left of the play area 81. However, if a method is adopted in which the special symbols themselves play a role in the presentation, and thus are expressed without using decorative symbols, the special symbols may be displayed on another display device, such as a liquid crystal display, rather than on an 8-segment LED.

Above the first special symbol display section 41, a first special symbol reserved display section 71 is provided as a reserved lamp for the special symbol change corresponding to the first game, and above the second special symbol display section 42, a second special symbol reserved display section 72 is provided as a reserved lamp for the special symbol change corresponding to the second game. The first special symbol reserved display section 71 is made up of two lamps, and the number of lamps that are lit or blinking indicates the number of reserved win/lose lottery values in the first game (hereinafter, the number of reserved win/lose lottery values is also simply referred to as the "reserved number"). The reserved number in the first special symbol reserved display section 71 is the number of times (number) that a lottery value has been obtained based on winning the first starting hole 11 during the change of the first special symbol 51 or during the execution of the special game, and indicates the number of winning balls for which the pattern change has not yet been executed. The second special symbol reserved display section 72 is also made up of two lamps, and the number of lamps that are lit or blinking indicates the number of reserved balls in the second game. The reserved number in the second special symbol reserved display section 72 is the number of times (number) that a lottery value has been obtained based on winning into the second starting hole 12 while the second special symbol 52 is changing or while a special game is being played, and indicates the number of winning balls for which the symbol change has not yet been performed. The reserved number of winning/losing lottery values is also displayed at the bottom of the screen of the performance display device 60 as the number of lit reserved lamp images.

On the right side of the pattern etc. display unit 120, a normal pattern display section 45 is provided. For convenience, the normal pattern display section 45 is composed of two lamps, and the display state of the normal pattern is expressed by the combination of their lighting. First, the first lamp and the second lamp are simultaneously flashed to express the fluctuation of the normal pattern, and finally, the stopping pattern of the normal pattern is expressed by the combination of the lighting states of the first lamp and the second lamp. For example, a missing stopping pattern is expressed by the lighting of the first lamp and the extinguishing of the second lamp, a first winning pattern is expressed by the extinguishing of the first lamp and the lighting of the second lamp, and a second winning pattern is expressed by the lighting of both the first lamp and the second lamp.

In addition, a normal symbol pending display section 75 is provided to the right of the normal symbol display section 45 as a pending lamp for normal symbol changes. The normal symbol pending display section 75 also consists of two lamps, and the number of lamps that are lit or flashing indicates the number of pending normal symbol changes. The number of pending normal symbol changes is the number of game balls that have passed through the first actuation port 31 or the second actuation port 32 during the normal symbol change, and indicates the number of normal symbol draws for which the normal symbol change has not yet been executed.

The symbol display unit 120 is provided with a game state display section 76 and an abnormality notification section 77. The game state display section 76 is a display section that displays a game state corresponding to a specific game state, which will be described later, and is composed of, for example, one lamp and one 7-segment LED. For example, the lamp is lit when the probability is fluctuating, flashes when the ball is likely to be scored, and is turned off when the ball is in a normal state to notify each game state, and the 7-segment LED displays the number of unit games (number of rounds) to be executed in the special game during execution of the special game. The abnormality notification section 77 is a display section that notifies an abnormality in a part of the gaming machine, and is composed of, for example, multiple lamps, and notifies an abnormality by a lighting pattern according to the type of abnormality. Note that these display sections may not be centrally arranged in the symbol display unit 120, but each display section may be configured separately, or may be configured separately as multiple display devices appropriately grouped together. In addition, the notification of a game state such as a specific game state may be configured to be performed only for a predetermined period, such as a certain period after the power is restored from a power outage.

A performance display device 60 is provided in approximately the center of the play area 81 so that the screen is exposed from the screen frame formed by the center ornament 64, and displays changes in the performance image including a decorative pattern 61 linked to the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52. Hereinafter, such displays will be referred to as "pattern changes" or "change displays", etc.

The effect display device 60 is a display device consisting of a liquid crystal display that changes and displays the decorative pattern 61 in a manner linked to the changing display of the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52. The decorative pattern 61 is a pattern for visually displaying the lottery result display shown by the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52. The effect display device 60 displays, as the decorative pattern 61, a moving image that changes multiple rows of patterns, for example, imitating a slot machine game, in the central area of the screen. In this embodiment, patterns consisting of the numbers "0" to "9" are displayed and changed in three rows, and a winning or losing combination of three patterns that are finally stopped and displayed indicates a winning or losing. Each of the multiple patterns that make up the decorative pattern 61 is composed of numbers, letters, or symbols decorated with colors and patterns, but these numbers, letters, and symbols may be configured in a form that is integrated by adding a pattern common to all patterns or a different pattern for each pattern. This image is a pattern depicting a motif related to the decoration or presentation theme set for that model of pachinko gaming machine 100, and may be a pattern depicting a human or animal character, for example. The decorative pattern 61 may be configured to switch between a pattern that includes the image as an integrated unit and a pattern in which the image is separated and only the numbers, letters, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the development of the presentation. In the background of the decorative pattern 61, a moving image having a presentation effect related to the decoration or presentation theme set for that model of pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed in conjunction with the pattern change.

The performance display device 60 is composed of a liquid crystal display, which is a high-definition dot matrix type display device, and the width of the display area may be about half the width of the game area, or it may be a large size that exceeds half. In the case of a large size, the game ball passage on the right side of the performance display device is formed with a passage width that is wide enough for one game ball to pass through, and if the player hits the ball with maximum strength as a so-called "right hit", the game ball can almost certainly pass through the right-side passage, and it can be distinguished from so-called "left hit". The performance display device 60 may be composed not only of a single display device, but also of a combination of multiple display devices. In the case of multiple display devices, displays of different sizes such as a combination of a main liquid crystal display and a sub liquid crystal display may be combined, and the sub liquid crystal may be placed adjacent to the main liquid crystal display, or may be installed in a position other than the game board, for example, near the launch handle (upper ball tray, right side decorative lamp, etc.). When installed near the launch handle, it may be configured in the form of a touch panel that the player can operate and input. The performance display device 60 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be configured with a display device such as an organic EL display, or may be configured with a mechanical display means such as a drum rotation type or an LED matrix type display means.

The performance button 109 is an operation input means that the player presses to input a specific instruction to the gaming machine according to the performance content, and the performance content, etc. are changed depending on the pressing manner. The performance button 109 is provided on the front frame 102. The performance button 109 is usually stored in the front frame 102, but a rod-shaped member is attached to the back side of the performance button 109, and it is provided so that the rod-shaped member and the performance button 109 can be protruded in a direction approximately perpendicular to the board surface. When protruding to the outside, the rod-shaped member and the performance button 109 function as a performance lever 112, and the player can grasp the performance button 109 and pull the performance lever 112 downward. This also allows the player to input a specific instruction to the gaming machine. The cross key 110 is an operation input means that the player inputs directional instructions to the gaming machine, and is provided on the outer wall surface to the left of the upper ball tray 105.

The method of playing and the flow of control performed in the gaming machine configured as above will be outlined. When the player rotates the launch handle 107 by hand, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 105 are guided one by one to the rail 82 and launched into the game area 81 with a strength according to the rotation angle. When the player fixes the rotation position of the launch handle 107 by hand, the launch of the game balls is repeated at regular time intervals. The game balls launched to the upper part of the game area 81 hit multiple game nails, windmills, center decorations 64, etc. and fall in a direction according to the way they hit. When the game balls fall into each of the winning holes of the general winning hole 33, the first starting hole 11, the second starting hole 12, and the large winning hole 20, the prize balls according to the type of winning hole are paid out to the upper ball tray 105 or the lower ball tray 106. Game balls that fall into each winning port, such as the general winning port 33, are treated as safe balls, and game balls that fall into the out port 34 are treated as out balls. The discharge of safe balls may be made to be outside the scope of detection by the out detection device 39, or safe balls may be guided to an area where the out detection device 39 is provided and all discharged safe balls may be detected by the out detection device 39. Alternatively, the number of discharged balls may be calculated by adding the number of detected safe balls to the number of detected out balls, without guiding safe balls or detecting safe balls with the out detection device 39.

When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal pattern is displayed in a variable manner in the normal pattern display section 45, and is displayed in a stopped manner after the variable display time determined prior to display has elapsed. When the normal pattern is displayed in a stopped manner in the first winning manner or the second winning manner, the normal electric device 90 is expanded based on the winning manner of the stopped and displayed pattern and the game state when it is displayed in a stopped manner. That is, when the game state when the pattern is stopped is the normal game state, and the normal pattern is displayed in the first winning manner, a short opening of 0.1 seconds is executed as the opening of the normal electric device 90. When the normal pattern is displayed in the first winning manner in a specific game state (e.g., a state where it is easy to score a ball), and when the normal pattern is displayed in the second winning manner in normal and specific game states (e.g., a state where it is easy to score a ball), a long opening of 6 seconds is executed as the opening of the normal electric device 90. Here, the winning probability of the normal symbol and the execution probability of the long opening are set to be different depending on the game state. Specifically, in the opening lottery in the normal state, the normal symbol wins with a probability of 1/100, and the execution probability of the short opening (the probability of selecting the winning symbol of the first winning mode) in that case is set to 1/3, and the execution probability of the long opening (the probability of selecting the winning symbol of the second winning mode) is set to 2/3. Also, in the opening lottery in a specific game state (for example, a state where it is easy to enter the ball), the normal symbol wins with a probability of 99/100, and the selection probability of the first winning mode and the second winning mode is the same as in the normal game state, but the long opening is set to be executed regardless of the mode in which it wins. In this way, in the easy-to-score state, the easiness of scoring into the second starting hole 12 is increased by the function of varying the probability of winning with the normal symbol (varies the probability from 1/100 to 99/100) and the function of extending the opening time (extending the opening time from 0.1 seconds to 6.0 seconds when stopped and displayed in the first winning mode). The function of extending the operating period of the normal electric device 90 (long opening) is sometimes called the "opening extension."

As described above, the probability of long opening is higher than the probability of short opening in the normal state, so that long opening is performed at a certain rate even in the normal state when a normal pattern is won. As a variant, the probability of short opening may be higher than the probability of long opening in the normal state, or the probabilities of both may be the same, or a short opening may always be performed. In addition, when the ball is in an easy-to-enter state, a configuration may be used to increase the ease of ball entry into the second starting hole 12 by using three functions, including a function to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal pattern. In that case, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is, for example, 10 seconds in the normal state and 2 seconds in the easy-to-enter state. In addition, the winning probability of the opening lottery in the normal state may be set to zero (0/100), and the normal electric device 90 may be expanded only when the opening lottery is performed in the easy-to-enter state. Furthermore, when the normal electric role 90 opens, the fact may be notified in advance, or the pending change of the normal pattern may be predicted and a notification may be given before the change of the normal pattern begins, or a notification may be given while the normal pattern is changing.

As a modified example of the opening mode when the normal electric device 90 of the second starting hole 12 is opened for a long time, the total opening time may be extended to about 6 seconds by repeating a 2-second opening three times, which is longer than the short opening. In addition, a configuration may be made in which multiple combinations of opening time and number of openings are prepared and one of them is selected. For example, in the case of three 2-second openings, the total opening time is the same as that in the case of one 6-second opening, but the former is longer than the latter when the interval period is included. Therefore, in the configuration of the modified example in which the second starting hole 12 is arranged in the right-hand hitting direction, it can be said that the former has a longer chance of scoring if the player who notices the opening adjusts the hitting direction to the second starting hole 12 from that point on. In addition, a configuration may be made in which there are multiple winning types of normal patterns, and the opening mode of the expansion mechanism may be made different depending on the winning type. For example, if a normal symbol results in a first hit, the ball may be opened once for 0.1 seconds in the normal state, and three times for 1 second in the easy-to-score state; if a second hit results in a second hit, the ball may be opened once for 6 seconds in the normal state, and two times for 2 seconds in the easy-to-score state.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12, the first special pattern 51, the second special pattern 52, and the decorative pattern 61 are displayed in a variable manner on the first special pattern display section 41, the second special pattern display section 42, and the performance display device 60. The display of the first special pattern 51, the second special pattern 52, and the decorative pattern 61 is stopped after the display time determined prior to the display has elapsed. The first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 are displayed in a variable manner according to a variable pattern in which the change mode from the start of the change to the stop is determined. The decorative pattern 61 is displayed in a variable manner according to a variable performance pattern in which the change mode from the start of the change to the stop is determined. A plurality of types of the change pattern and the change performance pattern are prepared, each of which has a variable time of various lengths. While the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 are displayed in a variable manner according to the variable pattern, the decorative pattern 61 is displayed in a variable manner according to a variable performance pattern having the same change time. For each variation pattern, a variation display time is set as the end condition for the pattern variation, and the variation of the first special pattern 51, the second special pattern 52, and the decorative pattern 61 is stopped when the variation display time has elapsed. Below, an example of the variation display of the decorative pattern 61 displayed according to the variation performance pattern is shown, and the variation performance pattern is briefly explained. Details of the variation pattern and the method of determining the variation performance pattern will be explained separately.

As an example of the display of the change in the decorative pattern 61, first, when the change starts, the patterns in all three columns change like the reels of a slot machine spinning, and when the timing for the change to end is approached, the columns are stopped one by one to display the pattern combination as the final stop mode. Note that as the operation when the change in the decorative pattern 190 stops, it is possible to control the columns to stop simultaneously rather than one by one, so as to draw attention to the performance display other than the decorative pattern during the change display, or to make it possible to display the pattern change in a shorter change time. Also, as the operation when the change in the decorative pattern 190 starts, it is possible to control the start of the change in some columns to be delayed depending on the subsequent development in the change (such as the type of performance pattern) to create a sense of anticipation.

Next, the variable presentation patterns will be briefly explained. The variable presentation patterns include a normal miss presentation pattern, a reach miss presentation pattern, and a reach jackpot presentation pattern. The normal miss presentation pattern is a presentation pattern when a normal miss pattern combination is displayed. The reach miss presentation pattern is a presentation pattern when a miss pattern combination is displayed after passing through a reach state, in which one more pattern will result in a jackpot. The reach jackpot presentation pattern is a presentation pattern when a jackpot pattern combination is displayed after passing through a reach state. In particular, patterns when passing through a reach state include patterns with various long and short fluctuation times, and a reach pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time is called a "normal reach", and a reach pattern with a long fluctuation time is called a "super reach". The normal miss presentation pattern, reach miss presentation pattern, and reach jackpot presentation pattern each include a normal pattern displayed in a normal state and a time-saving pattern displayed in a time-saving state. However, even in the normal state, if the second pattern change corresponds to the ball entering the second starting hole 12, the probability of the jackpot accompanying the probability change or the probability of the unit number of plays of the special game being increased is higher than the first change corresponding to the ball entering the first starting hole 11, so a pattern for chance presentation may be used to indicate that there is a relatively favorable chance of a jackpot occurring. In the embodiment, a time-saving pattern is used in the time-saving state, but since the time-saving pattern is also used in the probability change state, a time-saving pattern is also used in the probability change state. However, in a modified example, a specification may be used in which a pattern for the probability change different from that for the time-saving pattern is used in the probability change state. Alternatively, a specification may be used in which a common pattern is used for the time-saving and probability change, or a specification may be used in which a pattern for the time-saving and probability change is not used in particular, and a pattern for the probability change is used in the probability change state.

When the number of reserved symbols for the winning/losing lottery reaches a predetermined number (for example, three), the pattern change time in the case of a loss is shortened from the normal time in order to increase the game efficiency (hereinafter, also referred to as "shortened change"). Similarly, when the number of reserved symbols for the winning/losing lottery reaches four, the pattern change time in the case of a loss is shortened even further than the case of three symbols in order to further increase the game efficiency (hereinafter, also referred to as "ultra-shortened change"). After the above-mentioned pattern change, if the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 at the time of stopping are in a stopped state indicating a jackpot, the game moves to a special game, which is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than normal game, and the opening and closing operation of the big prize opening 20 is started. The stopping state of the decorative symbol 61 indicating a jackpot is, for example, a combination state in which the types of the three symbols match.

There are two types of special games: normal special games and shortened special games, and the profits from winning balls vary greatly. A normal special game is started by the display of a presentation screen called the start demo time. After the start demo time screen is displayed, the large prize winning hole 20 is opened, and after the opening continues for about 30 seconds or after nine or more game balls have fallen in, it is closed once. The opening and closing of the large prize winning hole 20 is basically called a unit game, but there may be cases where the opening is repeated for a short period of time during one unit game. After the opening and closing of the large prize winning hole 20 or the unit game is repeated a predetermined number of times, for example, four or ten times, the normal special game is ended by the display of a presentation screen called the end demo time. In a normal special game, nine or more balls can be fully expected to enter per unit game, and a sufficient number of prize balls (also called "balls") can be acquired by playing ten unit games, resulting in a large profit. A special game in which 10 unit games are repeated is also referred to as a "10R jackpot" as appropriate, and a special game in which 4 unit games are repeated is also referred to as a "4R jackpot" as appropriate. Although the unit games are repeated 10 times, it is also possible to realize a normal special game (sometimes referred to as an "effective nR jackpot") that is essentially the same as a small number of unit games being repeated by opening the large prize opening 20 for a shorter time (e.g., 1.6 seconds) in some unit games.

On the other hand, in the shortened special game, the start demo time and end demo time are short or almost nonexistent (e.g., 0.1 seconds), and the large prize winning hole 20 is opened for only 1.6 seconds in one unit game. This unit game is repeated twice to end the shortened special game. In the shortened special game, the opening of the large prize winning hole 20 is repeated only twice for a very short time, so that almost no balls enter the large prize winning hole 20, and the amount of balls paid out is essentially equal to zero or a small number (for example, the number of balls paid out according to the number of balls that enter, such as a few balls to several tens of balls, up to about 1 to 2 balls per round). A special game in which two unit games are repeated is also referred to as a "2R jackpot" as appropriate. Note that although the number of unit games is the same as in the normal special game, the shortened special game can also be realized by opening the large prize winning hole 20 for a shorter time than normal in all unit games.

Furthermore, after the above-mentioned pattern change, if the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52 and the decorative pattern 61 at the time of stopping are in a predetermined small win mode, the game transitions to a small win game consisting of one unit game, and the opening and closing operation of the large prize opening 20 is executed. In one unit game that constitutes the small win game, the large prize opening 20 is opened for only about 1.6 seconds, and the appearance is an operation mode that is similar to a 2R big win.

When a special game occurs and the winning stop pattern at that time is a specific pattern (for example, "777"), a special game, which is a special game, will start after the special game ends. During the special game, a lottery is held with a higher probability of winning than in the normal probability state, and a new special game may occur relatively quickly. Note that the result of the lottery is a specific jackpot, i.e., a jackpot with a special jackpot, may not be clearly indicated on the outside, and a latent special jackpot state may be set in which no explicit notification is given as a decorative pattern or performance content. In that case, even during the special jackpot, the performance display device 60 does not clearly indicate whether the jackpot is in a special jackpot or not. Note that the performance display device 60 may clearly indicate whether the jackpot is in a special jackpot or not when a specified condition is met.

In the normal game after the special game ends, an easy-to-enter state, which is one of the specific game states, is started. In the easy-to-enter state, the probability of winning the opening lottery is increased from normal, and the opening extension is performed by lengthening the opening time of the normal electric device 90. In addition to the possibility of increasing the number of times that normal symbols are won per certain time, the ease of entering the second starting hole 12 is also increased, so that the number of balls entering the second starting hole 12 is also likely to increase. Therefore, as a result of the increased opportunity to win prize balls by entering the second starting hole 12, it becomes possible to continue playing with almost no balls being lost, or while gradually increasing the number of balls being held.

In the easy-to-score state, as one of the specific game states, the time for the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 to change is shortened from the normal state, so-called time reduction is further implemented. The time for the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 to change is returned to the original time after a predetermined number of changes, for example 100 times, but if a jackpot occurs before the number of changes is reached, the time reduction is also terminated. Since the time for the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 to change is shortened in the time reduction, the time until a jackpot occurs can be shortened compared to the normal state in which the symbols change at the normal time, and the ease of winning a jackpot can be relatively increased. In a modified example, the time reduction for the special symbols may not be implemented in the easy-to-score state.

Figure 2 shows the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko game machine. The power switch 150 is a switch that turns the power of the pachinko game machine 100 on and off. The main board 200 controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine 100, and in particular processes the general game operation, such as the lottery when the first start hole 11 and the second start hole 12 are won. The sub-board 300 is equipped with a liquid crystal unit 151, controls the display content on the performance display device 60, and in particular changes the performance display content according to the judgment result by the main board 200. The back set mechanism 152 includes a prize ball tank 153, a flow path for prize balls, a payout device 154 that pays out prize balls, etc. The payout device 154 pays out game balls supplied from the prize ball tank 153 to the upper ball tray 105 according to the winning of each winning hole. The payout control board 155 controls the payout operation by the payout device 154. The launching device 156 launches the balls stored in the upper ball tray 105 into the play area 81 one by one. The launching control board 157 controls the launching operation of the launching device 156. The power supply board 158 supplies power to each part of the pachinko game machine 100. A performance display unit 159 is provided on the main board 200. The performance display unit 159 is composed of four 7-segment LEDs that display, for example, a four-digit number, the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the total number of launched balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls.

A setting change device 170 is provided on the main board 200. The setting change device 170 is a device for changing the setting to one of a plurality of settings (also called game settings) corresponding to a plurality of game specifications. For example, six game settings (setting 1 to setting 6) are prepared as game settings, and the probability of a jackpot can be made different depending on the game setting. Specifically, the larger the numerical value among settings 1 to 6, the more advantageous the game specification can be for the player, and if the jackpot probabilities for settings 1 to 6 are M1 to M6, the jackpot probabilities for each setting can be determined so that M1≦M2≦M3≦M4≦M5≦M6. It is not necessary to assign different jackpot probabilities to different game settings, and the jackpot probabilities may be the same between different game settings. For example, the same jackpot probability may be assigned to all game settings from setting 1 to setting 6.

The setting change device 170 includes a setting key cylinder 171 into which a setting key held by an employee of the game establishment is inserted, a setting change button 172 for changing the setting to one of a number of game settings, a setting display unit 173 for lighting and displaying the set setting value, and a setting memory for storing the set setting value. The setting key cylinder 171 is a turnkey-type switch for transitioning to a state in which the setting can be changed (hereinafter referred to as the "setting change state") or a state in which the setting can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as the "setting confirmation state"). First, the power switch 150 is turned off, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder 171, the setting key is turned on by turning it, and then the power switch 150 is turned on to transition to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. To transition to the setting change state, the power switch 150 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch (sometimes called the "RWM clear switch"). On the other hand, to transition to the setting confirmation state, the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch.

When the setting change state is entered, the setting display unit 173 displays the number "1" indicating setting 1 as the initial value of the game setting, and the setting can be changed by pressing the setting change button 172. The setting display unit 173 is composed of a 7-segment LED that displays a single digit number. Each time the setting change button 172 is pressed once, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is changed in the order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → .... When the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to its original position after the setting is changed and turned off, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 at that time is stored in the setting memory, the setting change is confirmed, and the game becomes playable. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation state is entered, the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173. In the setting confirmation state, even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 does not change, and the setting cannot be changed. After that, when the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to its original position and turned off, the game becomes playable. When the setting key is turned off to enable play, the setting display unit 173 goes dark and the current setting value cannot be seen.

The setting change button 172 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. In this case, if the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch pressed while the setting key is not turned (setting key off state), RAM clear is executed. On the other hand, if the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch pressed while the setting key is turned (setting key on state), RAM clear is executed and the state transitions to the setting change state. Also, if the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch not pressed while the setting key is off, the power is restored without RAM clear. On the other hand, if the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch not pressed while the setting key is on, the state transitions to the setting confirmation state. Also, the setting display unit 173 may also be used as the performance display unit 159. In this case, the combined display unit may function as the performance display unit 159 in the playable state, and function as the setting display unit 173 in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Alternatively, the setting change device 170 may not be provided, and the game settings may not be changed.

<Function block>
3 shows the functional blocks of the pachinko game machine 100. Below, we will explain the functions realized by using each component, but in this specification, in order to align the physical configuration with the functional configuration, for example, the main board 200, the payout control board 155, the launch control board 157, and other parts that have already been explained as physical configurations may use the same terms as they are for convenience.

The pachinko game machine 100 is configured in such a way that functions are shared among a power supply board 158 that generates power for use within the game machine based on an AC power source (AC 24V, etc.) supplied from outside the game machine, a main board 200 that acts as the main control device that controls the basic game operations and game progress, a payout control board 155 that acts as a frame control device that controls the payout of prize balls, a launch control board 157 that controls the launch of game balls into the game area, and a sub-board 300 that acts as a sub-control device that controls the performance operations and processing.

The main board 200 is electrically connected to the first start port 11, the second start port 12, the big winning port 20, the first operating port 31, the second operating port 32, the general winning port group (first general winning port 33a, second general winning port 33b), the out port 34, the pattern display unit 120, and the external information output terminal 160, and transmits and receives various control signals between them. The payout control board 155 is electrically connected to the main board 200, the launch control board 157, and the payout device 154. The payout control board 155 indirectly controls the launch control board 157 by transmitting a launch permission signal to the launch control board 157 based on a signal indicating the prize ball payout transmitted from the main board 200 and the control state of the main board 200, and also controls the payout of the prize balls by the payout device 154. The payout device 154 includes a payout motor 166 and a ball counting sensor 167. The launch control board 157 is electrically connected to the payout control board 155, the launch device 156, and the ball sending device 164, and controls the ball sending device 164 and the launch device 156 based on a launch permission signal sent from the payout control board 155 to launch the game balls. The sub-board 300 is electrically connected to the performance display device 60, the movable role 66 (drive motor 67, position detection sensor 68), the speaker 108, the performance input operation device 115 (performance button 109, cross key 110), and the decorative lamp 111, and transmits and receives various control signals between each of them.

Data transmission between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300 is one-way from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300, and each component for realizing the overall operation by one-way data transmission is arranged on the main board 200 and the sub-board 300. Since the one-way data transmission from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the components included in the sub-board 300 to the components included in the main board 200, and data transmission cannot be requested. Therefore, the sub-board 300 cannot refer to information generated by the main board 200 unless that information is transmitted. In addition, data is transmitted and received in both directions between the main board 200 and the payout control board 155, and between the payout control board 155 and the launch control board 157. However, as with the main board 200 and the sub-board 300, a configuration in which data is transmitted and received in one direction from the main board 200 to the payout control board 155, or a configuration in which data is transmitted and received in one direction from the payout control board 155 to the launch control board 157 may be used.

Note that the functional blocks included in the main board 200, the payout control board 155, the launch control board 157, and the sub-board 300 described below are merely examples, and as a modified example, some of the functional blocks may be mounted on other boards. For example, the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be configured to be mounted on the sub-board 300, or the functional blocks included in the launch control board 157 may be configured to be mounted on the payout control board 155. Also, for example, some of the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be configured to be mounted on the main board 200, or the remaining parts may be mounted on the payout control board 155, and some of the functional blocks may be divided and provided on multiple boards to form a single functional block as a whole.

<Main Board 200>
4 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the main board 200. The main board 200 includes a ball entry determination means 201, a performance display unit 159, a random number generation means 202, a first lottery means 211, a second lottery means 212, a pre-determination means 235, a normal drawing lottery means 213, a hold control means 240, a main display control means 250, a special game control means 260, a small win game control means 265, a specific game control means 270, an opening/closing control means 275, a special drawing adjustment means 276, a main initial processing execution means 280, a main power cut processing execution means 282, a main error detection means 284, a setting change means 286, a setting confirmation means 287, and a command communication means 205.

<Ball entry determination means 201>
The ball entry determination means 201 determines whether a game ball has entered each winning hole. When the ball entry determination means 201 receives first start winning information, it determines that the game ball has entered the first start hole 11, and when it receives second start winning information, it determines that the game ball has entered the second start hole 12. When the ball entry determination means 201 receives large prize hole winning information, it determines that the game ball has entered the large prize hole 20, and when it receives general prize information, it determines that the game ball has entered the general prize hole 33. When the ball entry determination means 201 receives passing information, it determines that the game ball has passed through the first operation hole 31 or the second operation hole 32. When the ball entry determination means 201 receives discharge information, it determines that the game ball has passed through the out hole 34. The ball entry determination means 201 calculates the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the total number of shot balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls, and displays it on the performance display unit 159. The ball entry determination means 201 causes the performance display unit 159 to display the value of "number of paid balls"÷"number of out balls"×100 when the probability of a jackpot is in a normal probability state and a normal ball entry state (a so-called low-low state of low probability and low ball entry). Therefore, the performance display unit 159 displays the base in a low base state.

<Random number generation means 202>
The random number generating means 202 generates random numbers to be used for various determinations in the first lottery means 211, the second lottery means 212, and the general lottery means 213. Specifically, the random number generating means 202 generates random numbers in the range of "0" to "65535" by a predetermined means as random numbers (also called "win/lose lottery values") to be used in the win/lose lottery by the first win/lose determination means 221 and the second win/lose determination means 222. In addition, the random number generating means 202 generates random numbers in the range of "0" to "255" by a predetermined means as random numbers (also called "design determination lottery values") to be used in design determination (design lottery) by the first design determination means 226 and the second design determination means 227. The random number generating means 202 generates random numbers in the range of "0" to "255" by a predetermined means as random numbers (also called "variation pattern determination lottery values") used in the determination of the variation pattern by the first variation pattern determining means 231 and the second variation pattern determining means 232. The random number generating means 202 generates random numbers in the range of "0" to "99" by a predetermined means as random numbers used in the winning/losing lottery by the normal pattern lottery means 213. The random number generating means 202 generates random numbers in the range of "0" to "2" by a predetermined means as random numbers used in the determination of the normal pattern. The "random numbers" referred to here may be physical random numbers generated by a random number generating circuit or true random numbers in the mathematical sense, as well as pseudo-random numbers such as random numbers using a 16-bit counter or software random numbers using a random number generating algorithm. Or they may be random numbers generated by combining hardware random numbers and software random numbers. Furthermore, the random numbers obtained by the first lottery means 211 and the second lottery means 212 may be generated by the same generating means, or may be generated by different generating means.

<General drawing lottery means 213>
When the game ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, the normal symbol lottery means 213 obtains a random number used for lottery of the normal symbol and a random number used for determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol from the random number generating means 202 and executes a lottery. The normal symbol lottery means 213 holds a normal symbol hit/miss judgment table (not shown) referred to for judging the hit/miss of the normal symbol and a normal symbol judgment table referred to for determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol to be displayed on the normal symbol display unit 45. The normal symbol hit/miss judgment table defines a correspondence between the lottery value for hit/miss lottery and a hit, and the normal symbol judgment table defines a correspondence between the lottery value for determining the stop symbol and the normal symbol, and the hit/miss and the stop symbol of the normal symbol are determined based on the hit probability and the symbol selection probability described above. When the lottery value for the normal pattern lottery corresponds to a win, the normal pattern lottery means 213 refers to the normal pattern judgment table to determine the stop pattern of the normal pattern, and when the lottery value for the normal pattern lottery corresponds to a miss, it always determines the state of the miss pattern of 1. When the result of the win/loss judgment of the normal pattern corresponds to a win and the normal pattern stops in a predetermined pattern (first win state or second win state), the opening/closing control means 275 described later expands the normal electric role 90 of the second start hole 12 according to the state of the stopped pattern and the game state. The expansion time is 0.1 seconds at the time of short opening and 6 seconds at the time of long opening. The lottery value of the normal pattern is temporarily reserved by the reservation control means 240 described later. However, the lottery value is reserved only when it does not exceed the predetermined reserved upper limit number reserved by the reservation control means 240.

<First lottery means 211 and second lottery means 212>
The first lottery means 211 includes a first lottery value acquisition means 216, a first winning/losing judgment means 221, a first pattern determination means 226, and a first variation pattern determination means 231 as a function of executing a first lottery related to a first game, and executes a first winning/losing lottery as a winning/losing lottery corresponding to a ball entering the first starting hole 11. Based on various lottery results by the first lottery means 211, the main display control means 250 displays the first special pattern 51 in the first special pattern display section 41. Also, based on information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the display area of the performance display device 60 displays the decorative pattern 61. The second lottery means 212 includes a second lottery value acquisition means 217, a second winning/losing judgment means 222, a second pattern determination means 227, and a second variation pattern determination means 232, and executes a second winning/losing lottery as a winning/losing lottery corresponding to a ball entering the second starting hole 12. Based on various lottery results by the second lottery means 212, the main display control means 250 causes the second special symbol 52 to be displayed variably in the second special symbol display section 42. Also, based on information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative symbol 61 is displayed variably in the display area of the performance display device 60.

<First lottery value acquisition means 216 and second lottery value acquisition means 217>
The first lottery value acquisition means 216 acquires random numbers for various lotteries and decisions by the first lottery means 211 from the random number generation means 202, triggered by the ball entering the first starting hole 11. Specifically, the first winning/losing lottery value for the winning/losing decision by the first winning/losing decision means 221, the first pattern lottery value for the stop mode decision of the first special pattern 51 by the first pattern decision means 226, and the first pattern lottery value for the decision of the change pattern (change time) of the first special pattern 51 by the first change pattern decision means 231 are acquired from the corresponding random number generation means. The second lottery value acquisition means 217 acquires random numbers for various lotteries and decisions by the second lottery means 212 from the random number generation means 202, triggered by the ball entering the second starting hole 12. Specifically, the second win/lose lottery value for determining win/lose by the second win/lose determination means 222, the second pattern lottery value for determining the stopping mode of the second special pattern 52 by the second pattern determination means 227, and the second pattern lottery value for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the second special pattern 52 by the second fluctuation pattern determination means 232 are obtained from the corresponding random number generation means.

The first win/loss determination means 221 executes a win/loss determination based on the first win/loss selection value to determine whether or not to transition to a special game. The second win/loss determination means 222 executes a win/loss determination based on the second win/loss selection value to determine whether or not to transition to a special game. More specifically, the win/loss determination determines whether or not the result corresponds to a "big win" indicating a transition to a special game, a "small win" indicating a transition to a small win game, or a "miss" indicating no transition to a special game or a small win game. The first win/loss determination means 221 and the second win/loss determination means 222 hold a win/loss determination table to be referenced in the win/loss determination. Note that the win/loss determination executed when starting the pattern variation is also referred to as the "win/loss determination as the main determination" as appropriate to distinguish it from the advance win/loss determination described later. In this specification, the terms "table" and "selection criteria" do not strictly refer to data in which a correspondence between a first parameter, such as a lottery value, and a second parameter, such as a value indicating an option, is defined in a table structure, but also broadly include cases where such a correspondence is realized by a program structure that derives the second parameter from the first parameter. These are all referred to as "selection criteria" as appropriate, as a concept that is essentially synonymous with "table." Furthermore, when a table structure is used, a selection criterion that is essentially one type may be composed of a combination of multiple structurally subdivided tables, but when "multiple types of selection criteria" are used, the actual number of types of tables is indicated, not the number of subdivided tables.

The first hit/miss judgment means 221 and the second hit/miss judgment means 222 hold a table corresponding to each hit/miss judgment as a hit/miss judgment table to be referred to in the hit/miss judgment. Specifically, a hit/miss judgment table for hit/miss judgment by the first hit/miss judgment means 221 (also referred to as the "first hit/miss judgment table") and a hit/miss judgment table for hit/miss judgment by the second hit/miss judgment means 222 (also referred to as the "second hit/miss judgment table") are held, and the table to be referred to is selected according to the hit/miss judgment to be performed. In the multiple hit/miss judgment tables, the judgment results of a big hit, a small hit, and a miss are associated with a hit/miss lottery value, and the hit/miss probability is determined according to the associated range setting of the big hit. In addition, multiple types of hit/miss judgment tables corresponding to multiple game settings are prepared, and for example, a hit/miss judgment table with a different correspondence between the hit/miss lottery value and the hit/miss judgment result is prepared for each of the game settings from setting 1 to setting 6. In addition, if the probability of winning a big win, a small win, or a miss is the same across multiple game settings, a win/loss determination table that is common to the multiple game settings may be prepared.

Figure 5 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of a hit/miss judgment table. This diagram shows a hit/miss judgment table corresponding to a specific game setting, and shows a hit/miss judgment table corresponding to setting 6. In the hit/miss judgment table in this diagram, the judgment results of a big hit, a small hit, and a miss are associated with a hit/miss lottery value, and the hit/miss probability of a big hit or a small hit is determined according to each associated range setting. The first hit/miss judgment means 221 and the second hit/miss judgment means 222 refer to the hit/miss judgment table in this diagram in the hit/miss judgment as the main judgment. In both the first hit/miss lottery by the first hit/miss judgment means 221 and the second hit/miss lottery by the second hit/miss judgment means 222, a big hit is determined only when the hit/miss lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299 during normal times. During a probability change, the range of a big hit is expanded, and a big hit is determined not only when the hit/miss lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299, but also when it falls within the range of 300 to 2999. In this way, the range that corresponds to a jackpot changes depending on the game state. Note that in this diagram, a single hit/miss determination table is used to show the jackpot ranges for both normal and special bonuses, but separate hit/miss determination tables may be prepared for normal and special bonuses, or for the first and second hit/miss lotteries.

In this embodiment, even if the winning/losing lottery value does not fall within the jackpot range, it will be a small win if it falls within a specified range. In the example of this figure, if the winning/losing lottery value acquired by the first winning/losing judgment means 221 falls within the range of 56500 to 65535, it will be a small win, and if the winning/losing lottery value acquired by the second winning/losing judgment means 222 falls within the range of 64000 to 65535, it will be a small win. In other words, the range of small wins is wider in the first winning/losing lottery than in the second winning/losing lottery, and small wins are more likely to occur. In this way, if it does not fall within the jackpot range, it is originally a "miss", but in the example of this figure, the winning/losing lottery value range in the case where it does not fall within the jackpot range and does not fall within the small win range is specifically expressed as a "miss". In other words, if "winning/losing" is viewed from the perspective of "whether it is a jackpot or not", a "small win" may be considered to be included in the broad sense of "miss" in the sense of "not a jackpot". Furthermore, when considering "hit or miss" in terms of "hit or miss," "small hits" can be considered to be included in the broader definition of "hit" along with "big hits." Note that while this diagram shows an example in which the judgment table for whether or not it is a big hit and the judgment table for whether or not it is a small hit are realized in the form of a single hit or miss judgment table, they may also be realized as separate tables. Also, a "small hit" may be provided in only one of the first game or the second game, or may not be provided in either game. In that case, a value corresponding to a small hit is not set in the corresponding hit or miss judgment table.

Figure 6 shows a schematic diagram of the range setting of the winning/losing lottery value for each set value. Figure 6 (a) shows the correspondence between the first winning/losing lottery value acquired by the first winning/losing judgment means 221 and the winning/losing judgment result. Figure 6 (b) shows the correspondence between the second winning/losing lottery value acquired by the second winning/losing judgment means 222 and the winning/losing judgment result. The range of the first winning/losing lottery value and the second winning/losing lottery value that will result in a jackpot during normal play and during a special chance is 0 to 294 for the set value "1", 0 to 295 for the set value "2", 0 to 296 for the set value "3", 0 to 297 for the set value "4", 0 to 298 for the set value "5", and 0 to 299 for the set value "6". Therefore, the larger the set value, the wider the range of winning/losing lottery values that will result in a jackpot during normal play, and the higher the probability of a jackpot during normal play. In addition, the range of the first winning/losing lottery value and the second winning/losing lottery value that will be a jackpot only during the probability change (i.e., a miss during normal times) is 295 to 2949 for the setting value "1", 296 to 2959 for the setting value "2", 297 to 2969 for the setting value "3", 298 to 2979 for the setting value "4", 299 to 2989 for the setting value "5", and 300 to 2999 for the setting value "6". Therefore, the larger the setting value, the larger the range of winning/losing lottery values that will be a jackpot during the probability change, and the higher the probability of winning during the probability change. The range of winning/losing lottery values is determined so that the ratio between the normal time jackpot probability that will be a jackpot during normal times and the probability change jackpot probability that will be a jackpot during the probability change will be constant regardless of the setting value. In this diagram, the range of the winning/losing selection value is set so that the probability of a jackpot during a special bonus is 10 times the probability of a jackpot during normal play, and this range is common to all setting values "1" to "6". The range of the winning/losing selection value is also set so that the probability of a small win is constant regardless of the setting value. For all setting values "1" to "6", a small win occurs when the first winning/losing selection value ranges from 56,500 to 65,535, and a small win occurs when the second winning/losing selection value ranges from 64,000 to 65,535. A winning/losing selection value range outside the range of a jackpot or small win is a "miss". In this diagram, the winning probability is different for each setting value, but the correspondence between the winning/losing selection value and the winning/losing judgment result may be set so that the winning probability is the same between different setting values.

<First symbol determination means 226 and second symbol determination means 227>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 determine the stop symbol when the symbol starts to change based on the symbol lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202 and the result of the hit/miss judgment. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 hold a plurality of symbol determination tables to be referred to in order to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol. Specifically, the first symbol determination means 226 holds a plurality of symbol determination tables according to the result of the hit/miss judgment by the first hit/miss judgment means 221, and the second symbol determination means 227 holds a plurality of symbol determination tables according to the result of the hit/miss judgment by the second hit/miss judgment means 222. The first hit/miss judgment means 221 holds a first symbol determination table at the time of a big hit to be referred to at the time of a big hit, a first symbol determination table at the time of a small hit to be referred to at the time of a small hit, and a first symbol determination table at the time of a miss to be referred to at the time of a miss. The second hit/miss judgment means 222 holds a second symbol judgment table at the time of a big hit, a second symbol judgment table at the time of a small hit, and a second symbol judgment table at the time of a miss. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 select the symbol judgment table to be referred to depending on the result of the hit/miss judgment. The symbol judgment performed when starting the symbol variation is also called "symbol judgment as the main judgment" as appropriate to distinguish it from the preliminary symbol judgment described later.

Figure 7 is a diagram showing a pattern determination table. Figure 7(a) is a table to be referred to when the result of the hit/miss determination is a big hit, Figure 7(b) is a table to be referred to when the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss, and Figure 7(c) is a table to be referred to when the result of the hit/miss determination is a small hit. The first pattern determination means 226 and the second pattern determination means 227 refer to this pattern determination table in the pattern determination as the main determination. In each pattern determination table, a correspondence between the numbers "0" to "10" indicating the type of special pattern and the first pattern selection value or the second pattern selection value is determined. The types of special patterns are respectively associated with the hit/miss determination results of big hit, small hit, and miss, with "0" to "4" corresponding to big hit, "5" to "9" corresponding to small hit, and "10" corresponding to miss. Each type is assigned multiple special patterns, that is, multiple symbols that generally have no meaning and are formed by a combination of segments.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), the types of special symbols "0" to "4" correspond to the presence or absence of a jackpot and probability fluctuation after the jackpot. Specifically, type "0" indicates a 10R jackpot with a probability change as a specific jackpot, and is associated with "0 to 99" for the first symbol lottery value and "0 to 144" for the second symbol lottery value. Type "1" indicates a 4R jackpot with a probability change (or "effectively 4R win") as a specific jackpot, and is associated with "100 to 149" for the first symbol lottery value and "145 to 149" for the second symbol lottery value. Type "2" indicates a 2R jackpot with a probability change, and type "2" is associated with "150 to 189" for both the first symbol lottery value and the second symbol lottery value. Type "3" indicates a 10R jackpot without a probability change as a normal jackpot, and type "3" corresponds to a first pattern selection value and a second pattern selection value of "150-189". Type "4" indicates a 4R jackpot without a probability change as a normal jackpot, and type "4" corresponds to a first pattern selection value and a second pattern selection value of "230-255". In this way, the selection probability for each jackpot type (i.e. the content of the jackpot and whether or not there is a probability change afterwards) is determined by the size of the range of the pattern selection value.

It is also possible to provide more types of special symbols, and in that case, by configuring the system so that one jackpot type is determined in correspondence with the multiple types of special symbols, it is possible to increase the number of symbol types while setting a small number of jackpot types. Alternatively, it is possible to subdivide the jackpot types into more types in correspondence with the increased number of symbol types. Furthermore, it is also possible to provide different symbol types for the first and second lotteries. In this case, the system is configured so that one jackpot type is determined in correspondence with each of the types of special symbols selected in the first and second lotteries. However, it is desirable to set the probability fluctuation rate to be the same for the first and second lotteries.

As shown in FIG. 7(b), type "10" corresponds to the entire range of symbol selection values when the result of the win/loss determination is a miss. Therefore, it is determined that the same special symbol will always be displayed when the result is a miss. It is also possible to provide multiple special symbols to be displayed when the result is a miss.

As shown in FIG. 7(c), special symbol types "5" to "9" are associated with small wins. Type "5" is associated with the symbol selection value range "0-49", and type "6" is associated with the symbol selection value range "50-99". Type "7" is associated with the symbol selection value range "100-149", type "8" is associated with the symbol selection value range "150-199", and type "9" is associated with the symbol selection value range "200-255".

In this embodiment, in order to save the storage area in the main board 200, the table in FIG. 7 is also referred to as the pre-pattern determination table in the pre-pattern determination. The first and second pattern determination means 226 and 227 transmit the value "0" to "10" indicating the type of special pattern as a result of the pre-pattern determination to the performance determination means 303 together with the value indicating the first or second win/lose lottery and the number of reserved symbols. The pre-pattern determination table may be one that is further subdivided to enable complex determination, or one that simplifies the determination range of the jackpot pattern for executing a similar special game. In addition, when the pattern is determined uniformly in the case of a miss as in this embodiment, a specific pattern may be determined without referring to the acquired pattern lottery value or without preparing a pattern determination table for a miss.

<First variation pattern determination means 231 and second variation pattern determination means 232>
Returning to FIG. 4, the first variation pattern determination means 231 determines a variation pattern in which the display process of the pattern variation to be displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the performance display device 60 is determined from among a plurality of variation patterns based on the first pattern lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202. The second variation pattern determination means 232 determines a variation pattern in which the display process of the pattern variation to be displayed on the second special symbol display unit 42 and the performance display device 60 is determined from among a plurality of variation patterns based on the second pattern lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 each determine a variation pattern of the pattern variation by referring to a variation pattern table when starting the pattern variation. In addition, the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 perform a pre-pattern determination of which variation pattern range the pattern lottery value corresponds to. The first variation pattern determination means 231, the second variation pattern determination means 232, and the control means of the main board 200 each hold or share a variation pattern table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern when the variation start condition is satisfied, and a pre-pattern determination table that is used to generate information for determining whether to execute a pre-reading process when the ball enters the starting hole. The variation pattern has a variation time from the start of the variation to the stop when the special symbol is displayed, and the variation time varies depending on the type. In other words, for each variation pattern in which the display process of the pattern variation is determined, a variation display time is essentially determined for each pattern as the end condition of the pattern variation, and the variation of the special symbol is stopped when the variation display time has elapsed. In addition, the variation pattern determination performed when starting the pattern variation is also referred to as "variation pattern determination as main determination" as appropriate in order to distinguish it from the pre-pattern determination. In addition, in order to contribute to the selection of the variation performance pattern of the decorative symbol described later, it may be defined as a different type of variation pattern despite having the same variation time.

Figure 8 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of a fluctuation pattern table. The first fluctuation pattern determination means 231 and the second fluctuation pattern determination means 232 refer to the table in this figure (a) in the normal state, and refer to the table in this figure (b) in the time-saving state.

As shown in Figure 8(a), when the result of the hit/miss judgment in the normal state is a miss, if the pattern selection value is 0-4, the super reach "Super 1" with pattern range number "0" is selected, and if the pattern selection value is 5-9, the super reach "Super 2" with pattern range number "1" is selected. If the pattern selection value is 10-19, the normal reach "Normal 1" with pattern range number "2" is selected, and if the pattern selection value is 20-29, the normal reach "Normal 2" with pattern range number "3" is selected. If the pattern selection value is 30-255, the "no reach miss" with pattern range number "4" is selected. For the "no reach miss", a different variation pattern is selected depending on the number of reserved balls, and when the number of reserved balls is 0-2, a 10-second variation pattern is selected, when the number of reserved balls is 3, a 7-second variation pattern is selected, and when the number of reserved balls is 4, a 4-second variation pattern is selected.

In this diagram, an example is shown where the variation times are mainly classified into five types, but multiple variation presentation patterns are prepared for each of these variation patterns on the sub-board 300, which means that a total of several dozen types of variation presentation patterns are associated with the lottery value ranges for each classification.

The range of pattern selection values assigned to "Normal 1", "Normal 2", and "No reach, miss" also differs depending on the number of reserved balls. When the number of reserved balls is 0 or 1, it is as shown in this figure (a), but as the number of reserved balls increases, the selection value range of "Normal 1" and "Normal 2" becomes narrower, and the selection value range of "No reach, miss" becomes wider. The smaller the number of reserved balls, the wider the selection value range of the fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time, and the higher the probability that a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time will be selected. Therefore, the smaller the number of reserved balls, the longer the average fluctuation time, and the more the number of reserved balls, the shorter the average fluctuation time. By using a fluctuation pattern table in which the correspondence between the pattern selection value range and the fluctuation pattern differs for each number of reserved balls, it is possible to realize control that makes it easier for a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time to be selected when the number of reserved balls is small.

When the result of the hit/miss judgment in normal state is a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, if the pattern selection value is 0-123, it selects "Super 1", which is a super reach with pattern range number "5", and if the pattern selection value is 124-248, it selects "Super 2", which is a super reach with pattern range number "6". If the pattern selection value is 249-252, it selects "Normal 1", which is a normal reach with pattern range number "7", and if the pattern selection value is 253-255, it selects "Normal 2", which is a normal reach with pattern range number "8".

When the result of the hit/miss judgment is a 2R big hit or small hit under normal conditions, if the pattern selection value is 0-122, the super reach "Super 3" with pattern range number "9" is selected, and if the pattern selection value is 123-255, the normal reach "Normal 3" with pattern range number "10" is selected.

When the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 transmit the preliminary judgment result to the performance determination means 303 as a so-called pre-reading result, they transmit the pattern range number value (0 to 10) along with a value indicating whether it is the first win/lose lottery or the second win/lose lottery and the number of reserved items. Note that in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8, a table is provided for each win/lose judgment result in the preliminary pattern judgment, but it is also possible to use one preliminary pattern judgment table regardless of the win/lose lottery result to derive only information regarding the approximate range in which the random number value is located, and to control the control means of the sub-board 300 to determine what variation will be executed along with the preliminary win/lose judgment result.

In the variation pattern table of FIG. 8(b) referred to in the time-saving state, pattern selection values are assigned to all variation patterns for time-saving. However, the correspondence between the pattern selection value range and the variation time is the same as in FIG. 8(a) except for "reach no miss shortened" selected by miss. "reach no miss shortened" is a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time that corresponds to the same selection value range and pattern range number as "reach no miss" in FIG. 8(a). For "reach no miss shortened", a different variation pattern is also selected according to the reserved number, and when the reserved number is 0 or 1, a 10-second variation pattern is selected, and when the reserved number is 2 to 4, a 1-second variation pattern is selected. Note that the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 may refer to different variation pattern tables, or different variation pattern tables may be referenced according to the game state. For example, in a gaming machine in which the second lottery is set to be more advantageous than the first lottery and the second lottery is processed with priority over the first lottery, it is undesirable for the player if the reserved balls for the second lottery are depleted and the first lottery is executed continuously, even in a state where it is easy to score due to time saving. Therefore, in a losing variation in the first lottery in a state where it is easy to score, a variation pattern table may be referenced in which a long variation pattern (for example, 10 seconds) that does not shorten the variation time is uniformly selected regardless of the number of reserved balls.

<Suspension control means 240>
Returning to FIG. 4, the reservation control means 240 includes a special pattern reservation means 241 and a normal pattern reservation means 242. When the first or second winning or losing lottery value is newly acquired, if the pattern change corresponding to the previously acquired first or second winning or losing lottery value is displayed, the special pattern reservation means 241 reserves the start of the pattern change corresponding to the newly acquired first or second winning or losing lottery value, and stores the winning or losing lottery value until the corresponding pattern change display starts. Here, for the first special pattern, the first winning or losing lottery value, the first pattern selection value, and the first pattern selection value are stored with a maximum of four each, and for the second special pattern, the second winning or losing lottery value, the second pattern selection value, and the second pattern selection value are stored with a maximum of four each. The normal pattern reservation means 242 stores the normal pattern selection value acquired by the normal pattern selection means 213 as a reserved ball. The number of reserved items is represented by the number of lights or the number of flashes of the first special chart reserved display unit 71, the second special chart reserved display unit 72, and the normal chart reserved display unit 75. The number of reserved items by the special chart reserved means 241 is also displayed on the performance display device 60.

The lottery value of the second win/lose lottery reserved in the special chart reservation means 241 is consumed preferentially over the lottery value of the first win/lose lottery, and the pattern change is displayed. Therefore, even if the lottery value of a jackpot is reserved as the first win/lose lottery, the pattern change corresponding to the jackpot lottery value of the first win/lose lottery will not be displayed as long as there is a lottery value reserved as the second win/lose lottery. Therefore, even if a jackpot is reserved as the first win/lose lottery, it is possible to win multiple consecutive jackpots by continuing to play until a jackpot is reserved as the second win/lose lottery.

<Main Display Control Means 250>
The main display control means 250 includes a first special symbol control means 251, a second special symbol control means 252, and a normal symbol control means 254. The first special symbol control means 251 displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display unit 41 according to a variation pattern determined in response to the judgment result of the first winning/losing lottery by the first lottery means 211. The first special symbol control means 251 sets the start condition of a new pattern variation as the end of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the first winning/losing lottery or the second winning/losing lottery performed previously. The second special symbol control means 252 displays the variation of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display unit 42 according to a variation pattern determined in response to the judgment result of the second winning/losing lottery by the second lottery means 212. The second special symbol control means 252 also sets the condition for starting a new pattern change as the end of the display of the changing patterns corresponding to the previously performed first win/lose lottery or second win/lose lottery.

When the special chart holding means 241 has stored the winning/losing lottery value for the second winning/losing lottery, the first special chart control means 251 reserves the start of the pattern change display corresponding to the first winning/losing lottery. On the other hand, the second special chart control means 252 starts the pattern change display corresponding to the second winning/losing lottery regardless of whether the special chart holding means 241 has stored the winning/losing lottery value for the first winning/losing lottery. As a result, when lottery values are held for both the first winning/losing lottery and the second winning/losing lottery, the lottery value held in the second winning/losing lottery is read out preferentially and the pattern change is displayed. In such a case, the lottery value held in the first winning/losing lottery is not read out and the pattern change does not start until the number of holds for the second winning/losing lottery becomes 0.

The first special symbol control means 251 and the second special symbol control means 252 transmit a change start command and a change stop command to the performance determination means 303 (sub-main) by the command communication means 205 described later at the timing to start and stop the display of the change of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. When transmitting the change start command, the values indicating the hit/miss judgment result, the stop symbol, and the change pattern determined as the main judgment, and the value indicating whether it is the first hit/miss lottery or the second hit/miss lottery are transmitted to the performance determination means 303 together with the change start command. When transmitting the change stop command, the value indicating the stop symbol is transmitted again to the performance determination means 303 together with the change stop command. In addition, the performance determination means 303 (sub-main) transmits the change start command, the change stop command, etc. to the performance control means 304 in order to control the display of the decorative symbol by the performance control means 304 (sub-sub). This synchronizes the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the performance control means 304 (sub-sub), and maintains linkage. The normal pattern control means 254 displays the result of the lottery by the normal pattern lottery means 213 on the normal pattern display unit 45 as a variable display of the normal pattern.

<Special figure adjustment means 276>
The special pattern adjustment means 276 waits for the start of the variable display of one of the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 while displaying the other in a variable manner. The special pattern adjustment means 276 prioritizes the variable display of the second special pattern 52 based on the ball entering the second starting hole 12 over the variable display of the first special pattern 51 based on the ball entering the first starting hole 11, regardless of the order in which the game ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12. For example, when both the first winning/losing lottery value and the second winning/losing lottery value are reserved, the second winning/losing lottery value is always consumed preferentially, and the second special pattern 52 is continuously displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, the special pattern adjustment means 276 in the modified example may selectively change the display of the first special pattern 51 and the display of the second special pattern 52 according to the ball entry order into the first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12. For example, when the balls enter the first starting hole 11, the first starting hole 11, and the second starting hole 12 in that order, the display of the first special pattern 51, the first special pattern 51, and the second special pattern 52 is changed in that order. In this case, the special pattern adjustment means 276 monitors the reservation control means 240 and stores the reservation order of the winning/losing lottery values. Which special pattern should be changed is determined according to the ball entry order, that is, the reservation order of the winning/losing lottery values in the reservation control means 240, so that the player can easily visually grasp the order of the changes.

In another modified example, the special pattern adjustment means 276 may display the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 in a predetermined consumption order regardless of the ball entry order. For example, it may be preferred to alternate between the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52. For example, when both the first win/lose lottery value and the second win/lose lottery value are reserved, the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 are alternately displayed. Since which special pattern should be changed is simply alternated regardless of the ball entry order, the player can easily intuitively grasp the order of change.

The special pattern adjustment means 276 also waits for the start of the variable display of the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52 when one of them is stopped in a winning state. In this case, the variable display of the special pattern does not start while the special game is being played, so the player can concentrate on the special game.

<Preliminary Determination Means 235>
The advance judgment means 235 includes a first lottery advance judgment means 236 and a second lottery advance judgment means 237. The first lottery advance judgment means 236 uses various random numbers acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 to judge information related to the variation before the first special symbol control means 251 starts to vary before various judgments are performed by the first win/loss judgment means 221, the first symbol determination means 226, and the first variation pattern determination means 231. The second lottery advance judgment means 237 uses various random numbers acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 to judge information related to the variation before the second special symbol control means 252 starts to vary before various judgments are performed by the second win/loss judgment means 222, the second symbol determination means 227, and the second variation pattern determination means 232.

The first lottery pre-judgment means 236 holds a first pre-win/lose lottery value judgment table, a first pre-pattern lottery value judgment table, and a first pre-variation pattern random number value judgment table as judgment tables for pre-judgment related to the first lottery means 211. The first lottery pre-judgment means 236 judges the random number group to which the first win/lose lottery value stored in the special chart holding means 241 belongs using the first pre-win/lose lottery value judgment table. The first lottery pre-judgment means 236 judges the random number group to which the first pattern lottery value stored in the special chart holding means 241 belongs using the first pre-pattern lottery value judgment table. The first lottery pre-judgment means 236 judges the random number group to which the first variation pattern lottery value stored in the special chart holding means 241 belongs using the first pre-variation pattern judgment table. Then, these judgment results are temporarily stored as pre-judgment results, and information regarding the pre-judgment results is transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later.

Figure 9 is a schematic diagram showing a pre-win/lose determination table referenced in the pre-win/lose determination. The first lottery pre-determination means 236 (pre-win/lose determination for the first game) refers to the first pre-win/lose lottery value determination table in Figure 9 (a) when the ball enters the first starting hole 11, and if the win/lose lottery value is "0 to 299", a value of "1" indicating this is set as the pre-win/lose determination result. If the win/lose lottery value is "300 to 2999", a value of "2" indicating this is set as the pre-win/lose determination result. If the win/lose lottery value is "3000 to 56499", a value of "3" indicating this is set as the pre-win/lose determination result. If the win/lose lottery value is "56500 to 65535", a value of "4" indicating this is set as the pre-win/lose determination result. Next, by referring to the first pre-pattern selection value determination table (not shown), if the first pattern selection value is "0 to 99", a value of "0" indicating that is set as the pre-pattern determination result. If the first pattern selection value is "100 to 149", a value of "1" indicating that is set as the pre-pattern determination result. If the first pattern selection value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that is set as the pre-pattern determination result. If the first pattern selection value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the pre-pattern determination result. If the first pattern selection value is "230 to 255", a value of "4" indicating that is set as the pre-pattern determination result. Furthermore, by referring to the first pre-variable pattern random number value determination table (not shown), if the first pattern selection value is "0 to 9", a value of "A" indicating that is set as the pre-pattern determination result. If the first pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value "B" indicating this is set as the pre-pattern determination result. If the first pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value "C" indicating this is set as the pre-pattern determination result. As described above, the pre-determination information set by the first lottery pre-determination means 236 (pre-win/lose determination for the first game) is transmitted to the performance determination means 303 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later in accordance with the transmission timing of information indicating a ball entering the first starting hole 11 (indicating that this is the first win/lose lottery), information indicating the number of reserved balls, etc.

The second lottery pre-judgment means 237 (pre-judgment of win/loss for the second game) refers to the second pre-judgment value judgment table in FIG. 9(b) when the ball enters the second starting hole 12, and if the win/loss lottery value is "0-299", a value of "1" indicating that is set as the pre-judgment result. If the win/loss lottery value is "300-2999", a value of "2" indicating that is set as the pre-judgment result. If the win/loss lottery value is "3000-63999", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the pre-judgment result. If the win/loss lottery value is "64000-65535", a value of "4" indicating that is set as the pre-judgment result. Next, the second pre-pattern lottery value judgment table (not shown) is referred to, and if the second pattern lottery value is "0-144", a value of "0" indicating that is set as the pre-pattern judgment result. If the second pattern lottery value is "145 to 149", a value of "1" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "230 to 255", a value of "4" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. Furthermore, by referring to the second preliminary variable pattern random number value determination table (not shown), if the second pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", a value of "A" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", a value of "B" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", a value of "C" indicating that is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. As described above, the pre-determination information set by the second lottery pre-determination means 237 (pre-win/lose determination regarding the second game) is transmitted to the performance determination means 303 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later in accordance with the timing of transmission of information indicating the ball entering the second starting hole 12 (indicating that it is a second win/lose lottery), information indicating the number of reserved balls, etc.

The various information temporarily stored as the pre-judgment results by the pre-judgment means 235 is stored in a predetermined pre-judgment result storage area, with a maximum of four items each, similar to the number of reserved memories. The pre-judgment results may be stored using a reserved storage area stored by the reservation control means 240. The information may be erased based on the pre-judgment results by the pre-judgment means 235 being transmitted to the performance determination means 303 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described later. In this way, by sharing with other areas or erasing information based on the completion of transmission, efficient use of the storage area in the main board 200 can be expected. In addition, as a judgment table for pre-judgment, a judgment table for this judgment may be used without providing a table dedicated to pre-judgment, and a pre-judgment table that is partially or entirely common may be shared between the pre-judgment for the first game and the pre-judgment for the second game. In this way, by sharing with other judgment tables, a reduction in the data capacity in the main board 200 can be expected. The content to be transmitted as the result of the preliminary judgment means 235 can be appropriately selected, for example, by transmitting only the result of the judgment of whether or not the result is correct. Also, without making a judgment by the preliminary judgment means 235, the random number values acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 and the second lottery value acquisition means 217 can be transmitted to the sub-board 300 by the command communication means 205 described above, and the content of the preliminary judgment can be determined by the sub-board 300.

The advance judgment means 235 may refer to an advance win/loss lottery value judgment table in which the correspondence between the win/loss lottery value and the advance win/loss judgment result differs depending on the setting value set by the setting change device 170. As with the above-mentioned win/loss judgment table, multiple types of advance win/loss lottery value judgment tables corresponding to multiple game settings may be prepared, and the advance win/loss lottery value judgment table to be referenced may be switched depending on the setting value of the game setting. Alternatively, an advance win/loss lottery value judgment table that can be commonly used between multiple game settings may be used. In this case, the win/loss may be judged in advance based on a combination of the setting value of the game setting and the value of the advance win/loss judgment result.

Figure 10 is a schematic diagram of a pre-judgment table corresponding to a game setting. Figure 10 (a) is the pre-judgment table referred to by the first pre-judgment means 236, and Figure 10 (b) is the pre-judgment table referred to by the second pre-judgment means 237. When the pre-judgment value is "0 to 294", the pre-judgment result is "11", indicating that a jackpot will be awarded for all settings 1 to 6. When the pre-judgment value is "295", the pre-judgment result is "12", indicating that a jackpot will be awarded for settings 2 or higher during normal play or for all settings during special mode. When the pre-judgment value is "296", the pre-judgment result is "13", indicating that a jackpot will be awarded for settings 3 or higher during normal play or for all settings during special mode. When the pre-judgment value is "297", the pre-judgment result is "14", indicating that a jackpot will be awarded for settings 4 or higher during normal play or for all settings during special mode. If the winning/losing lottery value is "298", the preliminary winning/losing judgment result will be "15", indicating that the jackpot will be a jackpot for settings 5 or higher during normal play or for all settings during special mode. If the winning/losing lottery value is "299", the preliminary winning/losing judgment result will be "16", indicating that the jackpot will be a jackpot for settings 6 during normal play or for all settings during special mode. If the winning/losing lottery value is "300 to 2949", the preliminary winning/losing judgment result will be "21", indicating that the jackpot will be a jackpot for all settings during special mode. If the winning/losing lottery value is "2950 to 2959", the preliminary winning/losing judgment result will be "22", indicating that the jackpot will be a jackpot for settings 2 or higher during special mode. If the winning/losing lottery value is "2960 to 2969", the preliminary winning/losing judgment result will be "23", indicating that the jackpot will be a jackpot for settings 3 or higher during special mode. When the winning/losing lottery value is "2970-2979", the preliminary winning/losing judgment result is "23", indicating that the jackpot will be a big hit in settings 4 or higher during the special mode. When the winning/losing lottery value is "2980-2989", the preliminary winning/losing judgment result is "25", indicating that the jackpot will be a big hit in settings 5 or higher during the special mode. When the winning/losing lottery value is "2990-2999", the preliminary winning/losing judgment result is "26", indicating that the jackpot will be a big hit in settings 6 during the special mode. Furthermore, when the first winning/losing lottery value shown in (a) is "3000-56499" and when the second winning/losing lottery value shown in (b) is "3000-63999", the preliminary winning/losing judgment result is "30", indicating that the jackpot will be a small hit in all settings. In addition, when the first winning/losing selection value shown in (a) is "56,500 to 65,535," and when the second winning/losing selection value shown in (b) is "64,000 to 65,535," the preliminary winning/losing judgment result is "40," indicating a loss for all settings. By using such a preliminary winning/losing judgment table, it is possible to show an appropriate preliminary winning/losing judgment result for each setting value of the game settings.

<Special Game Control Means 260>
When the first winning/losing lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a transition to a special game, the special game control means 260 determines that the special game operation condition has been established when the first special symbol 51 stops in a predetermined jackpot mode, and executes the special game by opening the large prize opening 20. Similarly, when the second winning/losing lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in a transition to a special game, the special game control means 260 determines that the special game operation condition has been established when the second special symbol 52 stops in a predetermined jackpot mode, and executes the special game by opening the large prize opening 20.

The special game is a game in which the opening and closing operation of the large prize winning hole 20 continues multiple times in succession, and is composed of multiple unit games. The special games include a 10R jackpot in which the unit game is repeated 10 times, a 4R jackpot in which the unit game is repeated four times, and a 2R jackpot in which the unit game is repeated only twice, which has a shorter opening time than the 10R jackpot and the 4R jackpot. The 10R jackpot is a jackpot in the second winning/losing lottery, and the 4R jackpot is a jackpot in the first winning/losing lottery. In the 10R jackpot and the 4R jackpot, the large prize winning hole 20 is opened for about 30 seconds in one unit game as a rule. In the 2R jackpot, the large prize winning hole 20 is opened for only about 1.6 seconds in one unit game. The special game control means 260 ends the special game when the set number of rounds of the unit game is consumed. In addition, even if a 2R jackpot occurs, if certain conditions are met, the large prize opening 20 may be opened in the same manner as for a 10R jackpot and a 4R jackpot.

<Small win game control means 265>
When the first drawing by the first drawing means 211 results in a small win, the small win game control means 265 determines that the small win game operation condition is established when the first special symbol 51 stops in a predetermined small win mode, and executes the small win game by having the opening/closing control means 275 open the large winning opening 20. Similarly, when the second drawing by the second drawing means 212 results in a small win, the small win game control means 265 determines that the small win game operation condition is established when the second special symbol 52 stops in a predetermined small win mode, and executes the small win game by having the opening/closing control means 275 open the large winning opening 20.

In a small win game, one unit game is executed, and the large prize opening 20 is opened and closed twice in one unit game. The small win game control means 265 opens the large prize opening 20 for approximately 0.8 seconds per opening and closing, and then closes the large prize opening 20 to end the small win game.

<Specific Game Control Means 270>
The specific game control means 270 controls the normal game in the probability variable state, the time-saving state, and the easy-to-enter state. When the special symbol is a symbol of a specific jackpot accompanied by a transition to the probability variable state, the specific game control means 270 transitions the game state to the probability variable state, the time-saving state, and the easy-to-enter state after the special game ends. The probability variable state, the time-saving state, and the easy-to-enter state continue until the next jackpot occurs. In the time-saving state, the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 select a variation pattern with a short variation time so that the variation display time of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 is generally short. However, in the normal state, the variation pattern table according to the number of reserved winning/losing lottery values by the reserved control means 240 is referred to, and the smaller the number of reserved numbers by the reserved control means 240, the more likely it is that a variation pattern with a long variation time will appear. In the easy-to-enter state, at least one of the three functions of the probability of normal symbols being changed, the time reduction of normal symbols, and the extension of the opening of the second starting hole 12 is performed, thereby improving the frequency of the ball being entered into the second starting hole 12 (ease of entering the ball). During the probability of the change, the probability that the result of the judgment by the first hit/miss judgment means 221 and the second hit/miss judgment means 222 will be a jackpot is maintained at a high value. In addition, the specific game control means 270 puts the second starting hole 12 into an extended opening state when a specific jackpot is obtained, and further shifts the winning probability of the opening lottery to a probability of the change, which is higher than the normal probability state, only if the hit/miss lottery is the second hit/miss lottery.

<Opening/Closing Control Means 275>
The opening/closing control means 275 controls the opening/closing of the normal electric role 90 of the second starting hole 12 and the large winning hole 20. When the normal symbol is stopped in a specific manner, the opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the normal electric role solenoid 91 to open the normal electric role 90 of the second starting hole 12. In the normal state, the opening/closing control means 275 opens the second starting hole 12 with a short opening or long opening opening time depending on the result of the opening lottery, and opens the second starting hole 12 with a long opening opening time in the ball entry easy state. This increases the ball entry ease of the second starting hole 12, allowing the player to continue playing without reducing the number of balls he has. In the special game, the opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening instruction to the large winning hole solenoid 92 to open the large winning hole 20.

<Main initial process execution means 280, main power cut process execution means 282, main error detection means 284>
The main initial process execution means 280 executes control start processing of the main board 200 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power outage. The main power outage process execution means 282 executes abnormality response processing such as power outage processing in the main board 200 when a power outage or other power abnormality occurs. The main error detection means 284 executes abnormality detection processing in the main board 200. The control start processing, abnormality response processing, and abnormality detection processing of the main board 200 will be described later.

<Setting Change Means 286, Setting Confirmation Means 287>
The setting change means 286 executes a "setting change process" for changing game settings. When the power switch 150 is turned on while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the on state and the RAM clear switch is pressed, the setting change means 286 transitions to the above-mentioned setting change state. When transitioning to the setting change state, the setting change means 286 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the setting value stored in the setting memory. In response to pressing of the setting change button 172, the setting change means 286 changes the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 in the order of 1→2→3→4→5→6→1→..., and updates the setting value stored in the setting memory to the same value as the display on the setting display unit 173. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting change means 286 ends the setting change state and turns off the setting display unit 173.

The setting confirmation means 287 executes a "setting confirmation process" to confirm game settings. When the setting key cylinder 171 is in the ON state and the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch, the setting confirmation means 287 transitions to the setting confirmation state described above. When transitioned to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation means 287 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the setting value stored in the setting memory. Unlike the setting change means 286 described above, the setting confirmation means 287 does not change the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, and does not update the setting value stored in the setting memory. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting confirmation means 287 ends the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display unit 173.

The set value data managed by the setting memory may be numerical values from "0" to "5" instead of numerical values from "1" to "6". In this case, the set value "0" may correspond to setting 1, the set value "1" may correspond to setting 2, the set value "2" may correspond to setting 3, the set value "3" may correspond to setting 4, the set value "4" may correspond to setting 5, and the set value "5" may correspond to setting 6. By using "0" as the normal value of the set value data, when the RAM is cleared and the set value data is set to the initial value "0" in the event of a RAM abnormality, an abnormality is not judged, so that the RAM clear process in the event of an abnormality can be simplified. In addition, when performing some kind of lottery using the set value data, for example, when selecting different tables or data for each set value in the look-ahead process, there is also the advantage that the offset process for the selection can be simplified. For example, when "1" to "6" are used as the set value data, additional processing such as subtracting 1 from the start address is required when using these values as they are as offset data for table or data selection. On the other hand, when "0" to "5" are used as the setting value data, the numerical value of the setting value data can be used as is as the offset data. When the setting change means 286 and the setting confirmation means 287 use numerical values of "0" to "5" as the setting value data, they may display the numerical value of the setting value data as is on the setting display unit 173, or may display a numerical value obtained by adding +1 to the numerical value of the setting value data on the setting display unit 173. In the latter case, the numerical data of "0" to "5" is converted to the numerical values of settings 1 to 6 in the game settings and displayed, which allows for a display that is easy to understand for the manager of the gaming machine.

<Command Transmission Means>
The command communication means 205 includes a payout control command communication means 206 for transmitting control commands required for executing payouts, etc., to the payout control board 155, and a sub-control command transmission means 207 for transmitting control commands required for executing performance control, etc., to the sub-board 300. The payout control command communication means 206 transmits a payout command instructing the payout of a number of prize balls corresponding to each winning port based on the judgment of balls entering each winning port by the ball entry judgment means 201, and transmits a command indicating the state of an error that has occurred in the main board 200. When starting the pattern variation, the sub-control command transmission means 207 transmits the judgment result of the lottery corresponding to the pattern variation together with the control command for the pattern variation to the performance determination means 303.

The sub-control command sending means 207 sends a change start command and a change stop command to the performance determination means 303 (sub-main) at the timing when the first special pattern control means 251 and the second special pattern control means 252 start and stop the change display of the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52. When sending the change start command, the sub-control command sends the values indicating the hit/miss judgment result, the stop pattern, and the change pattern judged or determined as the main judgment, and the value indicating whether it is the first hit/miss lottery or the second hit/miss lottery, together with the change start command to the performance determination means 303. When sending the change stop command, the value indicating the stop pattern is sent again to the performance determination means 303 together with the change stop command. In addition, the performance determination means 303 (sub-main) sends the change start command, change stop command, etc. to the performance control means 304 in order to control the change display of the decorative pattern by the performance control means 304 (sub-sub). As a result, the main display control means 250 and the performance control means 304 (sub-sub) are synchronized and linked. In addition, the sub-control command transmission means 207 transmits the pre-determination result by the pre-determination means 235 to the performance determination means 303. The pre-determination result is temporarily stored in the transmission buffer, and then transmitted to the performance determination means 303 together with the type information of the winning port (first start port 11, second start port 12) corresponding to the pre-determination result, the number of reserved items, the game status, etc., regardless of whether the pattern change display corresponding to the lottery is immediately started or not, and is deleted from the transmission buffer or later overwritten. As a result, the sub-substrate 300 can predict the result of winning or losing in advance before the turn of the pattern change start comes around based on the received pre-determination result, which is called "pre-reading" processing. The processing based on the pre-determination information performed by the sub-substrate 300 will be described later. The sub-control command transmission means 207 transmits to the sub-board 300 information on special games by the special game control means 260, information on small win games by the small win game control means 265, information on the lottery results by the regular drawing means 213, and setting value information for game settings set by the setting change means 286. The sub-control command transmission means 207 also transmits to the sub-board 300 information on various controls on the main board 200, such as information on initial processing by the main initial processing execution means 280 and main error detection means 284, information on errors, and the like, or information on various signals transmitted to the main board 200, as appropriate.

Figure 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sub-board. The sub-board 300 includes a symbol mode determination means 301, a pattern storage means 302, a performance determination means 303, a performance control means 304, a timing means 307, a performance setting means 308, a sub initial processing execution means 360, a sub power cut processing execution means 362, a sub error detection means 364, a command receiving means 370, and a sub-side advance judgment means 371.

The pattern storage means 302 holds multiple presentation patterns in which the presentation image content and the display process to be displayed on the presentation display device 60 when the decorative pattern 61 changes are defined. The presentation patterns include multiple change presentation patterns in which the change process and presentation process from the start to the stop of the change in the display of the decorative pattern 61 are defined, and multiple advance notice presentation patterns that are displayed separately from the display of the decorative pattern change and that give a preview of the high expectation of a jackpot before the display of the change stops.

The command receiving means 370 receives various commands transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the sub-side advance judgment means 371 holds the advance judgment result transmitted from the command communication means 205. The performance determination means 303 includes a normal performance determination means 373 and a look-ahead performance determination means 374. The normal performance determination means 373 determines the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device 60 by the performance control means 304 and output to the speaker 108, decorative lamp 111, etc., according to the information on the judgment result of the first win/lose lottery or the judgment result of the second win/lose lottery transmitted from the command communication means 205. The performance determination means 303 determines the performance content according to the setting value of the game setting transmitted from the command communication means 205. The look-ahead performance determination means 374 determines the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device 60 by the performance control means 304 and output to the speaker 108, decorative lamp 111, etc., according to the advance judgment result transmitted from the command communication means 205. The normal performance determination means 373 selects one of a plurality of performance patterns corresponding to the special symbol performance pattern determined by the first or second performance pattern determination means 231 or 232 and transmitted from the command communication means 205, and reads it from the pattern storage means 302. The normal performance determination means 373 sends information on the read-out performance pattern to the performance control means 304. The normal performance determination means 373 holds a pattern table to be referred to in order to select a performance pattern. The normal performance determination means 373 may determine a performance pattern by referring to the pre-determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, or may determine a performance pattern together with the contents of the pre-reading performance by the pre-reading performance determination means 374. The pre-reading performance determination means 374 more accurately specifies the result of this determination based on the pre-determination result from the command communication means 205 and the past pre-determination results and game state information stored in the sub-board 300, and determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading performance before this determination based on the specified result, and the execution contents. Specifically, the look-ahead performance determination means 374 determines whether the current game state is a probability-varying game state, and then determines whether to transition to a normal game state based on the pre-determination result that precedes the currently received pre-determination result. Based on the determination result, it identifies the result of the actual determination related to the currently received pre-determination result, the variation pattern to be selected, etc., and determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead performance and the execution content of the look-ahead performance based on the identified result. Note that since the performance determination means 303 has many parts in which the normal performance determination means 373 and the look-ahead performance determination means 374 cooperate with each other, it will be described as the performance determination means 303 that includes both, except for parts that are particularly necessary.

For each variation performance pattern, a variation time is set as the end condition for the pattern variation, and the pattern variation is stopped when the variation time has elapsed. The performance determination means 303 selects a variation performance pattern of a performance image having the same variation time according to the variation pattern of the special pattern.

The pattern mode determination means 301 determines the combination of stopping patterns of the decorative patterns 61 and their arrangement according to the result of the lottery by the first lottery means 211 or the second lottery means 212, the stopping patterns of the special patterns, the variation pattern of the special patterns, and the variation presentation pattern of the decorative patterns. The pattern mode determination means 301 transmits information indicating the determined combination of stopping patterns to the presentation control means 304. The pattern mode determination means 301 holds a pattern range table to be referenced in order to determine the stopping patterns of the decorative patterns.

The stop patterns of the decorative patterns 61 are formed as a combination of three patterns, and for example, when the result of the hit/miss judgment by the first hit/miss judgment means 221 and the second hit/miss judgment means 222 indicates a transition to a special game of a 4R big win or a 10R big win, a specific combination, for example, a combination of three patterns such as "777" or "111", is selected. When the hit/miss judgment result is a 2R big win or a small win, a specific combination, for example, a predetermined combination such as "357", is also selected, but these specific combinations do not necessarily have to be combinations of three patterns. When the hit/miss judgment result is neither a big win nor a small win, a combination that does not have three patterns, such as "312" or "946", and does not fall under the specific combinations selected for a 2R big win or a small win, is selected. If the result of the hit/miss judgment is not a 4R or 10R jackpot, and a variation pattern indicating a miss with reach is selected, a combination with only one missing pattern, such as "191" or "727", is selected.

The decorative pattern variation presentation pattern defines the variation display mode of the decorative pattern, that is, the presentation process from the start of the decorative pattern variation to the end of the variation. The variation presentation patterns include a pattern when a normal losing pattern is displayed, a pattern when a losing pattern is displayed after passing through a reach state where one more pattern will result in a jackpot, and a pattern when a jackpot pattern is displayed after passing through a reach state. In particular, patterns when passing through a reach state include patterns with various variation times, both long and short. For each variation presentation pattern, a variation time is set for each pattern as the end condition for that pattern variation, and the pattern variation is stopped when that variation time has elapsed. The presentation determination means 303 selects a decorative pattern variation presentation pattern with a variation time equal to that of the special pattern, depending on the variation pattern of the special pattern.

When the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern determination means 231 or the second variation pattern determination means 232 in the time-saving state is a pattern for time-saving, the presentation determination means 303 selects a variation presentation pattern for which the content of the presentation for time-saving is determined. The content of the presentation for time-saving is a presentation in which background images and sounds are output to impress upon the player that the time-saving or special chance state is favorable to the player.

Preview performance patterns are performance patterns that temporarily display images, animations, videos, etc. of specific characters or motifs on the screen, performance patterns that operate role-playing devices, and performance patterns that output specific sounds. Performances using preview performance patterns are executed in parallel with the pattern change, and pre-emptively suggest that there is a high probability that the pattern change will stop in a jackpot mode. For example, there is a normal preview performance in which only one image of a character is displayed on the screen, and a group preview performance in which a group of many characters are displayed passing from one end of the screen to the other. Also included is a step-up preview performance in which the display process of the preview performance is divided into multiple stages, and the number of stages displayed is variable so that the greater the number of stages, the higher the probability of a jackpot.

There are two types of preview performance patterns: a performance is executed after the display state of the decorative pattern 61 has reached a reach state, and the final stopping state of the pattern is predicted (post-reach preview), and a performance is executed before any of the decorative patterns 61 have stopped, and the performance simultaneously predicts that a reach state will be reached (pre-reach preview).

The performance determination means 303 determines whether or not to display a preview performance on the performance display device 60 according to the result of the hit/miss lottery or the preliminary determination result by a predetermined preview lottery, sets the preliminary performance, and determines the preview performance pattern to be displayed. The performance determination means 303 holds a preview decision table to be referred to in determining whether or not to display a preview performance, and a preview type table to be referred to when selecting the type of preview performance pattern. The preview decision table is set so that different columns are referred to depending on the result of the hit/miss lottery or the preliminary determination result, and a correspondence between the result of the hit/miss lottery determination and whether or not to display a preview performance is determined so that a preview performance is displayed with a higher probability when the hit/miss lottery is a hit than when it is a miss. This makes it possible for the display of a preview performance to suggest a high degree of expectation for a jackpot.

The performance control means 304 causes the performance display device 60 to change and display a performance image including the decorative pattern 61 according to the selected change performance pattern data. The performance control means 304 determines that receipt of a command to start changing the decorative pattern 61 is the start condition for the change display of a new decorative pattern. When the performance decision means 303 decides that a preview performance is to be displayed, the performance control means 304 causes the performance display device 60 to display a preview performance according to the selected preview performance pattern in a form superimposed on the performance of the pattern change.

If the winning/losing lottery value for the second winning/losing lottery is stored, the performance control means 304 reserves the start of the pattern change display corresponding to the first winning/losing lottery, and starts the pattern change display corresponding to the second winning/losing lottery regardless of whether the winning/losing lottery value for the first winning/losing lottery is stored. As a result, if the lottery values for both the first winning/losing lottery and the second winning/losing lottery are reserved, the reserved lottery value for the second winning/losing lottery is read out preferentially and the decorative pattern change is displayed. In such a case, the reserved lottery value for the first winning/losing lottery is not read out and the decorative pattern change does not start until the reserved number for the second winning/losing lottery becomes 0. In this way, the performance control means 304 causes the performance display device 60 to display a pattern change performance including the change display of the decorative pattern 61.

The performance control means 304 further controls the turning on and off of the decorative lamps 111 and the operation of the movable props 66. The performance control means 304 has a performance display control means 305, an audio control means 306, and a lamp control means 309. The performance display control means 305 controls the display on the performance display device 60, and the audio control means 306 controls the audio output from the speaker 108. The lamp control means 309 controls the turning on and off of the decorative lamps 111.

While the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52 are changing, the effect display device 60 must display an image indicating that the patterns are changing. Normally, a normal-sized decorative pattern 61 having a certain size is displayed changing, but a special effect in which the main effect content is something other than the change in the decorative pattern 61 may be displayed in a manner that impairs the visibility of the display of the change in the normal-sized decorative pattern 61. In this case, the player is informed that the patterns are changing by displaying a substitute pattern, which is a decorative pattern smaller than the normal-sized decorative pattern. Hereinafter, when simply referring to a decorative pattern, it means a normal-sized decorative pattern, but when distinguishing it from the substitute pattern, the normal-sized decorative pattern is also called a "normal decorative pattern" or a "main decorative pattern".

The alternative pattern is displayed while the visibility of the normal decorative pattern is impaired, for example, while the normal decorative pattern is not displayed. The alternative pattern is a form of decorative pattern for suggesting the result of the winning/losing judgment in a dramatic way, and has a display form that is simplified (in other words, simplified) than the normal decorative pattern, and is displayed in a variation process that is simplified more than the normal decorative pattern. The alternative pattern has an external display form that corresponds to the part of the normal decorative pattern that indicates the pattern type, for example, a display form that indicates the number, letter, or symbol that indicates the pattern type. The alternative pattern is displayed in a smaller area than the area in which the normal decorative pattern is displayed, and is typically displayed in a position that is less likely to interfere with the main performance by elements other than the pattern, for example, in the corner of the screen of the performance display device 60. The alternative pattern is displayed relatively smaller than the normal decorative pattern, but has a display form that at least makes the pattern type identifiable on the outside. The alternative pattern may be a reduced version of the normal decorative pattern, or may be the same as the normal decorative pattern except for the size.

The multiple substitute patterns displayed in place of the multiple normal decorative patterns suggest the high expectation that the result of the winning/losing lottery will be favorable to the player depending on the combination of the stop mode at the end of the variation. For example, the multiple substitute patterns suggest a high expectation of a big win in the variation when two of the three substitute patterns are in a ready state. In addition, the left and right patterns in the ready state may be specific types of patterns such as "3" and "7" that suggest a relatively high expectation, or types of patterns such as "1" and "2" that suggest a relatively low expectation, to suggest the high or low expectation of the ready state. Note that the substitute patterns do not appear to be in a definite stopped state, but are in a temporary stopped state in which a slight shaking is maintained. After the temporary stop of the substitute patterns, the normal decorative patterns may be displayed in place of the substitute patterns, and the normal decorative patterns may be displayed in a definite stopped state. In addition, the normal decorative patterns and the substitute patterns may not be displayed exclusively, but may have an overlapping display period. Furthermore, during a predetermined performance in which the visibility of the normal decorative pattern is impaired, the display of the normal decorative pattern may be continued and the display of the alternative pattern may be displayed. Unlike the alternative pattern, a simple pattern may be displayed in a predetermined area of the performance display device 60 during the variation of the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52, with an image of the same size as or smaller than the alternative pattern, suggesting that the special pattern is varying. The simple pattern may be configured as a variation display of a combination of three patterns like the normal decorative pattern, or as a variation display of one pattern, or as a simple symbol (such as "○" or "×") that is switched sequentially. The simple pattern may not be related to the variation display mode of the normal decorative pattern or the alternative pattern, and may display a certain variation from the start of the variation of the special pattern to the end of the variation, and may be displayed in association with the stop display mode of the normal decorative pattern when it is stopped. In addition, the simple symbols may be modified as appropriate, such as by displaying a combination of two symbols, as long as they indicate that the special symbols are being displayed and notify the result of the special symbols at a minimum. The simple symbols may also be called "simple decorative symbols," "sub decorative symbols," "sub decoration symbols," "mini decorative symbols," "mini decoration symbols," etc. In addition to the performance display device 60, a decorative symbol display called a fourth symbol, which displays a display equivalent to the simple symbols by an illuminating mode of an LED or the like, may be used. The fourth symbol is used to indicate the progress of the game (display of the special symbols being displayed while they are changing, display of the results) in the event of a malfunction of the performance display device 60. As an example of the display mode of the fourth symbol, the LED may be displayed by sequentially lighting up "white," "blue," "green," "yellow," "orange," and "red" (it may also be flashed, including being turned off), or the LED may be flashed in a single color according to the type of special symbol to indicate the display, and the color of the light emitted when the symbol is stopped may indicate the type of miss or big win.

The clock means 307 is a clock circuit that outputs time information used in the game. The clock means 307 is a timer circuit that uses a counter to measure the time since the power was turned on and outputs it as time information. However, it may also be a real-time clock circuit that has a built-in battery and can continue to measure the date and time using the battery even when the pachinko game machine 100 is turned off or there is a power outage. In the case of a real-time clock circuit, there is a possibility that slight differences in the time between each gaming machine may occur due to individual differences and time skew, whereas in the case of a timer circuit, there is little possibility of time differences occurring between multiple gaming machines as long as they are powered on at the same time.

The effect determination means 303 executes a synchronized effect that starts at a predetermined timing when the time information output by the clock means 307 indicates a predetermined time. The synchronized effect is an effect that is displayed on the effect display device 60 during a synchronized effect period that is a period that is substantially asynchronous with the pattern change period and the game state. The synchronized effect period lasts for several minutes, is longer than one pattern change period, and can include multiple pattern change periods. The synchronized effect effect pattern is stored in the pattern storage means 302, and the playback of a predetermined music piece and video is set for the effect pattern. Multiple types of synchronized effect effect patterns are prepared, and different types of effect patterns can be selected depending on the date and time, such as the month, date, day of the week, and time of day.

The synchronization effect is executed regardless of whether normal play is in progress or special play. Here, "normal play" includes the display of the so-called standby demo screen. That is, "normal play" includes (1) "normal play during change display" in which the pattern is displayed in a changing manner, (2) "normal play during change stop" in which the pattern is not displayed in a changing manner and the standby demo screen is not displayed, and (3) "normal play during standby demo screen display" in which the pattern is not displayed in a changing manner and the standby demo screen is not displayed. The synchronization effect can be executed during any of the periods (1) to (3), but in the periods (2) and (3), the output mode for controlling the reduction of the volume and brightness in the synchronization effect may be different from that in the period (1). In addition, while the standby demo screen is displayed, the player can input information about the mobile link system described later by operating the effect button 109 or the cross key 110, and when such input is made, the output of the image and sound of the synchronization effect is suppressed, and the screen display such as the performance customization by the mobile link system is prioritized.

The synchronized performance is, for example, a performance in which a predetermined piece of music or a video is played at a predetermined time (called the "synchronized performance start time"). The time that triggers the playback of the synchronized performance may be a time that arrives at a predetermined time interval from when the pachinko game machine 100 is turned on, or may be the time every hour or half past the hour based on standard time. Alternatively, a time that can vary depending on the date or day of the week may be set, and the interval may not be a fixed interval such as "every hour," but may vary, such as one hour first, then three hours later, or the interval may vary depending on the date or day of the week. The time may be variable, so that the time can be specified by the game store staff for each game store. However, the same synchronized performance is set in advance so that it is executed at least at the same time between multiple machines of the same model installed in the same game store. For example, in the case of a specification that triggers the playback of the synchronized performance at a time that arrives at a predetermined time interval from when the power is turned on, multiple machines are turned on at the same time in the game store. As a result, the same synchronized performance is executed simultaneously on the multiple game machines when the predetermined time is reached. As a result, the effects are displayed simultaneously as if they were synchronized across multiple devices, and the same music and video are played at the same time, creating a synergistic effect that feels as if a live performance or movie screening is taking place on the spot.

The synchronized performance function is also built into other gaming machines of the same model, and multiple gaming machines on the same gaming island are turned on at the same time by gaming staff every day. All of the multiple gaming machines that are turned on at the same time will reach the synchronized performance start time at almost the same time, allowing them to execute synchronized performances simultaneously. This is called multiple-machine synchronized performance. In this case, not only are the images displayed on multiple machines synchronized, but the output of sound effects and background music will also be synchronized on multiple machines, and the more synchronized machines there are, the greater the synergistic effect of executing the performance simultaneously.

The performance setting means 308 stores the game history of the player. The game history includes the game result history and the performance result history. The game result history is the game result that leads to the balls that the player obtains as a result of the game, such as the number of hits, the number of winning balls, the number of jackpots, the number of probability changes, and the number of time reductions. The performance result history is information such as performance scores that are recorded to obtain benefits such as the right to change the content and type of the performance or the right to make a specific type of performance appear more easily, unlike the game profit. For example, in order to score the number of times a specific performance appears or the results of a mini-game, etc. and give them to the player, coded information indicating the score and game history, such as a two-dimensional code, is displayed on the screen. When the player reads the two-dimensional code with the camera of his/her mobile device and decodes it, the score and game history information obtained by decoding are stored in the player's mobile device. The linking system between the gaming machine and the player's mobile device via the two-dimensional code will be described later. The points mentioned here are necessary to expand the scope of performance customization, which will be described later, and the number of customizable items increases when the points reach a certain cumulative value (for example, when the points reach 1000 points, or every time 100 points are reached, etc.).

The effect setting means 308 stores the setting of which of multiple types of effect contents to select as the effect customization based on the selection instruction of the player and the game history. For example, multiple types of effect patterns with different motifs, characters, and music to be displayed as the effect patterns to be displayed during the special game are prepared in the pattern storage means 302, and the player is allowed to select which of them to display. Alternatively, multiple types of motifs or character designs are prepared in the pattern storage means 302 as the design of the image included in the decorative pattern that changes the image, and the player is allowed to select which of them to display. In such cases, the operation of the effect button 109 or the cross key 110 by the player is accepted while the standby demo screen is being displayed, and when the effect pattern is selected through the operation, the effect setting means 308 stores the selection. The effect determination means 303 selects the type of effect pattern during the special game according to the setting stored by the effect setting means 308.

The sub-initialization processing execution means 360 executes control start processing for the sub-board 300 when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on or when the power is restored after a power outage. The sub-power-off processing execution means 362 executes abnormality response processing such as power-off processing in the sub-board 300 when a power abnormality such as a power outage occurs. The sub-error detection means 364 executes abnormality detection processing in the sub-board 300. When the sub-error detection means 364 detects a power outage, the sub-power-off processing execution means 362 backs up the data in the RAM to a backup RAM as a power-off process.

Figure 12 is a diagram showing a schematic overview of the mobile linkage system. As a premise of the mobile linkage system, the player registers as a user by setting an account and password in advance on the mobile terminal 354 in the game history server 358, which has a dedicated site. When the player presses the performance button 109 at the start of a game, the performance display control means 305 displays a two-dimensional code 350 encoding the address of the dedicated site of the game history server 358 on the screen of the performance display device 60, and allows the player to read it with the camera of the mobile terminal to access the dedicated site of the game history server 358. Character information (also called "password information") encoding the player's identification information and performance score history is transmitted from the dedicated site to the mobile terminal and displayed on the screen of the mobile terminal. The performance display control means 305 displays an input screen for the password information on the performance display device 60, and allows the player to input the password information via button operations such as the cross key 110. The input password information is decrypted by the effect setting means 308 and registered as the player's identification information and effect score history, allowing the player to inherit the game content and effect score status up to the previous time. The input of this password information serves as an instruction to start recording the game history of the player and an instruction to start effect customization to select various effect elements. Thereafter, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, as the game and effects progress, the effect setting means 308 adds points to the player as effect benefits as needed and accumulates them as effect score history, and the player can perform effect customization as needed and select and set elements of his/her choice as various effect elements. The effect points are basically added for each pattern change, and the higher the effect type with a higher expected transition to special play, the higher the score is awarded, and a high score is also awarded when transitioning to special play.

As a performance customization, the player can use a part of the accumulated points to change the performance elements such as color, background, shape, character, and music that constitute the performance content displayed on the performance display device 60 to the type of his/her preference according to the number of points used. The performance setting means 308 receives an instruction to change the performance elements via the button operation by the player, and changes various performance elements according to the instruction. For the performance elements that can be customized, multiple types of items are prepared for each element, and different values are set as the number of points required for each item. Therefore, when the accumulated points reach a predetermined value, the number of customizable items increases, or a chance to increase the number of customizable items is given. When the player operates a button to end the game or performance customization, the performance setting means 308 generates a two-dimensional code 350 that encodes information such as performance benefits and performance score history, and the performance display control means 305 displays this on the performance display device 60. The player reads the two-dimensional code 350 with the camera of his/her mobile terminal, and the information can be acquired by decoding the read two-dimensional code 352 and stored in the mobile terminal 354. This information is also sent from the mobile terminal 354 to a game history server 358 on a dedicated website via network 356, and is managed in association with the player's account information. In this way, information such as special effects and performance score history is transmitted to the mobile terminal 354 via the transmission means of displaying and reading the two-dimensional code 350, and is managed by the game history server 358, so that the game and performance content can be carried over to the next game. Also, the longer the game is played, the more points can be earned as the number of pattern changes and performances increases.

Figure 13 is a block diagram showing the hardware configuration of the main board 200 and the sub board 300. The main board 200 includes electronic components such as a main CPU 290, a main RAM 291, and a main ROM 292. The main ROM 292 stores a main control program and data for controlling the overall game operation. The main control program or data is read from the main ROM 292 to the main RAM 291, and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 290. Each electronic component is connected by a bus such as a system bus or a data bus (not shown). The ball entry signal from each ball entry port and the payout signal from the payout control board 155 are acquired by the main CPU 290 through various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 290 drives and controls external devices such as each winning port solenoid, the first special symbol display unit 41, and the second special symbol display unit 42 by various drive circuits (not shown). In addition, commands necessary for performance control are sent from the main CPU 290 to the sub-board 300 along with information such as the results of the winning/losing lottery, the results of the design determination, and the results of the variation pattern determination. Signals are sent from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 via one-way communication.

The command data sent from the main board 200 to the sub board 300 is a two-byte combination of one byte of command type data, known as MODE data, and one byte of command content data, known as EVENT data. The main board 200 can send one command by associating the command type data and command content data and sending them to the sub board 300. The command type data is a bit string that indicates the type of command, and a unique type code is assigned to each command type in advance during the development stage. The command content data is a bit string that indicates the content of the command. The most significant bit of the command type data and command content data is an identification bit that indicates whether it is command type data or command content data, and when the most significant bit is 1, it indicates that it is command type data, and when the most significant bit is 0, it indicates that it is command content data.

Since communication from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 is designed to transmit one byte of data per data transmission, two transmissions of one byte each are required to transmit two bytes of command data. The first communication transmits the upper byte, MODE data, and the second communication transmits the lower byte, EVENT data. To account for the possibility of communication failure due to noise, etc., the main board 200 transmits the same data continuously, and confirms that transmission and reception of that data is complete when the same data has been read twice in succession by the sub-board 300. Until it has been read twice in succession, the main board 200 continues to transmit the same data up to a maximum of five times.

The sub-board 300 includes electronic components such as a sub-CPU 310, a sub-RAM 311, a sub-ROM 312, and a performance control device 313. The sub-ROM 312 is one of the data storage means for holding a sub-control program including performance pattern data in which a performance process is defined and display pattern data in which a performance display process is defined. The sub-control program including performance pattern data, display pattern data, and audio pattern data is read from the sub-ROM 312 to the sub-RAM 311, and the performance control by the sub-control program is executed by the sub-CPU 310. The electronic components are connected by buses such as a system bus and a data bus (not shown). Signals from external devices such as the performance button 109 are acquired by the sub-CPU 310 through various interfaces (not shown). The sub-CPU 310 drives external devices such as the performance display device 60, the speaker 108, the decorative lamp 111, and the movable role object 66 by the performance control device 313 and various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown) according to the performance pattern data to control the display output, audio output, lamp lighting, and role object operation. The sub-CPU 310 transmits the display pattern data and the audio pattern data to the performance control device 313. Note that, in this embodiment, an example is described in which the sub-substrate 300 includes the performance control device 313, but the sub-substrate 300 and the performance control device 313 do not need to be integrated as a substrate, and may be formed as separate substrates that are separated and connected to each other.

Figure 14 is a block diagram showing the hardware configuration of the performance control device 313. The performance control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, a display control circuit 326, and an audio control circuit 314. The data ROM 324 is one of the data storage means that stores, in a data compressed state, performance image data and motion data used for performance display, and material data such as audio data used for audio output. The performance image data is an image used for variable display and performance display as a performance object showing the result of a win/lose lottery, and is a material image such as a sprite image of a decorative pattern used for decorative pattern variation, a sprite image used for preview performance, and a video used for various performances. The motion data is data that defines the action when a performance action is added to an image used for various performances at a predetermined timing. The audio data is audio data such as music, background sound, sound effects, and character lines output during the performance.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub-CPU 310, the performance image data and motion data specified in the display pattern data are read from the data ROM 324 to the control RAM 322, and the performance display using the performance image data and motion data is executed by the control CPU 320. As a result, commands, performance image data, and motion data related to the performance display are sent from the control CPU 320 to the display control circuit 326, and the display is controlled by the display control circuit 326. Similarly, commands and audio data related to audio output are sent from the control CPU 320 to the audio control circuit 314, and the audio output is controlled by the audio control circuit 314.

The display control circuit 326 includes a decoder 332, a drawing memory 334, a drawing circuit 336, a frame buffer 338, and a display circuit 340, each of which is connected via a bus 330. For convenience, the bus 330 in this diagram is a comprehensive representation of buses such as a system bus, a data bus, and an address bus.

The performance image data and motion data sent from the control CPU 320 are stored in the drawing memory 334, and compressed parts of that data are decoded by the decoder 332. The drawing memory 334 is a VRAM (Video RAM) that is used as a work area when the performance image data and motion data are decoded by the decoder 332, and is used as a work area when the drawing circuit 336 performs drawing processing and image processing.

The drawing circuit 336 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 334 to execute commands sent from the control CPU 320 in sequence to generate images for display, and stores the generated images for display as frames of moving images in the frame buffer 338. The frame buffer 338 is a VRAM that serves as a buffer memory for temporarily storing frames of moving images to be output to the performance display device 60.

The display circuit 340 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 338 to the performance display device 60 in the form of a video signal in the order in which they were stored. The frame buffer 338 has a memory area for, for example, two frames, and while the display circuit 340 outputs a display image from the memory area for one frame, the drawing circuit 336 generates the next display image and stores it in the memory area for the other frame.

The data ROM 324 holds "detailed display pattern data" that defines the display control process performed by the display control circuit 326. At this time, the display pattern data sent from the sub-CPU 310 can be called "outline display pattern data" that defines the outline of the performance display process. For example, the outline display pattern data defines the general flow of a series of performance display processes, such as the timing of when the decorative patterns start and stop changing, the order in which multiple moving images are played, and the timing of when they start and stop playing. On the other hand, the detailed display pattern data defines the detailed display control processes, such as the display order of sprite images to realize the changing display of decorative patterns, and the display processing order on a frame-by-frame basis to display moving images based on motion data.

When the performance control device 313 performs display control based on the "summary display pattern data" sent from the sub-CPU 310, it reads out the "detailed display pattern data" required for the process from the data ROM 324 and executes the display process using both display pattern data. Therefore, it can be said that the performance control device 313 executes the display control process based on the display pattern data including the "summary display pattern data" and the "detailed display pattern data". Therefore, in this specification, unless explicitly stated, the "summary display pattern data" stored in the sub-ROM 312 and the "detailed display pattern data" stored in the data ROM 324 are not distinguished, and are simply referred to as "display pattern data". For example, when the performance control means performs a specific process based on the display pattern data stored in the data storage means, this display pattern data includes the "summary display pattern data" and the "detailed display pattern data". In a modified example, the display pattern data is not divided into the "summary display pattern data" and the "detailed display pattern data", and the display pattern data serving both functions may be stored in the sub-ROM 312 or the data ROM 324.

In this embodiment, the hardware configuration of the performance control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, a control RAM 322, a data ROM 324, and a display control circuit 326. In a modified example, the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, the data ROM 324, and the display control circuit 326 may be integrated rather than being configured as separate electronic components. In addition, the processing performed by the display control circuit 326 may be performed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, or the data ROM 324. For example, the control CPU 320 included in the performance control device 313 may execute the processing performed by the decoder 332, the drawing circuit 336, and the display circuit 340 included in the display control circuit 326. In addition, the control RAM 322 included in the performance control device 313 may also function as the drawing memory 334 and the frame buffer 338. Alternatively, the performance control device 313 may have a hardware configuration that does not include the display control circuit 326, in which case the processing executed by the display control circuit 326 may be executed by the control CPU 320, the control RAM 322, or the data ROM 324.

In addition, in this embodiment, the hardware configuration of the sub-substrate 300 includes the sub-CPU 310, the sub-RAM 311, and the sub-ROM 312, as well as the performance control device 313. In a modified example, the sub-CPU 310, the sub-RAM 311, the ROM 312, and the performance control device 313 may be integrated, rather than being configured as separate electronic components. In addition, the processing performed by the performance control device 313 may be performed by the sub-CPU 310, the sub-RAM 311, or the sub-ROM 312. For example, the sub-CPU 310 may perform the processing of the control CPU 320, the sub-RAM 311 may also function as the control RAM 322, and the sub-ROM 312 may also function as the data ROM 324. In addition, the hardware configuration may not include the performance control device 313 in the sub-substrate 300, and in this case, the processing performed by the performance control device 313 may be performed by the sub-CPU 310, the sub-RAM 311, or the sub-ROM 312.

Figure 15 is a flow chart showing the control start process of the main board 200 in a pachinko gaming machine. This control start process is executed by the main initial process execution means 280, but from here on, it will be described as being executed by the main CPU 290 functioning as the main initial process execution means 280. When the power switch 150 is turned on, the main CPU 290 sets a stack pointer (S100), permits access to the main RAM 291 (S102), and executes initial settings related to the hardware, such as setting the main CPU 290's built-in registers (S104).

The main CPU 290 checks the operation state of the setting key, and if the setting key is ON (Y in S105), checks the operation state of the RAM clear switch. If the RAM clear switch is ON (Y in S122), it executes a setting change process (S124). On the other hand, if the RAM clear is OFF (N in S122), it executes a setting confirmation process (S126). Note that if the setting key is OFF in S105 (N in S105), the processes of S122 to S126 are skipped.

Next, depending on the operation state of the RAM clear switch, the value of the power off information flag, and the state of the data stored in the main RAM 291, a power off recovery process or a main RAM 291 initialization process is executed. Specifically, if the RAM clear switch is not turned ON and both the value of the power off information flag and the data stored in the main RAM 291 are normal, a power off recovery process is executed. In other cases, that is, if the RAM clear switch is turned ON, or if the RAM clear switch is not turned ON but either the power off information flag or the data stored in the main RAM 291 is not normal, a main RAM 291 initialization process is executed.

The main CPU 290 checks the operation state of the RAM clear switch, and if the RAM clear switch is ON (Y in S106), initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). If the RAM clear switch is not ON (N in S106), the main CPU 290 checks the value of the power off information flag (S108). If the value of the power off information flag does not match the power off normal data (N in S108), initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). If the value of the power off information flag matches the power off normal data (Y in S108), checks the data stored in the main RAM 291 (S110). As described below, if the process was completed normally at the time of the previous power off, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is stored in the main RAM 291, so the main CPU 290 checks the data in the main RAM 291 using the checksum. If the data stored in the main RAM 291 is not normal (N in S112), initializes the data in the main RAM 291 (S116). If the data stored in the main RAM is normal (Y in S112), processing is performed to restore the state before the power was turned off (S114).

In the power failure recovery process (S114), normal power-on data indicating that the power was turned on normally is stored in the power failure information flag, and the initial settings for various errors and the initial settings for communication with the payout control board 155 are performed. Next, any command requests that have not been sent before the power failure are cleared, and a request is made to send commands for various information indicating the game status. Next, a request is made for performance commands corresponding to the number of balls pending activation for the first special pattern and the second special pattern. Next, the open/closed state of the second start port 12 and the large prize port 20 is restored to the state before the power failure. Next, a process is executed to notify the activation state of the probability fluctuation function of the special pattern.

In the RAM initialization process (S116), normal power-on data is stored in the power-off information flag, the entire area of the main RAM 291 is cleared to 0, and the main RAM 291 is initialized and the performance display is initialized. Note that in the initialization process of S116, the setting values stored in the setting memory of the setting change device 170 are not cleared, and the setting values set in the setting change process of S124 are retained as they are.

When the power-off recovery process (S114) or RAM initialization process (S116) is completed, a count value is set to start the interrupt process described below, and the interrupt timer starts operating (S118). As a result, a timer interrupt occurs every predetermined time (e.g., 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt process described below is executed. Next, the main CPU 290 executes the main process for managing the gaming machine (S120).

Figure 16 is a flow chart showing the setting change process of S124 in Figure 15 in detail. The value of the setting memory where the setting value of the game setting should be stored is checked, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N in S132), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S134). When "1" to "6" are used as the setting value data, "1" is set as the initial value, and when "0" to "5" are used as the setting value data, "0" is set as the initial value. If the setting memory value is normal (Y in S132), the processing of S134 is skipped. Next, the setting is changed (S136), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173 (S138). If a change operation is performed using the setting change button 172 (Y in S140), the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is updated, and the setting value stored in the setting memory is updated (S142). If no change operation is performed (N in S140), the processing of S142 is skipped. If the setting key remains ON (N in S144), the process repeats S138 to S142. If the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to its original position and turned OFF (Y in S144), the setting display unit 173 is made invisible so that the setting value cannot be seen (S146), and the process returns.

Figure 17 is a flow chart showing the details of the setting confirmation process of S126 in Figure 15. The value of the setting memory where the game setting value should be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N in S152), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S154). If the setting memory value is normal (Y in S152), the process of S154 is skipped. A setting confirmation state is entered (S156), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173 (S158). If the setting key remains ON (N in S160), the process of S158 is repeated to continue displaying the setting value, and if the setting key is turned OFF (Y in S160), the setting display unit 173 is made invisible so that the setting value cannot be seen (S162), and the process returns.

Figure 18 is a flow chart showing the main processing of S120 in Figure 15 in detail. The main CPU 290 temporarily prohibits timer interrupts (S200), starts the operation of the watchdog timer (S202), and monitors for power cutoff (S204). When a drop in the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 158 is detected in a power supply voltage monitoring circuit (not shown), the power supply voltage monitoring circuit inputs an unconditional interrupt request signal to the main CPU 290, and in the power cut storage processing executed by this, the power cut confirmation data is stored in the power cut confirmation flag. Therefore, the main CPU 290 monitors the value of the power cut confirmation flag (S204), and if the value of the power cut confirmation flag matches the power cut confirmation data (Y in S206), proceeds to S212 to execute processing for power cutoff. If the value of the power off confirmation flag does not match the power off confirmation data (N in S206), the initial value random number update process is executed (S208) to update the initial value random number for the normal symbol, the initial value random number for the special symbol, and the soft initial value random number for the special symbol, and the process returns to S200. After that, S200 to S210 are repeated. If a timer interrupt occurs while timer interrupt is prohibited (S202 to S208), the timer interrupt is permitted in S210, and the interrupt process described below is executed.

When a power cut is detected in S206 (Y in S206), the main CPU 290 restarts the watchdog timer (S212) and checks the contents of the power cut information flag (S214). If the contents of the power cut information flag do not match the power-on normal data (N in S214), it is determined that the data at the time of power-on is not stored correctly, and the power cut abnormality data is stored in the power cut information flag (S216), and the process proceeds to S222. If the contents of the power cut information flag match the power-on normal data (Y in S214), it is determined that the data at the time of power-on is stored correctly, and the power cut normal data is stored in the power cut information flag (S218). Next, in order to check the backed-up data of the main RAM 291 at the next power-on, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is calculated and stored in the main RAM 291 (S220). Next, access to the main RAM 291 is prohibited (S222), and the process loops until the power is turned off. The above power-off processing is executed by the main power-off processing execution means 282 implemented by the main CPU 290.

Figure 19 is a flow chart showing details of the interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs during the main process (S120), the main CPU 290 executes the interrupt process. First, the interrupt operation conditions are set (S300), and the watchdog timer is restarted (S302). Next, in order to manage the gaming machine, input processing (S304), various random number update processing (S306), initial value update type random number update processing (S308), initial value random number update processing (S310), timer subtraction processing (S312), second start port valid period setting processing (S314), winning monitoring processing (S316), prize ball control processing (S318), normal pattern operation gate monitoring processing (S320), normal pattern control processing (S322), normal pattern change start monitoring processing (S324), start port monitoring control processing (S326), special pattern control processing (S328), special electric role control processing (S330) are performed. ), large prize opening validity period setting process (S332), special pattern change start monitoring control process (S334), abnormality detection process (S336), ball entry passing time abnormality detection process (S338), game status display process (S340), handle status signal inspection process (S342), LED output process (S344), launch control signal output process (S346), test signal output process (S348), solenoid output process (S350), performance control command transmission process (S352), and external information output process (S354) are executed in that order, the next timer interrupt is permitted (S356), and then the process returns.

In input processing (S304), data from the input ports of the switches attached to the game board, open/short circuit/power supply abnormality detection signals, door/frame opening signals, magnetic detection signals, radio wave detection signals, and touch status signals are monitored, and data indicating the input status is created and stored in main RAM 291. Note that this data indicating the input status is level data (input port data at the time of the current interruption) and rising or falling data (data indicating the switch that was found to have switched by comparing the input port data at the time of the current interruption with the input port data at the time of the previous interruption using an exclusive OR).

In the various random number update process (S306), the normal pattern fluctuation pattern random number and the fluctuation pattern random number are updated. The normal pattern fluctuation pattern random number is read from main RAM 291, and if the value is less than a predetermined maximum value, the value is incremented and stored, and if the value is equal to or greater than the predetermined maximum value, 0 is stored. Also, the fluctuation pattern random number is read from main RAM 291, and if the result of subtracting a predetermined value from the value is equal to or greater than 0, the subtraction result is stored, and if it is less than 0, the predetermined maximum value is stored. In this way, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern random number and the fluctuation pattern random number are updated every time a timer interrupt occurs.

In the initial value update type random number update process (S308), the random number per normal symbol, the pattern random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated. The value, maximum value, and initial value of each random number are read from the main RAM 291, and the random number value is incremented. If the increment result exceeds the maximum value, the random number value is set to 0. If the increment result matches the initial value, the initial value random number is read from the main RAM 291, and the initial value is updated. As a result, the random number per normal symbol, the pattern random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol are updated every time a timer interrupt occurs, and when the value of the random number returns to the initial value, i.e., when one cycle of the random number range has been completed, a new initial value is set and a random number is generated.

In the initial value random number update process (S310), the initial value random number per normal pattern, the pattern initial value random number per special pattern, and the soft initial value random number per special pattern are updated. The initial value random number is read from the initial value random number update table in the main RAM 291, and the value of the initial value random number is incremented. If the increment result exceeds the upper limit value, the value of the initial value random number is set to 0. The same process is also performed in the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120).

In the timer subtraction process (S312), the 2-byte timer is updated. The timer values for various controls are read from the main RAM 291 according to the respective tables, and if the timer value is other than 0, the value is sequentially decremented and stored. If the timer value is 0, the timer is not updated.

In the second start port valid period setting process (S314), the valid period of the second start port 12 is set. In the second start port 12, a valid period during which the prize ball is paid out and the lottery for the second special pattern is executed when a game ball enters, and an invalid period during which the prize ball is not paid out and the lottery for the second special pattern is not executed even if a game ball enters, are set. As described later, in the start port monitoring control process (S326), the monitoring process for the second start port entry is not executed during the invalid period of the second start port 12, so that the prize ball is not paid out and the lottery for the second special pattern is not executed even if a game ball enters the second start port 12. The same applies when a valid period and an invalid period are set for the first start port 11, the large prize port 20, the first operation port 31, the second operation port 32, the general prize port 33, etc. If the state of the normal pattern is "normal electric role in operation", the second start port valid period flag is stored with data indicating that the second start port 12 is in a valid period. If the state of the normal pattern is not "normal electric role in operation", if the value of the second start port valid extension timer is not 0, the second start port valid period flag is stored with data indicating that the second start port 12 is in a valid period, and if the value of the second start port valid extension timer is 0, the second start port valid period flag is stored with data indicating that the second start port is in an invalid period.

In the winning monitoring process (S316), the game ball passing through the switch is checked, and when the game ball passes through the switch, if the switch is not in an invalid period or is currently in an active period, and if a prize ball has been paid out, the winning counter is updated. Also, a security output request to be output to the external information output terminal 160 is created, and a command is sent.

In the prize ball control process (S318), the following operations are sequentially performed: monitoring data reception from the payout control board 155, requesting command transmission to the payout control board 155, transmitting the command to the payout control board 155, and inspecting the data received from the payout control board 155.

In the normal symbol activation gate monitoring process (S320), the passage of the game ball through the first activation port 31 and the second activation port 32 is monitored, and when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the first activation port 31 or the second activation port 32, if the number of reserved normal symbol variations is less than the upper limit of four, the number of reserved normal symbols is updated, and a random number related to the normal symbol is stored in the main RAM 291.

In the normal pattern control process (S322), the state of the normal pattern is monitored, and if it is determined that the normal pattern is being controlled, a process related to the normal pattern display unit 45 or the normal electric role 90 is executed. If the state of the normal pattern is "normal pattern changing", a process during normal pattern change is executed; if it is "normal pattern stop pattern displaying", a process during normal pattern stop pattern display is executed; if it is "normal electric role in operation", a process during normal electric role operation is executed; if it is "normal electric role operation end demo in progress", a process during normal electric role operation end demo is executed. In the normal pattern change process, after the normal pattern is changed, the change time is monitored, and if it is determined that the change time of the normal pattern has ended, a change stop setting of the normal pattern is executed, and the state of the normal pattern is set to "normal pattern stop pattern displaying". In the normal pattern stop pattern display process, the stop pattern display time of the normal pattern is monitored, and if it is determined that the stop pattern display time of the normal pattern has ended, a setting to end the operation of the normal pattern corresponding to the result of the winning judgment is executed. In the case of a win, the state of the normal symbol is set to "normal electric device in operation", the operation state of the normal electric device opening extension function at the time when the normal electric device operation started is saved, and the operation setting of the normal electric device solenoid 91 corresponding to the operation state of the normal electric device opening extension function at the time when the normal electric device operation started is executed. In the case of a loss, the state of the normal symbol is set to "standby for normal symbol change". In the normal electric device operation process, the winning of the game ball in the winning hole related to the normal electric device 90 is monitored, and if it is determined that the number of winning holes related to the normal electric device 90 has reached the maximum number of winning, the operation end setting of the normal electric device 90 and the setting of the effective extension time of the second starting hole are executed. If it is determined that the number of winnings at the winning port related to the normal electric role 90 has not reached the maximum number of winnings, the opening/closing time of the entrance of the winning port related to the normal electric role 90 is monitored, and the opening/closing of the entrance of the winning port related to the normal electric role 90 is set. If it is determined that the opening of the entrance of the normal electric role 90 has ended, the operation end setting of the normal electric role 90 and the setting of the effective extension time of the second starting port are executed. Note that if it is determined that the opening/closing time of the entrance of the winning port related to the normal electric role 90 has not ended, the opening/closing setting of the entrance of the winning port related to the normal electric role 90 is not executed. In the normal electric role operation end demo processing, the operation end demo time of the normal electric role 90 is monitored, and if it is determined that the operation end demo time of the normal electric role 90 has ended, the state of the normal pattern is set to "waiting for normal pattern change".

In the normal pattern change start monitoring process (S324), the state of the normal pattern is monitored, and if it is "waiting for normal pattern change" and the value of the number of balls reserved for normal pattern operation is other than 0, it is determined that the normal pattern change should be started. If it is determined that the normal pattern change should be started, the number of balls reserved for normal pattern operation is decremented, and a win determination is made, the stopping pattern is decided, the change pattern number of the normal pattern is set, and the change time of the normal pattern is set. After that, the state of the normal pattern is set to "normal pattern changing", and the area of main RAM 291 used for setting the state of the normal pattern, the win determination, and the change pattern determination is cleared.

In the start port monitoring control process (S326), the entry of the game ball into the first start port 11 and the second start port 12 is monitored. When the entry of the game ball is confirmed when the number of activated reserved balls of the first special pattern is less than 4, a built-in random number is acquired, and the value obtained by adding the value of the software random number for the special pattern to the acquired built-in random number is stored in the buffer as the random number for the special pattern used in the jackpot judgment. In addition, a pattern random number and a variable pattern random number are acquired and stored as random numbers related to the special pattern. When the reserved second special pattern is consumed in priority to the reserved first special pattern, only the reservation related to the winning is updated, but when the reserved special pattern is consumed in the order of winning, in addition to updating the reservation related to the winning, the total reserved number is updated and the winning order is stored. Next, in order to request a notice performance command corresponding to the random number stored at the time of the winning of the start port, the state of the gaming machine is checked, and if it is determined to be a command transmission period, a winning notice performance request, a winning pattern notice performance request, and a pattern notice performance request are executed in that order. Here, it is determined that it is a command transmission period when it corresponds to any of the following cases: (1) when a random number related to the first special symbol is stored while waiting for a win and the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is not yet activated, (2) when a random number related to the second special symbol is stored while waiting for a win and the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is not yet activated, and (3) when a random number related to the second special symbol is stored during a big win or a small win. Next, it requests a performance command corresponding to the number of reserved balls for operation of the special symbol. This notifies the sub-substrate 300 that the number of reserved balls for operation of the special symbol has been updated. As described above, in the pre-reading, four pieces of pre-judgment information (pre-win/loss judgment information, pre-pattern judgment information, pre-pattern judgment information), and the number of reserved balls are transmitted to the sub-substrate 300 as a set. In the above example, the main CPU 290 controlled the transmission of commands for the pre-judgment process, but in another example, when a ball enters the starting hole, it transmits them uniformly, and the sub-CPU 310 may make various situation judgments such as whether it is a pre-reading period or not. Next, the value of the second start port valid period flag is checked, and if the value of the second start port valid period flag is data indicating that the second start port 12 is in a valid period, the second start port winning monitoring process is executed as in the case of a first start port winning. If the value of the second start port valid period flag is data indicating that the second start port 12 is in an invalid period, the second start port winning monitoring process is not executed. Note that if a game ball winning is confirmed when the number of reserved balls is 0, the number of reserved balls is temporarily changed from 0 to 1, and the control process related to the start of fluctuation, which will be described later, is executed.

In the special symbol control process (S328), the waiting state is checked, and if the special electric role is in operation, i.e., in the middle of a big win or small win, the special symbol control process is terminated. If the special electric role is not in operation, the state of the special symbol is checked, and if it is "waiting for special symbol change", the special symbol control general process is terminated, if it is "start of change", the special symbol change start process is executed, if it is "special symbol changing", the special symbol change process is executed, and if it is "special symbol stop pattern displaying", the special symbol stop pattern display process is executed. In the special symbol change start process, the selection number of the special symbol change pattern is obtained based on the change pattern random number, the change time corresponding to the special symbol change pattern number is determined, and the sub-board 300 is requested to start the performance display, and the change additional symbol information, change pattern, and character information commands are requested, the state of the special symbol is set to "special symbol changing", and the change pattern determination area used to determine the special symbol change pattern is cleared to 0. In the special symbol variation process, after the special symbol varies, the variation time is monitored, and if it is determined that the variation time of the special symbol has ended, a setting to stop the variation of the special symbol is performed, and the state of the special symbol is set to "special symbol stopped symbol being displayed." In the special symbol stopped symbol display process, the display time of the special symbol stopped symbol is monitored, and if it is determined that the display time of the special symbol stopped symbol has ended, a setting to end the operation of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the winning determination is executed. In the event of a jackpot, the state of the special pattern is set to "waiting for special pattern change" to end the operation of the special pattern, the number of times the special electric device will operate in succession is set, the special pattern probability change function, special pattern change time reduction function, normal pattern probability change function, normal pattern change time reduction function, and normal electric device opening extension function are deactivated, the state of the gaming machine is set to preparing to open the large prize opening, and the hit start demo display time is set, a command request for the hit start demo performance, and a command request for the launch position designation performance (a command request to execute a performance that suggests a recommended launch position, such as "right hit") are executed. If the result of the hit judgment is a small hit, the operation end judgment of the special pattern change time shortening function and the normal pattern probability change function is performed, the change pattern selection state is updated, a command request for the game state is made, and in order to end the operation of the special pattern, the state of the special pattern is set to "waiting for special pattern change", the state of the gaming machine is set to during the small hit start demo, and a command request is made to set the hit start demo display time, a command request for the hit start demo performance, and a command request for the launch position designation performance is executed. If the result of the hit judgment is a miss, the operation end judgment of the special pattern change time shortening function and the normal pattern probability change function is performed, the change pattern selection state is updated, a command request for the game state is made, and in order to end the operation of the special pattern, the state of the special pattern is set to "waiting for special pattern change", and a command request is executed for the launch position designation performance.

In the special electric device control process (S330), in order to execute processing related to the special electric device, the operating status of the condition device and the special electric device are checked, and if it is determined that the condition device is operating or the special electric device is operating, the processing related to the special electric device is executed. Depending on the operating status of the special electric device, the processing during preparation for opening the large prize opening, the processing during special electric device operation, the processing during closing of the large prize opening, the processing during demo during the end of the large prize, the processing during demo during the start of the small prize, the processing during special electric power operation for the small prize, the processing during closing of the large prize opening for the small prize, and the processing during demo during the end of the small prize are executed.

In the large prize opening valid period setting process (S332), in order to save the result of the valid period determination of the large prize opening 20, if the value of the large prize opening valid time is 0, the large prize opening invalid period data is stored in the large prize opening valid period flag, and if it is other than 0, the large prize opening valid period data is stored in the large prize opening valid period flag.

In the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S334), the operating state of the special symbol is monitored, and it is determined whether the special symbol is in a state where it can start changing. If the order of consumption of reserved balls for the special symbol is the priority consumption of the second special symbol, it is determined that the special symbol is in a state where it can start changing when all of the following are met: (1) not in a big win or small win, (2) the first special symbol is waiting to change, (3) the second special symbol is waiting to change, and (4) the number of operating reserved balls for the special symbol is other than 0. If the order of consumption of reserved balls for the special symbol is the order of winning, it is determined that the special symbol is in a state where it can start changing when, in addition to the above (1) to (3), (5) the total number of reserved balls for the special symbol is other than 0, and (6) the said judgment matches the consumption order, i.e., the order of winning, it is determined that the special symbol is in a state where it can start changing.

When it is determined that the special symbol is in a state where it can start to change, the number of reserved balls for that special symbol is subtracted, and a performance command corresponding to the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. This notifies the sub-board 300 that the number of reserved balls for the special symbol has been updated.

Next, a hit determination for the special symbol is performed. In the hit determination, the special symbol hit random number is used to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss, and the determination result is stored in the special symbol determination flag. Next, the symbol is determined. In determining the symbol, if the hit determination is a big hit, the big hit symbol is determined based on the special symbol hit random number, if it is a small hit, the small hit symbol is determined, and if it is a miss, the miss symbol is determined.

If the result of the hit judgment is a jackpot, the operation content of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is judged based on the value of the group judgment number indicating the type of winning symbol determined in the pattern determination process, and the game state after the jackpot is set, such as the operation content of the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function and the easy winning state of the normal symbol. Next, settings during the jackpot are executed, such as the number of times the special electric roler operates consecutively and the contents of the opening time of the large winning port. Next, the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection state are set by selecting the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to after the jackpot is ended based on the result of the hit judgment and the operation state of the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol. Next, the start demo time and end demo time are set by referring to the table selected based on the value of the group judgment number indicating the type of winning symbol and the game state. Next, the area of the main RAM 291 used for the hit judgment and the symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "start of fluctuation".

If the result of the hit judgment is a small hit, the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection state are set by selecting the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to after the small hit ends, the start demo time and end demo time are set, the area of main RAM 291 used for hit judgment and pattern determination is cleared, and the state of the special pattern is set to "fluctuation start." If the result of the hit judgment is a miss, the area of main RAM 291 used for hit judgment and pattern determination is cleared, and the state of the special pattern is set to "fluctuation start."

In the abnormality detection process (S336), the main CPU 290 functioning as the main error detection means 284 checks the magnetic detection signal, the open/short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, the radio wave detection signal, and the door/frame open signal, and if there is a change in the error state, it stores the error state and requests the sub-board 300 to display an error state presentation of the gaming machine. At this time, the light emission mode of the light-emitting means such as an LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the error state. If there is no change in the error state, the request to store the error state and to display the error state presentation is not executed.

In the ball entry passing time abnormality detection process (S338), the main CPU 290, functioning as the main error detection means 284, monitors the continuous on time of each switch level to detect ball entry passing time abnormalities, and if it determines that the continuous on time (e.g., the value of a counter that increments with each interrupt when the switch is on) is an abnormal value, it sequentially sets a ball entry passing time abnormality, requests to send a command, and creates a security output request to be output to the external information output terminal 160. At this time, the light emission mode of a light-emitting means such as an LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the ball entry passing time abnormality. If it determines that the continuous on time is not abnormal, it does not create a security output request.

In the game status display process (S340), the display data for each of the following is created to request the display of the number of times the special electric device has been activated in succession, the error state, the number of activated balls for normal symbols, and the number of activated balls for special symbols.

In the steering wheel state signal inspection process (S342), the steering wheel state is inspected to monitor the touch state of the steering wheel. If the inspection determines that there has been a change in the steering wheel state, the steering wheel state monitoring timer is decremented, the steering wheel state is updated, the steering wheel state monitoring timer is set, and a request to send a command to display the steering wheel state is executed. If the inspection determines that there has been no change in the steering wheel state, the steering wheel state monitoring timer is set. If the result of decrementing the steering wheel state monitoring timer is other than 0, it is determined that the timer is decrementing, and no further processing is executed.

In the LED output process (S344), the display is initialized, and display data is acquired and output in order to display the special symbol, the normal symbol, the number of balls reserved for activation of the special symbol, the number of balls reserved for activation of the normal symbol, the game status, the number of times the special electric device has been activated in succession, the operating status of the special electric device when the device continuous activation device is not activated, the type of shot, the error, and the prize ball ratio.

In the launch control signal output process (S346), in order to output a signal prohibiting/allowing the launch of game balls, the communication status with the payout control board 155 and the setting of prohibiting/allowing launch corresponding to the disconnection/short circuit power supply abnormality, as well as the launch prohibiting/allowing data are acquired, and then the launch prohibiting/allowing signal is output.

In the test signal output process (S348), a signal to be output to the test device is created and output to the corresponding output port.

In the solenoid output process (S350), in order to output the output data of the normal electric role solenoid 91 and the large prize opening solenoid 92, the output data of the normal electric role solenoid 91 is acquired, the output data of the large prize opening solenoid 92 is acquired, and the output data is output. The operation flag and operation timer of each solenoid are acquired, and output data corresponding to the acquired solenoid operation flag and solenoid operation timer is acquired. Next, the solenoid operation timer is updated, and the output data is output to the solenoid output port.

In the performance control command transmission process (S352), the presence or absence of a request to send a command to the sub-board 300 is checked, and if it is determined that there is a request to send, the requested command data is obtained, the command buffer used is cleared to 0, and the following steps are sequentially performed: obtaining MODE data corresponding to the obtained command data, outputting the MODE data, retaining the MODE data, obtaining EVENT data corresponding to the obtained command data, and outputting the EVENT data.

In the external information output process (S354), a signal is created to be output to the external information output terminal 160, and the created signal is output to the external information output port.

The random numbers used in the operation process of the main board 200 described above will be explained in more detail. The random numbers used in the main board 200 mainly include normal pattern random numbers and normal pattern variation pattern random numbers as random numbers related to normal patterns, and special pattern random numbers (hard random numbers), special pattern soft random numbers, special pattern random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers as random numbers related to special patterns. In addition, the random numbers for providing the initial values of the normal pattern random numbers, special pattern random numbers, and special pattern soft random numbers, which are initial value update type random numbers, include normal pattern initial value random numbers, special pattern initial value random numbers, and special pattern soft initial value random numbers.

The normal symbol random number is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position in the main RAM 291. When the normal symbol activation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process determines that the game ball has passed through the first activation port 31 or the second activation port 32, and the number of reserved normal symbol fluctuations is less than the upper limit of four, the normal symbol random number is obtained from a predetermined position in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol random number is used to determine a win and the stopping symbol when it is determined in the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S324) that the normal symbol fluctuation should be started.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number takes a value between 0 and 232, for example, and is updated in the various random number update processes (S306) of the interrupt process, and stored in a predetermined position in the main RAM 291. When it is determined in the normal symbol activation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process that the game ball has passed through the first activation port 31 or the second activation port 32, and the number of reserved normal symbol fluctuations is less than the upper limit of four, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number is obtained from a predetermined position in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number is used to determine the normal symbol fluctuation pattern when it is determined in the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S324) that the normal symbol fluctuation should be started.

The special symbol random number is generated by obtaining the values of the built-in random number and the special symbol soft random number and adding them together when a winning game ball is confirmed in the start gate monitoring control process (S326) of the interrupt process when the number of activated balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than four, and is stored in a specified location in the main RAM 291. The special symbol random number is used to execute a big hit determination and a small hit determination in the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The soft random number for the special symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process, and is stored in a predetermined position in the main RAM 291. The soft random number for the special symbol is obtained from a predetermined position in the main RAM 291 when the start port monitoring control process (S326) confirms that a game ball has won when the number of activated balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than four, and is used to generate the random number for the special symbol, as described above.

The special symbol hit random number takes a value between 0 and 999 (0 and 255 in the example of FIG. 7), for example, and is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process and stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. The special symbol hit random number is obtained from a predetermined location in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 when the winning ball is confirmed in the start port monitoring control process (S326) when the number of active balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than four. The special symbol hit random number is used to determine the jackpot symbol when the winning judgment is a jackpot in the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value between 0 and 49999 (0 and 255 in the example of FIG. 8), for example, and is updated in the various random number update processes (S306) of the interrupt process and stored in a predetermined position in the main RAM 291. The fluctuation pattern random number is obtained from a predetermined position in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 when the winning game ball is confirmed in the start gate monitoring control process (S326) when the number of activated balls of the first special pattern or the second special pattern is less than four. The fluctuation pattern random number is used to determine the special pattern fluctuation pattern in the special pattern control process (S328) of the interrupt process.

The normal pattern initial value random number, the special pattern initial value random number, and the special pattern soft initial value random number take values in the same range as the normal pattern random number, the special pattern random number, and the special pattern soft random number, respectively, and are updated in the initial value random number update process (S208) of the main process (S120) and the initial value random number update process (S310) of the interrupt process, and are stored in a predetermined position in the main RAM 291. The normal pattern initial value random number, the special pattern initial value random number, and the special pattern soft initial value random number are used as the initial values of the respective random numbers when updating the normal pattern random number, the special pattern random number, and the special pattern soft random number in the initial value update type random number update process (S308).

The interrupt process is executed at regular intervals by a timer interrupt, so the various random number update processes (S306) and the initial value update type random number update process (S308) included in the interrupt process are also executed at regular intervals. That is, the normal symbol random number, the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the special symbol random number, the special symbol soft random number, the special symbol symbol random number, and the variation pattern random number are updated at regular intervals. In contrast, the main process (S120) is repeated from the end of the interrupt process to the occurrence of the next timer interrupt, that is, for the time obtained by subtracting the time required for the interrupt process from the fixed time measured by the timer. The time required for the interrupt process differs depending on the game state, etc., so the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120) is not executed at regular intervals, unlike the various random number update processes (S306) and the initial value update type random number update process (S308). This allows the initial value random number obtained when setting the initial value in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) to be random each time.

Figure 20 is a flow chart showing the control start process of the sub-substrate 300 in a pachinko game machine. This control start process is executed by the sub-initialization execution means 360, but from now on, it will be described as being executed by the sub-CPU 310 functioning as the sub-initialization execution means 360. When control of the sub-substrate 300 is started, the sub-CPU 310 sets a stack pointer (S500), prohibits all interrupts until various initial settings are completed (S502), and executes initial settings related to hardware such as register settings and port initialization of the sub-CPU 310 (S504). The control program is read from the sub-ROM 312 and placed in the sub-RAM 311, and among various variables in the control program, initial values are set for variables with initial values, and zero-clear data is set for variables without initial values, thereby initializing the sub-RAM 311 (S506). Note that the interrupt process in the sub-substrate 300 is executed with the highest priority as the process at power up and the reset process at the occurrence of various abnormalities when the watchdog function is active. The next highest priority interrupt processing, with priority level 7, is command processing received from the main board 200, and the next highest priority interrupt processing, with priority level 3, is reset processing when a CPU runaway is detected by the watchdog timer. The next highest priority interrupt processing, with priority level 2, is processing related to commands sent and received between the control CPU 320, and the lowest priority interrupt processing, with priority level 1, is communication processing with a real-time clock and various device control processing such as lamps, solenoids, and motors. If interrupts related to the above various processes occur simultaneously, they are executed in order of priority, starting from the highest priority that is preset for each type of interrupt. The processing shown in this figure includes the highest priority interrupt processing, which is processing when the power is turned on and reset processing when various abnormalities occur, and the priority level 3 interrupt reset processing when a CPU runaway is detected.

Interrupts (priority level 7) other than commands received from the main board 200 are prohibited (S510), and various error information to be used for that model is set from all pre-stored error information for all models (S512). All lamps such as the decorative lamp 111 are turned off (S514), the watchdog timer starts operating (S516), and main processing is executed (S518). Normally, the flow does not return from the main processing of S518 to this flow, but when it does return, it transitions to sleep (low power consumption mode) (S520).

Figure 21 is a flow chart showing in detail the main processing of S518 in Figure 20. In order to check within the main processing of this figure whether the control program placed in the sub-RAM 311 in S506 in Figure 20 is correctly placed, the start address for the check is obtained (S530), all interrupts are permitted in the subsequent processing (S532), and initialization operations are performed for devices such as motors and solenoids (S534).

If the watchdog timer is set to be used, the watchdog timer is cleared (S536), the counter for the decorative symbols is updated so that the combination of the decorative symbols that will result in a loss becomes a random combination (S540), and the input port of the sub-CPU 310 is monitored (S542). Since S540 is a process in a method of determining the loss of the decorative symbols using a counter, the process of S540 is not executed in the case of a method of determining the loss of the decorative symbols using a lottery sheet that incorporates all the pattern combinations that will result in a loss. The process of determining the loss of the decorative symbols using the lottery sheet is executed when a command indicating the stop pattern of the special pattern is received from the main board 200 as described later in S552. The sub-CPU 310, which functions as the sub-error detection means 364, monitors the error state and reports the error when it detects various errors (S544), executes a process according to the input state of the performance button 109 (S546), and executes a notice lottery (S548). In addition, in order to send the command for the preview performance to be displayed immediately after the start of the pattern change to the performance control device 313 as early as possible, the lottery process in S548 is not processed in one loop but is divided into multiple loops, and the preview performance to be displayed immediately after the start of the pattern change is selected in the first loop. If there is an operation request for a device such as a real-time clock, a lamp, a motor, or a solenoid, the operation is executed (S550), the command saved in the command buffer is analyzed (S552), and if it is immediately after the command analysis, the process returns to S536 (Y in S554), and if it is not immediately after the command analysis (N in S554), the lottery software random number is updated (S556), which is a low-priority process that can be performed in a spare time, and the process returns to S536. In addition, in S552, if the analyzed command indicates a special symbol variation pattern, the decorative symbol variation performance pattern is determined by the processing of this S552, and if the analyzed command indicates a special symbol stopping pattern, and if a lottery sheet is used to determine the losing decorative symbol, the decorative symbol stopping pattern is determined by the processing of this S552.

Figure 22 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a command is received from the main board 200. The main command received from the main board 200 is an interrupt command with a priority level of 7, which is the next highest priority after the reset interrupt and the error interrupt. The data received from the main board 200 is read from the input port, and when the same data is read twice in succession, the data is confirmed as a new command (Y in S600). If the confirmed command is the first command (MODE data) (Y in S602), the first command is saved in the temporary storage area (S604). A hard random number is obtained for subsequent processing (S606), and the original routine is returned to. In this way, by obtaining a hard random number every time there is an interruption of the main command from the main board 200, periodicity is not generated in the timing of obtaining the random number, and the randomness of the value is increased. If the data read in S600 does not match twice in succession (it can be read up to five times), S602 is skipped and the original routine is returned to (N in S600).

In S602, if the confirmed command is not the first command but the second command (N in S602), and it is confirmed that the first command has already been properly received (Y in S608), a command write pointer, which is the read position in the command buffer (ring buffer for command data), is obtained (S610), and the first command and the second command are saved in the command buffer (S612). The command data saved in the command buffer is analyzed in S552 of FIG. 21. The command write pointer is updated (S614), the first command saved in the temporary storage area is cleared (S616), and the original routine is returned to. If the first command has not been received in S608, S610 and subsequent steps are skipped (N in S608), and the original routine is returned to.

Figure 23 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for controlling the display of effects occurs. This timer interrupt is a priority level 2 interrupt for sending commands related to the display of effects from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320, and occurs at a cycle of 500 μs. In this interrupt, the buffer is checked (S620), and if there is command data to be sent in the buffer (Y in S622), the command data is read (S624) and sent to the control CPU 320 (S626). Note that the command data to be sent to the control CPU 320 is attempted up to three times at a predetermined time interval until the sub CPU 310 receives a command from the control CPU 320 indicating that the data has been received normally on the control CPU 320 side. After sending, the setting of the read address of the buffer is updated (S628), and the original routine is returned to. If there is no data to be sent in the buffer (N in S622), S624 and subsequent steps are skipped and the original routine is returned to.

Figure 24 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when the sub CPU 310 receives a command from the control CPU 320. This interrupt is also a priority level 2 interrupt. The command that the sub CPU 310 receives from the control CPU 320 is mainly a command indicating that the command sent from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320 has been received successfully. When a command is received from the control CPU 320, the received command data is read (S630), the command is analyzed (S632), and saved in the command buffer (S634), and the original routine is returned to.

Figure 25 is a flow chart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. This timer interrupt is an interrupt for lamp control such as the decorative lamp 111, control of the solenoid and motor that drives the movable prop 66, and management control of various timers, and occurs at a 1 ms cycle. Since this is an interrupt of priority level 1, which has the lowest priority, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher are permitted (S640), and input/output of ports that input/output signals such as signals indicating input from the performance button 109, signals indicating error detection, signals indicating power interruption, and drive signals for controlled devices such as motors and solenoids is processed (S642). At this time, if a signal indicating power interruption is input, the process immediately transitions to backup processing. Data related to device control is updated (S644), such as counting based on the control patterns of devices such as motors and solenoids, and on/off control of the buffer for writing data to the port in S642, a timer for timing the performance is updated (S646), a timer for managing the effective input time of the performance button 109 is updated (S648), and task control counters for switching the decorative lamp 111 on and off and for monitoring runaway control of the control CPU 320 are updated to create a 16 ms cycle (S650).

The minimum unit for the lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is 16 ms. One frame of image display control is 16 ms or 32 ms, and by setting an integer multiple of this as the minimum unit for the lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, it is possible to easily synchronize the lamp control and the image display control. Also, when counting a relatively long period, such as a 30-second error notification, if a count with a one-interrupt (1 ms) cycle is used, the count value will be longer than necessary, but by using a count value with a 16 ms cycle, the count value can be shortened.

There are 16 types of tasks in the task control, from processes 0 to 15, of which one task is the lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111, and the other two are runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320. The lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is performed once every 16 interrupts according to the count value of the task control counter, thereby achieving switching at a cycle of 16 ms. The runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320 is assigned to processes 0 and 8, for example, and when the count value of the task control counter is 0 and 8, i.e. once every 8 interrupts, the toggle signal from the control CPU 320 is monitored (S652), thereby achieving monitoring at a cycle of 8 ms.

The control CPU 320 outputs a toggle signal that is inverted on and off every frame, and if this toggle signal does not change and remains the same value for 1600 ms consecutively, it is determined that the control CPU 320 is out of control, and a reset signal is sent from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320, and upon receiving the reset signal, the control CPU 320 executes a reset. Since the toggle signal is received from the control CPU 320 at a cycle of one frame (16 ms or 32 ms), it is monitored at a cycle of 8 ms, which is shorter than that cycle. Finally, a timer that manages a relatively long error notification period, such as the 30 second error notification described above, is decremented (S654), and the error notification ends when the timer times out.

Figure 26 is a flow chart showing the process of displaying the change in the special symbol. If the second winning/losing lottery value is reserved (Y in S700), the second winning/losing determination means 222 reads out the second winning/losing lottery value and determines whether the second special symbol 52 is a winning/losing symbol (S702), the second winning/losing determination means 222 determines the stopping symbol of the second special symbol 52 (S704), the second change pattern determination means 232 determines the change pattern of the second special symbol 52 (S706), and sends a change start command together with the determined result to the sub-board 300 to start the change in the symbol of the second special symbol 52 (S716).

If the second winning/losing selection value is not reserved (N in S700) and the first winning/losing selection value is reserved (Y in S708), the first winning/losing determination means 221 reads out the first winning/losing selection value and determines again whether the first special pattern 51 is a winning/losing selection (S710), the first winning/losing determination means 221 determines the stopping pattern of the first special pattern 51 (S712), the first variation pattern determination means 231 determines the variation pattern of the first special pattern 51 (S714), and sends a variation start command together with the determined result to the sub-board 300 to start the pattern variation of the first special pattern 51 (S716). If the first winning/losing selection value is not reserved, the processes from S710 to S722 are skipped (N in S708).

The display of the special pattern is processed (S718), and S718 is repeated until the predetermined change time has elapsed and the timing to stop the pattern display is reached (N at S720). When the predetermined change time has elapsed and the timing to stop the pattern display is reached (Y at S720), a change stop command is sent to the sub-board 300 to stop the pattern change being displayed at a predetermined stop pattern (S722), and the display of the special pattern change is ended.

27 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying the change in the decorative pattern. The effect determination means 303 of the sub-board 300 receives a command indicating the start of the change and the display contents from the main board 200 (S750), determines the stop mode of the decorative pattern according to the received stop pattern of the special pattern, the change pattern, and the result of the hit/miss judgment (S752), and determines the change performance pattern corresponding to the change pattern (S754). Here, if the premonition setting is turned on by the premonition judgment (Y in S756), if the already determined change performance pattern is not a pattern including a specific performance content that should be avoided from being superimposed with the advance notice performance (N in S758), and if it is not the pattern change that triggered the premonition setting to be turned on (N in S760), execute the setting to display the predetermined advance notice performance (S764), and if it is the pattern change that triggered the premonition setting to be turned on (Y in S760), turn off the premonition setting (S762). If the premonition setting is not on (N in S756) or if the variable presentation pattern includes specific presentation content (Y in S758), the process from S760 to S764 is skipped.

Then, the display of the decorative pattern change performance is started (S766), and the decorative pattern change performance display process (S768) and the preview performance display process are executed (S770). S768 and S770 are repeated (N in S772) until a change stop command is received from the main board 200. When the change stop command is received (Y in S772), the decorative pattern change display is stopped by displaying the decorative pattern in the stop mode determined in S752 (S774), and the decorative pattern change performance is ended (S776).

Figure 28 is a flow chart showing the process of the special game. First, the effect display control means 305 starts the effect processing of the special game (S800), and the opening/closing control means 275 opens the large prize opening 20 (S802). If the predetermined opening time has not elapsed (N in S804) and the number of balls entering the large prize opening 20 has not reached 9 or more, the process returns to S804 (N in S806). If the predetermined opening time has elapsed (Y in S804) or the number of balls entering the large prize opening 20 has reached 9 or more even though the opening time has not elapsed (N in S804) (Y in S806), the opening/closing control means 275 closes the large prize opening 20 (S810).

If the unit game has not reached the final round (N in S810), the number of rounds is incremented by 1 and the process returns to S802 (S812). If the unit game has reached the final round (Y in S810), the presentation display control means 305 ends the presentation processing of the special game (S814), the special game control means 260 ends the special game (S816), and starts the execution of a specific game, i.e., a special bonus, time-saving, or easy-to-score state (S818).

Figure 29 is a flow chart showing the process of a small win game. In a small win game, a unit game that is executed only once is started (S819), the large prize winning opening 20 is opened (S820), and the opening is continued until a predetermined opening time has elapsed (N in S822). If the opening time has elapsed (Y in S822), the large prize winning opening 20 is closed (S824). If the opening and closing has not been completed the set number of times (N in S826), the number of openings and closings is incremented by 1 and the process returns to S820 (S828). If the opening and closing has been completed the set number of times (Y in S826), the small win game ends.

In the premise technology, the number of balls in the second game is generally larger than the number of balls in the first game, that is, the expected value of winning balls in one jackpot in the second game is larger than that in the first game. In another example, the first game may be designed to have a larger expected value of winning balls than the second game, or the expected value of winning balls in the first game and the second game may be designed to be approximately equal. In the latter case, the average number of unit games included in the special game executed in the first game and the special game executed in the second game may be designed to be equal. For example, in the first game, a special game in which the unit game is executed seven times with a probability of 100% may be executed, and in the second game, a special game in which the unit game is executed four times with a probability of 50% and a special game in which the unit game is executed ten times with a probability of 50% may be executed. In either case, a specific area may be provided in the big prize opening, and when the game ball that entered the big prize opening enters or passes through the specific area, a specific game such as a probability variable state may be implemented in the normal game after the special game ends. In this case, the special game executed when a jackpot is reached in the second game may be configured so that the ball is easier to enter the specific area than the special game executed when a jackpot is reached in the first game, and the probability of the normal game in the probability variable state being executed after the special game ends may be higher. For example, a first win in which a special game in which it is relatively difficult to enter the specific area is executed and a second win in which a special game in which it is relatively easy to enter the specific area is executed may be provided, and the second game may be configured so that the probability of the second win is higher than that of the first game. Alternatively, the probability of the second win in the first game may be less than 100%, but the probability of the second win in the second game may be 100%.

(Example)
In this embodiment, we propose suitable control and presentation in a pachinko gaming machine equipped with a screen deformation presentation as a special presentation. In the following, elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements constituting the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the base technology are given the same reference numerals and described. In addition, the contents already explained in the base technology are omitted as appropriate, and mainly the contents that are different from the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the base technology are described.

<Special effects, normal/simple decorative patterns, normal/simple reserved images, pre-reading effects>
As a special effect in this embodiment, a screen deformation effect will be described. The screen deformation effect here refers to an effect in which a frame image included in a displayed video is deformed by enlarging, reducing, moving, distorting, oscillating, color inversion, color conversion, and the like, together with a frame image arranged around the frame image. The frame image deformation can be performed in two ways: one in which a frame image included in the original video is deformed in sequence (also called "frame still effect"), and the other in which a plurality of frame images included in the original video is deformed in sequence (also called "frame video effect"). The frame still effect is a effect in which the original video being displayed is frozen, and a deformation is applied to the frame image at the time of the freeze, so that a so-called screen capture image is fitted into the frame image as a still image and deformed. The frame video effect is a effect in which a deformation is applied to each frame image of the displayed video, so that the original video is fitted into the frame image as a moving image and deformed. The frame images of the original video are temporarily stored in a frame buffer, and new frame images are sequentially generated by adding deformations such as enlarging, reducing, moving, distorting, swinging, tilting, cracking, color inversion, color conversion, etc. to the frame images, and stored in the frame buffer to display new moving images as a screen deformation performance. In this way, by dynamically generating a post-deformation image for an image of one scene in a moving image, it is not necessary to prepare in advance post-deformation frame images corresponding to many scenes in multiple moving images, and it is possible to diversify the performance while suppressing increases in data volume and processing load.

First, the screen before the screen transformation effect is executed will be described.
FIG. 30 shows an example of the screen of the performance display device 60. FIG. 30(a) shows the state during the stop of the change. In the performance screen 500 of the performance display device 60, the normal decorative pattern 502 is displayed vertically as the decorative pattern 61 using most of the area in the approximate center, and the simple decorative pattern 504 is displayed vertically as the decorative pattern 61 in the upper right corner. In this way, the decorative pattern 61 of this embodiment is composed of the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504. The normal decorative pattern 502 is composed of the first normal decorative pattern 502a which is the left pattern, the second normal decorative pattern 502b which is the middle pattern, and the third normal decorative pattern 502c which is the right pattern.

A normal reserved image 506 and a simple reserved image 507 are displayed as reserved images. At the bottom of the performance screen 500, a normal reserved image 506 showing the number of reserved lottery values, up to a maximum of four, is displayed. In the figure, the first normal reserved image 506a, the second normal reserved image 506b, the third normal reserved image 506c, and the fourth normal reserved image 506d are displayed in a horizontal line from left to right in the order of ball entry (i.e., the order in which the fluctuation starts). The first normal reserved image 506a, the second normal reserved image 506b, the third normal reserved image 506c, and the fourth normal reserved image 506d are usually displayed as images imitating balls that light up in a predetermined color (e.g., blue). When each reserved image is determined to have a high probability of winning based on the so-called pre-reading at the time of ball entry, that is, the advance judgment information of the lottery value corresponding to each reservation, an image imitating a ball that lights up in a color corresponding to the high probability of winning is displayed. In the example of FIG. 30(a), only the third normal reserved image 506c is displayed as an image imitating a ball that lights up in a color different from blue (for example, red). The effect of lighting up in a color different from blue due to pre-reading in this way is the pre-reading notice effect in this embodiment. For example, the effect determination means 303 determines the color of the normal reserved image 506 so that the normal color "blue" suggests the lowest probability of winning, followed by "green", "red", and "rainbow" in that order. The number and color (or pattern) of these reserved images suggest to the player the number of reserved images and the probability of winning. The pattern change corresponding to the third normal reserved image 506c, which is scheduled to start the pattern change third, is the pattern change that is the target of pre-reading (the trigger for the execution of the pre-reading notice effect), and is also referred to as the "target change" below.

In the right corner of the presentation screen 500, a simplified hold image 507 is displayed, which is a hold image that is smaller and simpler than the normal hold image 506. The simplified hold image 507 is an image that indicates the number of normal hold images 506 being displayed in numbers, and in Figure 30 (a), the number "4" is displayed.

Figure 30(b) shows the state during the pattern change display. Figure 30(b) shows the state during the change display after the pattern change starts following the state of Figure 30(a), and the four normal reserved images 506, the first normal reserved image 506a to the fourth normal reserved image 506d in Figure 30(a), are moved one reserved image to the left from their respective positions. The first normal reserved image 506a in Figure 30(a) moves to the left and is displayed as the changing image 508. The changing image 508 is an image showing the lottery value currently changing, has a larger diameter than the normal reserved image 506, and a background pattern is displayed around it, emphasizing that the pattern is changing as distinguished from the normal reserved image 506. Note that the changing image 508 and the normal reserved image 506 are not separate image data, but common image data. Specifically, the image data only has the image data of the changing image 508, and the normal reserved image 506 is displayed by reducing the image data of the changing image 508. The second normal reserved image 506b, the third normal reserved image 506c, and the fourth normal reserved image 506d in FIG. 30(a) move one by one to the left to become the first normal reserved image 506a, the second normal reserved image 506b, and the third normal reserved image 506c. The first normal decorative pattern 502a has already finished the variable display and is displayed in a state of temporary stop, that is, it is substantially stopped but is fluctuating finely and the stop is not confirmed. The second normal decorative pattern 502b is fluctuating at high speed. The third normal decorative pattern 502c is in a state of fluctuating at a low speed after high speed rotation and about to stop. The simple decorative pattern 504 is rotating at high speed, and when all of the first normal decorative pattern 502a, the second normal decorative pattern 502b, and the third normal decorative pattern 502c stop (confirmed stop), the simple decorative pattern 504 is also stopped (confirmed stop). The fixed stop refers to a stop mode in which there is no fine oscillation and no slight movement, unlike the provisional stop. However, if the normal decorative pattern 502 is composed of numbers (or letters or symbols) and pictures of human or animal characters, and the simple decorative pattern 504 is composed only of numbers (or letters or symbols), the numbers (or letters or symbols) of the simple decorative pattern 504 are not temporarily stopped, but are only fixedly stopped, and do not oscillate finely or move slightly when fixedly stopped. On the other hand, the normal decorative pattern 502 can be temporarily stopped, and when it is temporarily stopped, both the numbers (or letters or symbols) and the picture oscillate finely, and when it is fixedly stopped, neither the numbers (or letters or symbols) nor the picture oscillate finely or move slightly, but after a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the fixed stop, at least one of the numbers (or letters or symbols) or the picture oscillates finely even when fixedly stopped.

The simple hold image 507 displayed in the right corner of the presentation screen 500 is an image that indicates the number of normal hold images 506 being displayed in numbers, and in FIG. 30(b) the number "3" is displayed. The movable role 520 is a movable decorative lamp that is shaped like the logo of the model title of this gaming machine, and when activated at a specified timing, it indicates in a presentation manner that there is a high possibility of a jackpot. The details will be described later, but in this embodiment there are multiple movable roles other than the movable role 520.

Figure 31 shows a schematic example of a frame image contraction in a screen transformation performance. Figure 31 (a) shows a state in which an enemy character 512 appears at a predetermined timing in a predetermined pattern change performance such as a super reach performance with a story motif of fighting an enemy character 512. During the execution of such a predetermined pattern change performance (super reach performance), it is preferable to hide the normal pending image 506 and the changing image 508 as shown in Figure 31, but the changing image 508 may continue to be displayed even when the normal pending image 506 is not displayed. For example, when it develops into a super reach performance, the normal pending image 506 is hidden, but the changing image 508 may be configured to be displayed during at least a part of the execution period of the super reach performance (for example, the first half period). Also, during the execution of such a predetermined pattern change performance (such as a super reach performance), as shown in FIG. 31, the normal decorative pattern 502 is not displayed, but the display mode may be made small (or, in the case of the normal decorative pattern 502 consisting of numbers and pictures, only the numbers may be displayed). For example, when the performance progresses to a super reach performance, the normal decorative pattern 502 may be configured to be displayed in a reach mode, small and/or only the numbers, during at least a part of the execution period of the super reach performance (for example, the first half period). Here, when a still-in-frame performance is executed as a screen deformation performance, as shown in FIG. 31(b), the image of the enemy character 512 that has been displayed on the screen as in FIG. 31(a) is frozen, and the still frame image is reduced to a size one size smaller, and a frame image 510 like a picture frame that has not been displayed until then is displayed around the reduced frame image. Although not shown in the figure, a plurality of frame images included in the original video are sequentially subjected to a transformation process such as shrinking, as in the case of the still frame production, and such a plurality of frame images are also included in the target of transformation, unless otherwise specified below. At least a part of this frame image 510 may be displayed in advance (for example, a part of the area closer to the inside of the frame image 510 may be displayed). The inside of the frame image 510 is hereinafter referred to as the frame image 514. Here, the frame image 510, which was not displayed on the production screen 500 in the state of FIG. 31(a), is displayed around the frame image 514 in the state of FIG. 31(b). Although the display control process itself is actually being executed by the production display control means 305 at the time of FIG. 31(a), this portion of the frame image 510 is an image portion that is not displayed in the production screen 500 and is not visualized because it is a portion disposed at a position corresponding to the outside of the frame of the production screen 500. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, the entire frame image 510 is made visible, but it is also possible to make only the upper portion of the frame image 510 visible (i.e., the rest of the frame image is invisible), or to make only the left and right portions of the frame image 510 visible (i.e., the top and bottom portions are invisible).

Here, the framed image 514, which is a reduced version of the frame image in FIG. 31(a), does not include the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple reserved image 507. In other words, the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple reserved image 507 are not subject to the screen transformation effect, and are displayed in a layer in front of the layer in which the screen transformation effect is displayed. The normal decorative pattern 502, the normal reserved image 506, and the changing image 508, which were displayed at the stage of FIG. 30, are switched to a non-display state, are not included in the transformation object, and are not included in the framed image 514. In other words, the display of the decorative pattern is guaranteed by making the normal decorative pattern 502 non-displayed while continuing the display of the simple decorative pattern 504 (making it possible to recognize whether or not it is changing), and the display of the reserved image is guaranteed by making the normal reserved image 506 and the changing image 508 non-displayed while continuing the display of the simple reserved image 507 (making it possible to recognize whether or not there is a reservation, and how many reservations there are). In a modified example, the normal decorative pattern 502 and the changing image 508 may be included in the framed image 514 and may be the subject of transformation. In other words, as described above, when the normal decorative pattern 502 and the changing image 508 are configured to continue displaying even in a predetermined pattern change performance (such as a super reach performance), the normal decorative pattern 502 and the changing image 508 may be included in the framed image 514 and may be the subject of the screen transformation performance. In addition, the normal reserved image 506 may be configured to continue displaying in a predetermined pattern change performance (such as a super reach performance), and may be included in the framed image 514 like the normal decorative pattern 502 and the changing image 508 and may be the subject of the screen transformation performance. The framed image 514 is an image in a state in which the frame image in FIG. 31(a) is reduced as described above and, in addition, the color is inverted (also called "negative-positive inversion"). The framed image 514 and the framed image 510 are objects to be subjected to subsequent transformation processing, and are therefore called target objects 516.

Figure 32 shows a schematic example of the shaking of a frame image in a screen transformation performance. The target object 516 is further reduced from the state shown in Figure 31 (b), and the previously two-dimensionally changed object is further changed in the depth direction to be transformed into a three-dimensional object. As a result, the target object 516 becomes an image in which a frame image of the moving image that was displayed until just before (in the case of a still-framed performance, it is an image like a captured image that freezes the moving image of the performance, and in the case of a moving-framed performance, the frame images that switch one after another) is pasted or projected onto one surface of the three-dimensional object. The target object 516 has a shape in which a framed image 514 is placed inside a curved frame image 510 as shown in the figure, and although it is not strictly rectangular, for the sake of convenience of explanation, it is assumed to be rectangular from here on, and the left end side is called the left side, the right end side is called the right side, the top end side is called the top side, and the bottom end side is called the bottom side. In FIG. 32(a), a four-vertex transformation is performed to make the left side of the target object 516 appear to move forward and the right side to move backward. That is, the left side is lengthened, the right side is shortened, and the top and bottom interior angles of the left side are smaller than a right angle, and the top and bottom interior angles of the right side are larger than a right angle, forming a trapezoid. In FIG. 32(b), a four-vertex transformation is performed to make the right side of the target object 516 appear to move forward and the left side to move backward. That is, the right side is lengthened, the left side is shortened, and the top and bottom interior angles of the right side are smaller than a right angle, and the top and bottom interior angles of the left side are larger than a right angle, forming a trapezoid. By alternately repeating the states of FIG. 32(a) and FIG. 32(b) at high speed, the left and right sides are alternately rotated back and forth in the forward and backward directions, making it appear as if the target object 516 is swaying.

The effect determination means 303 determines whether or not to execute a screen deformation effect as the effect content to be displayed on the effect screen 500 of the effect display device 60 according to the variation pattern. The screen deformation effect is displayed as a moving image by sequentially generating new frame images by combining at least an image of the target object 516 obtained by deforming a frame image stored in the frame buffer 338 at a predetermined timing, a background image 518, and an image showing the game status, and storing the new frame images in the frame buffer 338. Here, the background image 518 is solid black (blacked out), but the display mode is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a display mode in which a moving image in which the word "CHANCE" flows like a ticker is played in a loop.

Figure 33 shows a schematic layer structure of the presentation screen 500 in a screen transformation presentation. The layer structure of the presentation screen 500 is composed of, from the foreground to the background, an error display layer 521, a volume and light intensity display layer 522, a game status layer 523, a presentation layer 524, and a background layer 525, in that order. The foreground error display layer 521 displays an error warning image 536 indicating that an error has occurred and indicating the type of error, etc. The next layer, the volume and light intensity display layer 522, displays a volume setting image 532 showing an interface for the player to adjust the volume, and a light intensity setting image 534 showing an interface for the player to adjust the light intensity.

The next layer, the game status layer 523, displays images such as the simple decorative pattern 504, the simple reserved image 507, the changing image 508, and the guide display 530 for guiding right hit, and the display contents are constantly updated. As a variant, the changing image 508 may be displayed on the performance layer 524 instead of the game status layer 523. The next layer, the performance layer 524, is a layer where mainly the change of the normal decorative pattern 502, the normal reserved image 506, and the target object 516 are displayed. The shape, color, and display position of the target object 516 are constantly updated, but the contents of the framed image 514 included in the target object 516 are fixed in the case of a still performance such as a screen capture unless a change such as deformation or movement is added, and in the case of a performance in which a video is fitted into the framed image 514, the frame images included in the original video are fitted in sequence. The normal decorative pattern 502 and the normal reserved image 506 may be subject to deformation as part of the target object 516 in the screen deformation performance. Also, as described above, when the changing image 508 is displayed on the performance layer 524 instead of the game status layer 523, the changing image 508 may also be subject to deformation as part of the target object 516 in the screen deformation performance. The background layer 525 at the rear is a background image 518 of solid black. By displaying the background image 518 on the background layer 525, it is possible to make it look like a three-dimensional space with a sense of depth, and the target object 516 displayed on the performance layer 524 can also be made to look three-dimensional. As performance images that can be displayed on the performance display device 60, at least one or more first images belonging to the first image group and one or more second images belonging to the second image group are included, and in the screen deformation performance, a special first image in which the first image is deformed in a predetermined manner and a second image that is not deformed in a predetermined manner are displayed. The first image group refers to a collection of images that constitute the transformation target performance described later, that is, images that are categorized as images that are the target of the transformation process, and the second image group refers to a collection of images other than the images that constitute the transformation target performance described later, that is, images that are categorized as images that are not the target of the transformation process. The first image is an image that can be the target of transformation in the screen transformation performance and can be displayed on the performance layer 524. The first image group includes, for example, the target object 516 as the first image, and may further include the normal decorative pattern 502 and the normal reserved image 506. The second image is an image that is not the target of transformation in the screen transformation performance and is an image that is displayed on a layer other than the performance layer 524. The second image group includes, for example, the simple decorative pattern 504, the simple reserved image 507, the changing image 508, and the guide display 530 as the second image. The special first image is, for example, the transformed target object 516, and if the normal decorative pattern 502 or the normal reserved image 506 is the target of transformation in the screen transformation performance, the special first image may further include the transformed normal decorative pattern 502 and the transformed normal reserved image 506.

The performance determination means 303 selects one of a plurality of types of variation performance patterns as the variation performance pattern. The plurality of types of variation performance patterns include a variation performance pattern that is a target for the execution of the screen deformation performance in the performance process, and a variation performance pattern that is not a target for the execution of the screen deformation performance. The variation performance pattern that is a target for the execution of the screen deformation performance may be defined so that the screen deformation performance may or may not be executed depending on a separate lottery result, or may be defined so that the screen deformation performance is always executed. In this way, even if the same variation performance pattern is used, or even if the progress of the performance is the same up to a certain point, the way the performance is shown can be different depending on whether or not the screen deformation performance is executed halfway through. For example, in the case of a performance flow that develops into a super reach performance, the performance flow can be either "variation start → reach state formation → super reach performance development → no screen deformation performance during the super reach performance → super reach performance end → variation end" or "variation start → reach state formation → super reach performance development → screen deformation performance occurs during the super reach performance → super reach performance end → variation end".

The performance determination means 303 selects one of a plurality of types of preview performance patterns as the preview performance pattern. The plurality of types of preview performance patterns include preview performances that are targets for the execution of the screen deformation performance during the performance process (for example, in addition to the performance of stopping the enemy character during the super reach performance described above, a step-up preview performance that is a part of the preview performance before the reach state, etc.), and preview performances that are not targets for the execution of the screen deformation performance (for example, a preview performance pattern in which a special normal decorative pattern 502 (for example, a normal decorative pattern 502 with the letters "NEXT") is displayed, which is a part of the preview performance before the reach state and is displayed during a pseudo consecutive performance in which the normal decorative pattern 502 temporarily stops and then changes again, and a preview performance pattern in which the movable role 520 is driven after the performance of stopping the enemy character during the super reach performance described above ends, and the screen is displayed in a rainbow color). The preview performances that are targets for the execution of the screen deformation performance may be defined so that the screen deformation performance may or may not be executed depending on the result of a separate lottery, or may be defined so that the screen deformation performance is always executed. This allows the same preview performance pattern to be displayed differently depending on whether or not a screen deformation performance is performed. Note that the performance that is the target of the screen deformation performance, i.e., the pattern change performance and preview performance that may result in a screen deformation performance during the performance process, are hereinafter referred to as "transformation target performance."

The performance determination means 303 determines whether or not to execute a so-called pre-reading preview performance, which indicates in advance the high expectation that the result of the lottery will be a win when a new ball is placed in the starting hole and the reserve corresponding to the new ball is placed in the starting hole, according to the pre-determination information (pre-determination information transmitted from the main board 200 as the main control device when a new ball is placed in the starting hole). In addition, the expectation of the screen deformation performance differs depending on the state of the pre-reading preview performance (pre-reading preview). In other words, if the reserve related to the target variation is a reserve related to a variation for which the screen deformation performance is scheduled to be executed, or a reserve related to a variation for which the screen deformation performance is highly likely to be executed (more specifically, if the reserve related to the variation for which the preview performance for which the screen deformation performance is executed is executed), a pre-reading preview with a higher expectation is executed than when there is no such reserve (in the case of the reserve change performance described later, the red normal reserve image 506 is a pre-reading preview with a higher expectation than the blue normal reserve image 506). In this case, even if the performance pattern is the same, it is preferable to configure the screen deformation performance so that the expectation of a big win is higher when the screen deformation performance is executed than when the screen deformation performance is not executed. For example, it is preferable to configure the screen deformation performance so that the expectation of a big win is higher when the performance of stopping the enemy character during the super reach performance described above (the screen deformation performance is executed) is executed than when the performance of stopping the enemy character during the super reach performance is not executed (the screen deformation performance is not executed and the enemy character does not stop). The advance notice performance by the foresight is a performance (hold change performance) that suggests the expectation of a big win or the expectation of execution of the screen deformation performance by the lighting color of the normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the target variation that is the foresight target, as shown in FIG. 30, for example. This makes it possible to make the ease of execution of the screen deformation performance different depending on the type of advance notice performance, that is, the lighting color of the normal reserved image 506. For example, the screen deformation performance is more likely to be executed in the target variation that is the target of the foresight when a red normal reserved image 506 (e.g., a jackpot expectation of 50%) is displayed than a blue normal reserved image 506 (e.g., a jackpot expectation of 10%). Such a hold change presentation may be executed not only for normal hold image 506 but also for changing image 508. For example, when first normal hold image 506a moves to become changing image 508, (1) first normal hold image 506a displays a blue normal hold image 506, and changing image 508 also displays a blue normal hold image 506 (more precisely, blue changing image 508), allowing one to understand that the jackpot expectation rate of the current change is 10%, and (2) first normal hold image 506a displays a blue normal hold image 506, and changing image 508 displays a red normal hold image 506 (more precisely, red changing image 508), allowing one to understand that the jackpot expectation rate of the current change has increased from 10% to 50%. In addition, when a variation performance pattern that is the target of the screen transformation performance is selected, whether or not to execute the screen transformation performance is decided at the start of the pattern change due to that variation performance pattern, and the probability of executing the screen transformation performance differs depending on the type of look-ahead notice that has been executed up until the start of the change. As a variation example, at the time the look-ahead notice is executed (at the time the execution of the look-ahead notice is decided), the change (target change) that triggered the execution of the look-ahead notice may determine whether or not to execute the screen transformation performance.

The expectation of the screen deformation effect being executed varies depending on the state of the preview performance of the change. The change in question here means the current change, and in the case of a pre-reading preview being executed, it is the change that triggered the execution of the pre-reading preview (the target change), not the change that is executing the pre-reading preview (the change before the target). In addition, the state of the preview performance of the change in question here means the state of the preview performance (excluding the screen deformation performance) executed in the change in which the preview performance that is the target of the screen deformation performance is executed, and is not the state of the pre-reading preview, that is, it is not the state of the preview performance in the change prior to the change in which the preview performance that is the target of the screen deformation performance is executed. Note that the execution and state of the preview performance of the change in question, the execution and execution of the preview performance that is the target of the screen deformation performance, and the execution and execution of the screen deformation performance are all determined by separate lotteries at the start of the change in question. In this way, even if a change performance pattern that is the target of the screen deformation performance is selected, the screen deformation performance is not necessarily executed. For example, in a dialogue preview performance in which the dialogue of an appearing character is displayed in the form of a speech bubble (this dialogue preview performance is executed in the relevant variation at a timing prior to the execution of the preview performance that is the target of the screen transformation performance in the relevant variation), the expectation of the screen transformation performance may be higher if the color of the speech bubble is a giraffe pattern (a display mode that has a higher expectation of a jackpot than blue) than if it is blue. As a variant example, whether or not to execute the preview performance of the relevant variation and the mode thereof, whether or not to execute the preview performance that is the target of the screen transformation performance, and whether or not to execute the screen transformation performance may be determined all at once by the same lottery at the start of the relevant variation.

The presentation can be made different depending on whether or not the screen transformation performance is performed, even if the progress of the performance is the same. In addition, the expectation regarding the difference in the presentation of the performance can be made gradual by combining the performance content of the pre-reading notice and the performance content of the target change, which are performed in advance. The above-mentioned reserved change performance and dialogue notice performance can be performed in both target change and pre-target change. For example, the expectation of the execution of the screen transformation performance can be made to appear high by displaying a red normal reserved image 506 in the pre-reading notice, and then the expectation of the execution of the screen transformation performance can be made to appear low by displaying a blue dialogue balloon in the target change performance. In addition, for example, the expectation of the execution of the screen transformation performance can be made to appear low by displaying a blue normal reserved image 506 in the pre-reading notice, and then the expectation of the execution of the screen transformation performance can be made to appear high by displaying a giraffe-patterned dialogue balloon in the target change performance. In a modified example, if the series of steps from the start of execution of the look-ahead preview (the change before the target) to the target change, or the series of steps from the look-ahead preview to the timing of the execution of the screen deformation effect during the target change, are determined all at once, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the execution of the screen deformation effect from being hindered midway.

Figure 34 shows a schematic diagram of the process of the movable role presentation that is executed simultaneously with the screen transformation presentation. Figure 34 (a) shows the initial stage of the operation of the movable role 520, and Figure 34 (b) shows the movable role 520 in operation. The movable role 520 in this embodiment includes a first movable role 520a, a second movable role 520b, a third movable role 520c, and a fourth movable role 520d. The first movable role 520a is a movable decorative lamp that is embossed with the logo of the model title of this gaming machine, and by moving significantly so as to fall downward as shown in Figure 34 (b) at a predetermined timing during a predetermined presentation, it suggests in a presentational manner that there is a high probability of a jackpot. The second movable part 520b and the third movable part 520c are scissor arm-type decorative members, and as shown in Fig. 34(b), the second movable part 520b extends from the left side of the performance screen 500 to the center of the performance screen 500, and the third movable part 520c extends from the right side of the performance screen 500 to the center of the performance screen 500, thereby suggesting a high probability of winning in terms of presentation. The fourth movable part 520d is a mountain-shaped decorative lamp like a saw blade, and suggests a high probability of winning in terms of presentation by moving significantly so as to protrude upward as shown in Fig. 34(b) at a predetermined timing during a predetermined presentation. As shown in FIG. 34(b), the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple reserved image 507 are displayed at a position where visibility is not hindered even when all of the first movable part 520a, the second movable part 520b, the third movable part 520c, and the fourth movable part 520d are in operation. In addition, by configuring the movable parts not to operate, i.e., to be in their initial positions, at least at the boundary of the game (i.e., a situation where the game progress is temporarily stopped), during the operation of at least one of the movable parts among the first movable part 520a, the second movable part 520b, the third movable part 520c, and the fourth movable part 520d, it is possible to ensure more reliable visibility. In addition, as a modified example, the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple reserved image 507 may be configured to be displayed at a position where visibility is not hindered when at least one of the movable parts is in operation among the first movable part 520a, the second movable part 520b, the third movable part 520c, and the fourth movable part 520d. For example, the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple hold image 507 may be displayed in a position where their visibility is hindered when the third movable part 520c is in operation, but is not hindered when other movable parts are in operation. In such a configuration, it is preferable that the frequency at which the third movable part 520c operates is lower than the frequency at which any of the first movable part 520a, the second movable part 520b, and the fourth movable part 520d operates, and it is also preferable that the time during which the third movable part 520c operates within one fluctuation is shorter than the time during which the third movable part 520c does not operate. In such a configuration, it is more preferable that the time during which the third movable part 520c operates within one fluctuation is shorter than the time during which the third movable part 520c does not operate in all fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times).

The movable role 520 is provided near the performance display device 60 and operates in a performance manner in conjunction with the performance displayed on the performance display device 60. The presence or absence of the movement of the movable role 520 and the presence or absence of the execution of the screen deformation performance are associated so that the display of the screen deformation performance and the movement of the movable role 520 are relatively often executed simultaneously in parallel. For example, the screen deformation performance is more often executed simultaneously in parallel with the movable role 520 than other types of performances that do not involve the screen deformation performance (for example, capture performances, reversal performances, step-up notices, dialogue notices, hold change performances, group notices, and other notice performances). Also, for example, the screen deformation performance is more often accompanied by the movement of the movable role 520 than when it is not accompanied by the movement of the movable role 520. The performance control means 304 operates the movable role 520 according to the presence or absence of the movement of the movable role 520 determined by the performance determination means 303. By linking the screen transformation performance with the operation of the movable role 520 in this way, the three-dimensionality and dynamism of the performance content displayed on the performance display device 60 when executing the screen transformation performance can be further enhanced. In other words, not only is the performance content displayed to express three-dimensional and dynamic movement, but the three-dimensionality and dynamism are also produced around the performance display device 60. Conversely, in a screen transformation performance that does not involve the operation of the movable role 520, the content of the screen transformation performance itself can be made more prominent by refraining from the operation of the movable role 520. Note that, when the movable role 520 is operating and viewed from the front, the first movable role 520a, the second movable role 520b, the third movable role 520c, and the fourth movable role 520d operate to be in a position and shape that does not impede the visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504, as shown in FIG. 34.

The decorative patterns include normal decorative patterns 502 that are displayed as the main pattern on the performance display device 60 at least when the special pattern is stopped, and simple decorative patterns 504 that are displayed in a display form that is simpler than the normal decorative patterns 502 when the normal decorative patterns 502 are difficult to see. The normal decorative patterns 502 are patterns that are displayed in a larger size than the simple decorative patterns 504. The normal decorative patterns 502 are composed of three patterns, and in principle, they are stopped one by one in order after the variable display. The simple decorative patterns 504 are also composed of three patterns, but all three are stopped simultaneously after the variable display. The combinations of the stopped patterns of the simple decorative patterns 504 are the same as the combinations of the stopped patterns of the normal decorative patterns 502.

During the execution of the super reach performance, the normal decorative pattern 502 may be configured to be displayed small (alternative pattern displayed) for at least a part of the period, or the normal decorative pattern 502 may be hidden (alternative pattern may not be displayed either), but in such a situation, the simple decorative pattern 504 is always displayed in a variable manner. This simple decorative pattern 504 is displayed small in the upper right corner of the performance display device 60, and displays a variable manner while the special pattern is changing, and displays a stationary manner while the special pattern is stopped, and like the normal decorative pattern 502, the three patterns are displayed in a variable manner and stationary manner. By providing this simple decorative pattern 504, it is possible to notify that the normal decorative pattern 502 is changing (in other words, that the result of winning or losing has not been determined) even in a situation where it is desired to make the normal decorative pattern 502 small or hidden (for example, when executing a super reach performance, when a performance using a movable role is performed and the center of the performance display device 60 is hidden, etc.). In other words, it can be said that this simple decorative pattern 504 is a pattern for display guarantee (to compensate for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502). Note that, when this simple decorative pattern 504 is displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable that the variable display is always continued from the start of the special pattern's variation until the special pattern is displayed in a stopped state. In other words, even if the normal decorative pattern 502 is temporarily stopped midway (for example, when a special normal decorative pattern 502 that displays characters such as "NEXT" is temporarily stopped when executing a pseudo consecutive performance), it is preferable that the simple decorative pattern 504 is configured not to be temporarily stopped midway (for this reason, a special pattern that displays characters such as "NEXT" is not provided for the simple decorative pattern 504, and the simple decorative pattern 504 is configured in a variable manner). The easy decorative pattern 504 only performs a definite stop), and further, in order to prevent a misconception that a miss is a jackpot in the case of a miss variation, and in order to prevent a jackpot variation from being noticed in advance in the case of a jackpot variation, it is preferable to display the variation while maintaining the pattern combination that indicates a miss to the player, whether it is a miss variation or a jackpot variation (for example, if the type of simple decorative pattern 504 is "1" to "7", the variation is displayed as "123" → "234" → "345" → "456" → "567" → "671" → "712" → "123" → ...). Furthermore, when the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 start to change from a fixed state, the starting pattern combination (the first pattern combination immediately after the change starts) is a pattern combination that is one step forward from the pattern combination at the time of the fixed stop, but when the simple decorative pattern 504 starts to change from a fixed state, the starting pattern combination is a predetermined pattern combination regardless of the combination at the time of the fixed stop. For example, when the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 start to change in a situation where both the number combinations related to the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 are fixed at "243", the pattern combination that is the starting point of the normal decorative pattern 502 is "354", but the pattern combination that is the starting point of the simple decorative pattern 504 is fixed to "123", and when both the number combinations related to the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 are fixed at "333", the pattern combination that is the starting point of the normal decorative pattern 502 is "444", but the pattern combination that is the starting point of the simple decorative pattern 504 is fixed to "123". In addition to this, the simple decorative pattern 504 can have the following characteristics to clearly differentiate its role from the normal decorative pattern 502.

(1) The display area of the normal decorative pattern 502, which is easy for the player to recognize, is larger than the display area of the simple decorative pattern 504, which is used for display guarantee (to compensate for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502). This is preferable not only in a situation where the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 are fixed and stopped, or in a situation where the normal decorative pattern 502 has just formed a reach state (a reach state that has not yet developed into a super reach performance) and the simple decorative pattern 504 is being displayed in a variable manner, but also in a situation where the normal decorative pattern 502 has become a small pattern during a super reach performance, etc., and the simple decorative pattern 504 is being displayed in a variable manner.

(2) The display position of the normal decorative pattern 502 can be set to a different display position depending on whether it is the first presentation mode (e.g., normal mode, or stage A in normal mode) or the second presentation mode (e.g., rush mode, or stage B in normal mode), thereby realizing a diversity of presentations with the normal decorative pattern 502 depending on the presentation mode. On the other hand, since the simple decorative pattern 504 only needs to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, it is preferable to display it in the same position regardless of whether it is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design. Details of the presentation modes will be described later.

(3) The display mode of the normal decorative pattern 502 is different depending on whether it is the first presentation mode (e.g., normal mode, or stage A in normal mode) or the second presentation mode (e.g., rush mode, or stage B in normal mode), thereby realizing a diversity of presentations in the normal decorative pattern 502 depending on the presentation mode. For example, in the first presentation mode, the normal decorative pattern 502 is composed only of the normal decorative pattern 502 of numbers (normal decorative pattern 502 such as "1", "2", ..., "7"), and in the second presentation mode, the normal decorative pattern 502 is composed by combining the normal decorative pattern 502 of numbers with the normal decorative pattern 502 of an ally character (normal decorative pattern 502 such as "1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., "7" + "character g"). On the other hand, since the simple decorative pattern 504 only needs to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, it is preferable to configure the simple decorative pattern 504 with only the same display mode, for example, the normal decorative pattern 502 of numbers, regardless of whether the display mode is the first or second, thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design.

(4) The display area of the normal decorative pattern 502 can be varied (moved or made a small pattern) depending on the changing situation (for example, whether or not a normal reach is in progress, whether or not a super reach is in progress, etc.), thereby adding variety to the presentation of the normal decorative pattern 502. On the other hand, since it is sufficient for the simple decorative pattern 504 to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, it is preferable to not vary the display area of the simple decorative pattern 504 (not move, not made a small pattern) to avoid unnecessary development and design.

(5) The normal decorative pattern 502 can have its speed of change varied to low, medium, high, or ultra-high speed depending on the change situation (e.g., whether it is at the start of the change, in the middle of the change, or about to end, etc.), thereby providing diversity to the presentation of the normal decorative pattern 502. On the other hand, since the simple decorative pattern 504 only needs to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, it is preferable not to vary the speed of change of the simple decorative pattern 504, or to reduce the number of stages of change (e.g., only low and high speed), thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design. In addition, with regard to the direction of change, it is preferable that the normal decorative pattern 502 can change not only from top to bottom but also from bottom to top (enabling change in multiple directions), while the simple decorative pattern 504 can only change from top to bottom.

(6) The normal decorative pattern 502 is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped while the special pattern is changing, with slight fluctuations) before it is fixedly stopped (stopped at the timing when the special pattern stops), and at that time, a specific pattern that is a normal decorative pattern 502 other than a number (for example, a normal decorative pattern 502 with the word "Super" written on it, which predicts the development to a Super Reach performance) is temporarily stopped, thereby making it possible to associate the performance of the normal decorative pattern 502 with other performances. On the other hand, since the simple decorative pattern 504 only needs to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, it is preferable not to temporarily stop the simple decorative pattern 504 or to temporarily stop the specific pattern, thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design.

(7) The normal decorative pattern 502 overlaps with the display area of other preview performances (e.g., comment preview performances, step-up preview performances, etc.), that is, it is displayed in a superimposed manner. In order to use as much of the area on the performance display device 60 as possible to create a powerful performance, such superimposed display is permitted, but since the simple decorative pattern 504 plays a role in compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, it is desirable to design the display area of the simple decorative pattern 504 so that it does not overlap (does not display in a superimposed manner) with the display area of the other preview performances. However, in terms of the relationship with special preview performances that inevitably overlap (e.g., group preview performances, background preview performances, etc. displayed on the entire performance display device 60), it is preferable to set the display priority of the simple decorative pattern 504 higher than the display priority of the special preview performance (set so that the simple decorative pattern 504 is displayed in front of the special preview performance). In addition, it is desirable to ensure that the right-hit notification image (different from the image displayed during special play, the right-hit notification image for the high base state displayed during the high base state, but it may be an image common to the image during special play) is always visible to the player, so it is desirable to design it so that the display area of the simple decorative pattern 504 and the display area of the right-hit notification image do not overlap (do not display in a superimposed manner). However, when the display area of the normal decorative pattern 502 is moved or enlarged, the display area of the normal decorative pattern 502 and the display area of the right-hit notification image may overlap (display in a superimposed manner), and in that case, it is preferable to set the display priority of the normal decorative pattern 502 lower than the display priority of the right-hit notification image (set so that the normal decorative pattern 502 is displayed behind the right-hit notification image).

(8) During a special game, the normal decorative pattern 502 may be displayed only one at a time, rather than in combination. For example, if a special game is played after "777" has stopped, "7" is displayed during the special game, and if a special game is played after "222" has stopped, "2" is displayed during the special game. This allows the player to recognize which normal decorative pattern 502 has resulted in a jackpot during the special game. As a variant, only normal decorative patterns 502 corresponding to jackpots with a high degree of advantage (for example, "333", "555", "777", etc., which indicate a jackpot of 7R or more or a jackpot of 10R) may be displayed during the special game. In this way, it is desirable that the display area that displays one normal decorative pattern 502 during special play does not overlap with the other display areas during special play, which are the round display area, the right-hand hit display area, the prize ball acquisition display area, and the cumulative prize ball count display area, i.e., does not overlap with them (however, it may overlap with the highlighting display, in which case the highlighting display has a higher display priority). In addition, it is preferable that the simple decorative pattern 504 is not displayed during special play (because variable display is not performed during special play), but it may be displayed during special play. If configured in this way, it is desirable that it is configured so that it does not overlap with the other display areas during special play, which are the round display area, the right-hand hit display area, the prize ball acquisition display area, and the cumulative prize ball count display area, i.e., does not overlap with them, and it is also desirable that it does not overlap with the highlighting display.

(9) In the normal decorative pattern 502, in addition to fluctuating (e.g., moving from top to bottom), a display accompanied by a specified action may be performed when the fluctuating pattern starts, immediately after a provisional stop, after a reach is reached, during a provisional stop, etc. (the action in each situation may be referred to as an action at the start of the fluctuating pattern, an action at a provisional stop, an action at a reach is reached, or a swinging action). For example, in the case of a non-reach (when the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 are displayed as "624" at the time of the fixed stop), when the variation starts, the left, middle, and right patterns in the normal decorative pattern 502 all expand and then start to vary, then when the left pattern temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, then the "6" temporarily stops and continues to swing, then when the right pattern temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, then the "4" temporarily stops and continues to swing, then when the middle pattern temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, then the "2" temporarily stops and swings a little, then at the fixed stop timing, all the movements of the left, middle, and right patterns are terminated. In this case, the simple decorative pattern 504 does not perform any of the movements. Also, in the case of a normal reach (when the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 are displayed as "212" at the time of the final stop), when the variation starts, the left, middle, and right patterns in the normal decorative pattern 502 all expand and then begin to vary, then when the left pattern temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, then the "2" temporarily stops and then continues to swing, then when the right pattern temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, then the "2" temporarily stops and then continues to swing, then the left and right patterns rotate to notify that it is a reach, then continue to swing again, then when the middle pattern temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, then the "1" temporarily stops and swings a little, then at the final stop timing, all the movements of the left, middle, and right patterns end (the middle pattern does not rotate). In this case, the simple decorative pattern 504 does not perform any of the movements.

In addition, if the performance develops into a super reach performance (when the normal decorative pattern 502 and simple decorative pattern 504 are displayed as "232" at the time of the final stop), when the change starts, the left, middle, and right patterns in the normal decorative pattern 502 all expand and then start to change, then when the left pattern temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion and then the "2" temporarily stops and then continues to swing, then when the right pattern temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion and then the "2" temporarily stops and then continues to swing, then the left and right patterns rotate to notify that it is a reach and then continue to swing again, then the left and right patterns While the left and right patterns are swinging, the middle pattern changes (at this time, the middle pattern is expanding and swinging from top to bottom, and the left and right patterns that were not overlapping or had a small overlapping ratio before are overlapping or have a high overlapping ratio), and then the normal background changes to the reach background to execute the super reach performance, and when the super reach performance announces that it is a miss, the reach background changes to the normal background, and after the transition, the left, middle, and right patterns continue swinging for a predetermined period of time, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all of the left, middle, and right patterns end their movements (the middle pattern does not bounce or rotate). In this case, the simple decorative pattern 504 does not perform any of the movements. By configuring in this way, the normal decorative pattern 502 can be given diversity in its presentation, while the simple decorative pattern 504 only needs to play a role in compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, so it is preferable to configure the simple decorative pattern 504 so that it does not perform any particular operation, and to avoid unnecessary development and design. In addition, even during the period from when the variation stops until when the standby demo presentation is displayed, the normal decorative pattern 502 may perform a shaking operation after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, after 10 seconds) after the variation stops, but even in this situation, it is preferable that the simple decorative pattern 504 does not perform any operation. By configuring in this way, even during the game standby (pattern stop), it is possible to stimulate the desire to play, and by not performing a shaking operation of the simple decorative pattern 504, it is possible to ensure that the game is in standby. In addition, when the standby demo presentation is displayed, it is preferable that the normal decorative pattern 502 is not displayed, but the simple decorative pattern 504 continues to be displayed. In this way, it is possible to emphasize the display of the standby demo performance screen while still ensuring that the display of the stopped symbols is maintained. However, if the standby demo performance is in progress, since no game is being played, the simple decorative symbols 504 may also be hidden.

In addition, for certain symbols among the normal decorative symbols 502 (for example, the middle symbol "7"), a predetermined action may not be performed or the probability of performing the action may be lower than for other symbols. This predetermined action may be, for example, the provisional stop action (a bouncing action) described above (particularly for the middle symbol "7" after a reach is achieved). By configuring in this way, the rarity of the action for the specific symbol can be increased. In addition, when the normal decorative pattern 502 is formed by combining the normal decorative pattern 502 of a number with the normal decorative pattern 502 of an ally character (normal decorative pattern 502 such as "1" + "character a", "2" + "character b", ..., "7" + "character g"), the normal decorative pattern 502 of both the normal decorative pattern 502 of the number and the normal decorative pattern 502 of the ally character perform a swinging motion, but the swinging width (the swinging distance, for example, if swinging up and down, the distance width between the state in which the normal decorative pattern 502 is displayed at the top and the state in which it is displayed at the bottom during the swinging motion) may be made different to realize a dynamic swinging motion. In such a configuration, the swinging width of the normal decorative pattern 502 of the number may be made smaller than the swinging width of the normal decorative pattern 502 of the ally character, or the normal decorative pattern 502 of the number may not perform a swinging motion, and only the normal decorative pattern 502 of the ally character may perform a swinging motion.

The normal decorative pattern 502 is included in the image of the target object 516 in the screen transformation performance and can be the target of transformation, that is, can be included in the first image belonging to the first image group, and is displayed on the performance layer 524. On the other hand, the simple decorative pattern 504 is not included in the image of the target object 516 in the screen transformation performance and is not the target of transformation, that is, is included in the second image belonging to the second image group, while it is an object that can be included in the image showing the game status in the screen transformation performance and is displayed on the game status layer 523. Note that the movable role 520 can also be operated in a certain situation in which the screen transformation performance process is being performed including the normal decorative pattern 502 as a target (for example, a situation in which the screen transformation performance process is being performed while the normal decorative pattern 502 is fluctuating, while it is temporarily stopped, or while it is in a state in which a reach state is formed; in this situation, the image is transformed while continuously reproducing and displaying the scrolling movement of the normal decorative pattern 502 and the shaking movement at the time of the temporary stop and the formation of the reach state, rather than a still screen). When the moving part 520 is viewed from the front, the visibility of the normal decorative pattern 502 during the screen deformation performance is hindered by at least one of the first moving part 520a, the second moving part 520b, the third moving part 520c, and the fourth moving part 520d during the screen deformation performance, but the visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504 during the screen deformation performance is not hindered by any of the first moving part 520a, the second moving part 520b, the third moving part 520c, and the fourth moving part 520d during the screen deformation performance as shown in FIG. 34. As mentioned above, it may be configured to be displayed at a position where visibility is not hindered during the operation of at least one of the moving parts. In order to create a sense of unity in the screen deformation performance, the pattern change performance without the screen deformation performance and the normal decorative pattern 502 are configured to move in the same way. On the other hand, in order to easily grasp whether the pattern is currently changing or not, and if the pattern is temporarily stopped, which pattern it is temporarily stopped at, the simple decorative pattern 504 is excluded from the deformation by the screen deformation performance to ensure the visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504. In this case, the movement of the linked movable role object 520 is set to an operation mode that does not hinder the visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504, thereby more reliably ensuring the visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504. Note that the relationship between the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 may be applied to the relationship between the normal reserved image 506 (changing image 508) and the simple reserved image 507. In other words, movable prop 520 can also be operated in a specific situation in which screen deformation performance processing is being performed with normal pending image 506 (changing image 508) as the target (for example, a situation in which screen deformation performance processing is being performed while normal pending image 506 (changing image 508) is being displayed; in this situation, if normal pending image 506 (changing image 508) is displayed with a rotating animation or light-emitting animation rather than a still screen, the image will be deformed while the animation is continuously played and displayed). When the moving part 520 is viewed from the front, the visibility of the normal reserved image 506 (changing image 508) during the screen deformation performance is hindered by at least one of the first moving part 520a, the second moving part 520b, the third moving part 520c, and the fourth moving part 520d in operation, but the visibility of the simple reserved image 507 during the screen deformation performance is not hindered by any of the first moving part 520a, the second moving part 520b, the third moving part 520c, and the fourth moving part 520d in operation as shown in FIG. 34. As mentioned above, it may be configured to be displayed at a position where visibility is not hindered during the operation of at least one of the moving parts. In order to create a sense of unity in the screen deformation performance, the pattern change performance without the screen deformation performance and the normal reserved image 506 (changing image 508) are configured to move in the same way. On the other hand, in order to make it easier to know whether the pattern is currently changing, and if the pattern is temporarily stopped, which pattern it is temporarily stopped at, the visibility of the simple hold image 507 is guaranteed by excluding the simple hold image 507 from the deformation by the screen deformation performance. In this case, the operation of the linked movable role object 520 is set to an operation mode that does not impede the visibility of the simple hold image 507, thereby more reliably ensuring the visibility of the simple hold image 507.

In a screen transformation performance, regardless of the content of the frame image as the first image to be transformed, the background image 518 as the second image has the same content as the background image 518 in other screen transformation performances in which other images are transformed. For example, the common background image 518 in this embodiment is a solid black image, and is displayed on the background layer 525 in each screen transformation performance. By making the background image of each screen transformation performance a common solid black image, it is possible to suppress an increase in the display processing burden and an increase in image capacity. As mentioned above, the background image 518 may be displayed in a manner such as looping a moving image in which the word "CHANCE" flows like a caption.

When a predetermined error (for example, a door opening error or a frame opening error that occurs when a door/frame opening signal is detected, or a prize ball payout error in which the payout of prize balls stops due to a shortage of game balls or the game balls in the upper ball tray 105 and the lower ball tray 106 becoming full) occurs, the performance display device 60 displays an error warning image 536 indicating the error (indicating the occurrence of an error and the type of error). In addition, when a screen deformation performance is executed in a situation in which the error warning image 536 is displayed due to an error occurring before the execution of the screen deformation performance, the display of the error warning image 536 continues as it is. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33, the error warning image 536 is displayed on the error display layer 521 at the forefront and is not displayed on the performance layer 524, so it is not included in the target object 516, which is the frame image to be transformed, and the transformation process is not performed. This makes it possible to configure the screen deformation performance so as not to impede the execution even when an error occurs, and also to configure the error warning image 536 so as not to impede the visibility of the error warning image 536 by excluding the error warning image 536 from the target of the screen deformation performance. Even if the error warning sound is output at the maximum volume, which is the specified volume, the volume level can be adjusted (volume adjustment) through the player's operation in parallel, and the volume setting image 532 can be displayed on the volume light display layer 522 in FIG. 33 by the player's operation. Depending on the type of error (type of error warning sound) that occurs during the game, the effect sound accompanying the game progress (for example, the background music of the super reach effect and the sound effect generated with the screen deformation effect) is configured not to be output due to the priority output of the error warning sound. For example, when an error occurs during the screen deformation effect, if the error is a prize ball payout error, both the error warning sound and the effect sound are output (however, the error warning sound is output at the maximum volume, which is the specified volume, and the effect sound is output at a volume corresponding to the currently set volume level), but if it is a door opening error, only the error warning sound is output and the effect sound is not output (or the effect sound is output at a lower volume than when the prize ball payout error occurs). The types of errors are only examples. In the case of such an error occurring during gameplay, even if a screen transformation effect is executed, the volume setting image 532 is not displayed on the effect layer 524 either, and is therefore not included in the target object 516, which is the frame image to be transformed, and is not transformed. This not only makes it possible to configure the volume adjustment not to be hindered even when an error occurs, but also makes it possible to configure the volume setting image 532 not to be hindered in visibility by excluding the volume setting image 532 from the target of the screen transformation effect. The volume setting image 532 can display the currently set volume level (for example, it can display "volume level is 1", "volume level is 5", etc.), and when the volume level is adjusted by the player's operation, the display content is changed (for example, when the volume level is changed from 1 to 2, the display of "volume level is 1" is switched to the display of "volume level is 5"). Here, when volume setting image 532 is displayed by player operation while the screen transformation effect is being executed, and when further player operation is performed while the screen transformation effect is being executed and volume setting image 532 is being displayed, volume adjustment and a change in the display of volume setting image 532 is performed, volume setting image 532 while the screen transformation effect is being executed and before the display change (for example, displaying "volume level is 1") and volume setting image 532 while the screen transformation effect is being executed and after the display change (for example, displaying "volume level is 2") are both displayed in a display mode without screen transformation. In addition, if the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player immediately before the screen transformation performance is executed, and immediately after that (while the volume setting image 532 is displayed) the screen transformation performance is executed, and the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed by the player's operation while the volume setting image 532 is displayed and while the screen transformation performance is being executed, the volume setting image 532 before the screen transformation performance is executed and before the display change (for example, displaying "volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 after the screen transformation performance is executed and after the display change (for example, displaying "volume level is 2") are both displayed in a display mode without screen transformation. Note that, in order to ensure visibility, it is preferable to configure the error warning image 536 and the volume setting image so that they do not overlap (are displayed in different display areas).

As shown in FIG. 30, the performance display device 60 displays a normal reserved image 506 indicating the number of reserved balls when a reserved ball is stored. In addition, when a reserved ball corresponding to a new ball is stored, the normal reserved image 506 is not displayed suddenly, but is displayed with a gradually appearing animation (details will be described later) to indicate that a reserved ball has been stored. Even if a screen transformation performance is performed during the animation display of the normal reserved image 506, that is, between the start and completion of the animation of the normal reserved image 506 (before the display of the normal reserved image 506 is completed), the animation display is not stopped. The animation display of the normal reserved image 506 here includes not only the animation display when a normal reserved ball is generated (when a reserved ball is generated without a pre-reading notice), but also the animation display executed when the color or pattern of the normal reserved image 506 is changed as a pre-reading notice performance (for example, an animation in which the normal reserved image 506 changes color after glowing white when a reserved ball is generated, an animation in which a small character appears and casts a spell on the displayed normal reserved image 506 to change its color, etc.). However, when a screen deformation performance is being performed or during a change in which a screen deformation performance is being performed (a situation in which a screen deformation performance is scheduled to be performed in the change but the execution timing has not yet been reached), if a configuration is made such that a pre-reading notice is not executed (a lottery or decision is not made) even if a new ball is entered in order to draw attention to the screen deformation performance, if a configuration is made such that an animation display performance at the time of normal hold occurrence is not executed, the specification that does not stop the animation display when the screen deformation performance is executed is adopted only for animation display at the time of normal hold occurrence (when a hold occurs without a pre-reading notice). The animation display of the normal hold image 506 (when a hold occurs without a pre-reading notice) at the time of normal hold occurrence is, for example, a fade-in display of the normal hold image 506, an animation that appears by moving from outside the screen such as the bottom of the screen, an animation that rotates or swings, an animation that adds a color change such as flashing for a moment, an animation that expands or contracts the size for a moment, etc. Since the normal reserved image 506 is displayed on the performance layer 524, if a screen deformation performance is executed in the middle of the animation display at the time of the occurrence of the hold, the frame image including the image in the middle of the animation display may be sequentially subjected to the deformation, or the display content may be updated so as to continue the animation display of the normal reserved image 506 included in the target object 516 during the display of the screen deformation performance, i.e., during the deformation of the target object 516. In this way, even if a screen deformation performance is executed during the animation display of the normal reserved image 506 at the time of the hold occurrence, by continuing the animation display without stopping it, it is possible to prevent unnaturalness or discomfort from occurring in the flow of the performance. Note that even if the hold occurrences are consecutive and the animation display at the time of the hold occurrence is consecutive, the animation display of the normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the first ball score is not stopped, and the animation display of the normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the later ball score is executed in parallel at the same time. Therefore, depending on the timing of the hold occurrence, (1) if a previous ball is scored while the screen transformation effect is being executed, an animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the previous ball is executed while the screen transformation effect is being executed, and if a later ball is scored while the screen transformation effect and the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the previous ball are being executed, the screen transformation effect, the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the previous ball, and the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the later ball are executed simultaneously in parallel without stopping the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the previous ball; (2) if the timing to start the execution of the screen transformation effect is reached while the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the previous ball is being executed, a screen transformation effect is executed while the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the previous ball is being executed, and if a later ball is scored while the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the previous ball is being executed and the screen transformation effect is being executed, the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the previous ball is executed. (3) if a later ball is scored while the animation display of normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the earlier ball is being executed, the animation display of normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the later ball is executed while the animation display of normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the earlier ball is being executed, and if the timing to start executing the screen deformation effect is reached while the animation display of normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the earlier ball and the animation display of normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the later ball are being executed, the animation display of normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the earlier ball, the animation display of normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the later ball, and the screen deformation effect are executed simultaneously in parallel without stopping the animation display of normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the earlier ball and the animation display of normal reserved image 506 corresponding to the later ball. In any of the situations (1) to (3), even if there is a subsequent ball entry in that situation (in a situation being executed simultaneously in parallel) and that ball entry is a hold with a high probability of a jackpot (for example, a hold for which a super reach effect is scheduled to be executed, or a hold that is scheduled to become a jackpot), it is preferable not to execute the animation display that is executed when changing the color or pattern of the normal hold image 506 as a look-ahead preview effect for that hold in that situation.

In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of presentation modes, and for each presentation mode, it is determined which type of presentation, such as a pattern change presentation or a preview presentation, can be executed.
To explain the presentation modes and the contents of the presentations executed in the presentation modes in detail, for example, "normal mode", "chance mode", and "rush mode" are set as a plurality of types of presentation modes, and one of the plurality of types of presentation modes is selectively set according to the game state (or the variation pattern selection state) and the number of times the special symbol is displayed, and the variation presentation according to the set presentation mode is executed. Basically, when the game state is normal, "normal mode" is set, when the game state is time-saving state, "chance mode" is set, and when the game state is probability variable state, "rush mode" is set. When any of the presentation modes is set, a background image (background image that is the back display of the decorative symbol 61) dedicated to the presentation mode is displayed on the screen as a presentation (variation presentation) that suggests that the player is in the presentation mode, and BGM dedicated to the presentation mode is output from the speaker 108. In this way, the background image and BGM are set to be different from each other for each presentation mode, so that the player can recognize which presentation mode the player is currently in from the type of background image or BGM. Specifically, the "normal mode" has four stages: "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and the "look ahead stage". After 20 or more changes or if the Super Reach effect is missed, the player will transition from "Stage A" to "Stage B", from "Stage B" to "Stage C", and from "Stage C" to "Stage A". If the look ahead notice effect judgement results in the execution (transition) of the "look ahead stage", the player will transition from the current stage to the "look ahead stage" (the execution of the Super Reach effect is confirmed at the time of transition to the "look ahead stage", and if a jackpot is hit, a double number will be displayed in the "look ahead stage", and if a miss occurs, a number other than a double number will be displayed in the "look ahead stage", and the player will return to the stage before the transition to the "look ahead stage" at the next change). The background music (stage BGM) is different for each of "Stage A,""StageB,""StageC," and the "Prediction Stage" (it is different from the stage BGM for "Chance Mode" and the stage BGM for "Rush Mode"), but in "Stage A," the stage BGM is interrupted (ended) when the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop) for a non-reach miss (a miss that does not form a reach state, for example a scattered number such as "351") and the stage BGM is restarted from the beginning when the next fluctuation begins, and in "Stage B,""StageC," and the "Prediction Stage," the stage BGM is not interrupted (ended) even when the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop) for a non-reach miss, and the stage BGM is output continuously for the next fluctuation (the same is configured for continuous output for "Chance Mode" and "Rush Mode").

Here, pseudo consecutive performances can be executed in any of "Stage A," "Stage B," "Stage C," and the "Pre-reading Stage," but in any stage, when there is a temporary stop in the pseudo consecutive performance (when a specified pseudo consecutive pattern (for example, a pattern of the letters "NEXT") is displayed as a middle pattern changing near a specified temporary stop position and then displayed as a temporary stop), the stage BGM is not output (interrupted), and the re-changing display (a second change after the temporary stop) triggers the stage BGM to start from the beginning, or switches to a specific BGM different from the one before the re-changing display. Thereafter, when the Super Reach performance develops in "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C" or "Pre-reading Stage", the background image of each stage (the stage you were currently on) is switched to the background image of the Super Reach performance (and also switches to BGM exclusive to the Super Reach performance), and the stage BGM is not output while the Super Reach performance is being executed, and when an effect indicating a miss is displayed in the Super Reach performance, the background image of each stage is switched back to that of the stage displayed before the Super Reach performance developed within the changing display in which the Super Reach performance was executed (the background image of the stage displayed before the Super Reach performance developed); in that situation, even if the background image of the stage is displayed until the next changing display begins, the stage BGM is not output, and the BGM exclusive to the Super Reach performance is not output either (it is silent, or a specific BGM different from both the stage BGM and the BGM exclusive to the Super Reach performance is output). Therefore, even if the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop) without a reach miss, the stage BGM will not be interrupted (end), and even if it is "Stage B," "Stage C," or "Prediction Stage" where the stage BGM continues to be output for the next fluctuation (or "Stage A" where it is not), if it is a miss via the super reach performance, the stage BGM will be interrupted before the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop), and the stage BGM will start from the beginning when the next fluctuation begins.

In the "Chance Mode" and "Rush Mode", the pseudo consecutive performance is not executed. Here, a special performance that suggests that the pseudo consecutive performance will be executed (for example, a continuation line announcement, such as "It will continue!", which confirms the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance, or "Maybe it will continue?", which does not confirm the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance) is executed, suggesting that the pseudo consecutive performance (re-changing display) will be executed later, but this special performance is displayed only in "Stage A" and "Stage C", and is not displayed in "Stage B" and the "Preview Stage". In other words, by preparing both a stage where the possibility of the pseudo consecutive performance being executed can be detected in advance and a stage where it cannot be detected, and repeating the stage transition between these stages, a performance that does not tire the player is realized. In "Stage A", a special performance with a character A motif is executed, but in "Stage C", a special performance with a character B motif is executed. In addition, a pseudo consecutive confirmation effect is provided, which is different from the special effect and determines that a pseudo consecutive performance will be performed after the occurrence (for example, when character C appears, the line "Continuation confirmed!" is always displayed), and a development confirmation effect is provided, which is different from both the special effect and the pseudo consecutive performance and determines that a pseudo consecutive performance will not be performed after the occurrence and will develop into a super reach performance (for example, when character D appears, the line "Development confirmed!" is always displayed). This pseudo consecutive performance and development confirmation effect can be performed in any of "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Prediction Stage". In this way, when a pseudo consecutive performance is performed and when a pseudo consecutive performance is not performed, by displaying one or more combinations of the special effect, the pseudo consecutive performance, and the development confirmation effect, the execution expectation of the pseudo consecutive performance and the development expectation of the super reach performance can be diversified. In addition, during one change display, all of the special effects, pseudo consecutive win confirmation effects, and development confirmation effects may be executed, and in that case, during a certain re-change display (for example, the first or second re-change display), there may be a pattern in which a special effect is executed, a pattern in which a pseudo consecutive win confirmation effect is executed, and a pattern in which a development confirmation effect is executed. Here, in a pattern in which a special effect is executed during a certain re-change display (for example, the first or second re-change display), after a special effect is executed during that certain re-change display, a pseudo consecutive win confirmation effect may also be executed during that certain re-change display.

In this embodiment, different types of effects can be executed depending on which presentation mode is being executed, and the type of transformation target effect executed differs depending on the presentation mode, and the type of suggestive effect that suggests that the transformation target effect may be executed and whether or not the suggestive effect is executed differs. Also, in this embodiment, when the pseudo consecutive performance "NEXT" is displayed, the screen transformation effect is not executed (not the transformation target effect) in order to make the player aware that the pseudo consecutive performance is being executed, but this is not limited to the timing, and the screen transformation effect may be executed (it may be the transformation target effect). In that case, it is preferable to configure it so that it is less likely to become a screen transformation effect than other specified advance notice effects (for example, the effect that freezes the enemy character during the super reach performance described above, or the step-up advance notice effect that is part of the advance notice effect before the reach state is reached, etc.).

First, whether the pattern change is one in which a screen transformation effect is executed or one in which a screen transformation effect is not executed, a reach state can be formed during the pattern change. In addition, the expectation of the screen transformation effect being executed differs depending on the pattern change effect and the reach pattern effect when the pattern is in reach. Specifically, the reach pattern effect and the execution or non-execution (execution probability) of the screen transformation effect are associated so that the screen transformation effect is more likely to be executed when the pattern is in reach with a "7" than when the pattern is in reach with a "2". More specifically, when the pattern is in reach with a "7", the ratio of the screen transformation effect that stops the enemy character during the super reach effect to the effect that is not executed is 5:5, and when the pattern is in reach with a "2", the ratio of the screen transformation effect that stops the enemy character during the super reach effect to the effect that is not executed is 2:8. The screen deformation effect may be configured to make it more likely that a "7" symbol will result in a reach. For example, if a screen deformation effect is executed in a step-up preview effect and then a reach state is reached, the probability of a "7" symbol resulting in a reach is 10%, and a "2" symbol resulting in a reach is 15%. However, if a screen deformation effect is not executed in a step-up preview effect and then a reach state is reached, the probability of a "7" symbol resulting in a reach is 1%, and a "2" symbol resulting in a reach is 20%.

In the screen transformation performance, the normal decorative pattern 502 may be included in the performance layer 524 as the target object 516, but the simple decorative pattern 504 is not included in the target object 516 and may be included in the game status layer 523 as an image indicating the game status. In addition, even while the screen transformation performance is being performed, it is possible to display a volume setting image 532 for adjusting the volume and to adjust the volume in response to the player's operation.

When a screen transformation effect is executed while the volume setting image 532 is displayed before the execution of the screen transformation effect, the volume setting image 532 is not included in the frame image that is the target of the transformation, that is, the volume setting image 532 continues to be displayed on the volume light intensity display layer 522, which is a layer different from the effect layer 524, and the volume can also be adjusted by the player's operation.

Normal reserved image 506 can be subject to deformation by a screen deformation performance, but simple reserved image 507 cannot be subject to deformation by a screen deformation performance. Since movable part 520 can be operated even in a situation where a screen deformation performance that includes normal reserved image 506 as a deformation target is being performed, the visibility of simple reserved image 507 is not obstructed by movable part 520 when the movable part 520 is in operation and viewed from the front. In this case, the visibility of normal reserved image 506 may also be displayed in a manner that is not obstructed by movable part 520, or may be obstructed. Alternatively, normal reserved image 506 may not be subject to deformation by a screen deformation performance.

When a screen transformation performance is executed, a specific performance sound (sound effect) is output. Specifically, when the screen transformation performance starts (for one second from the start), a sound effect of "Piki!" is output, while the screen transformation performance is being executed (for one second from the start to one second before the end), a sound effect of "Gugugu" is output, and when the screen transformation performance ends (for one second until the end), a sound effect of "Spish!" is output. In this case, the sound effect at the start or end of the screen transformation performance is louder than the sound effect in the middle of the screen transformation performance under the same volume level in the volume adjustment (this relationship is true regardless of which volume level is set), so that the screen transformation performance can be made to have a sharp content not only visually but also aurally. Regarding the degree of deformation/ratio of the transformation target performance, unlike the volume, at the start or end of the screen transformation performance, the degree of deformation/ratio of the transformation target performance is small (if it is reduced, the reduction rate is small, and if it is four vertices are transformed, the initial position movement distance of each vertex is short) compared to before the start of the screen transformation performance, while in the middle of the screen transformation performance, the degree of deformation/ratio of the transformation target performance is large (if it is reduced, the reduction rate is large, and if it is four vertices are transformed, the initial position movement distance of each vertex is long) compared to before the start of the screen transformation performance. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a performance with a sense of surprise in which the visual and auditory sharpness are reversed. Note that the volume level in the volume adjustment has five levels, for example, and can be set to any one of levels 1 to 5 as the volume adjustment, and the performance sound corresponding to each type of performance is output at a volume corresponding to the set volume level. Here, even if the volume level is the same, the volume differs depending on the type of performance. For example, as mentioned above, the sound effect "Pikeen!" at the start of a screen transformation performance (1 second from the start) and the sound effect "Splish!" at the end of the screen transformation performance (1 second until the end) are louder than the sound effect "Gugugugu" during the screen transformation performance (1 second after the start to 1 second before the end) regardless of the volume level set (for example, at volume level 1, the sound effects "Pikeen!" and "Splish!" are 30 dB, and the sound effect "Gugugugu" is 20 dB, and at volume level 5, the sound effects "Pikeen!" and "Splish!" are 80 dB, and the sound effect "Gugugugu" is 70 dB).
As described above, the normal pending image 506 and the changing image 508 may also be displayed as included in the target object 516 as the target of transformation in the screen transformation performance.
Alternatively, as shown in the game status layer 523 of Figure 33, the normal pending image 506 and the changing image 508 may not be included in the target object 516 as the target of transformation in the screen transformation performance, but may be displayed in a separate layer, the game status layer 523.

When a specific error occurs, the performance display device 60 displays an error warning image 536 indicating the error. If an error occurs while a screen transformation performance is being executed, the error warning image 536 is not included in the frame image that is the subject of transformation, and is displayed on the error display layer 521, which is a layer different from the performance layer 524 on which the screen transformation performance is displayed.

The process of the super reach effect has a first half and a second half, and when a screen deformation effect is performed, the first half is more likely to have a red light-emitting effect, which indicates that the development to the second half, which is a so-called hidden button effect, is certain or highly anticipated. The screen deformation effect here is preferably performed before the super reach effect, for example, in the step-up notice effect before the reach state, but other than that, for example, a screen deformation effect that stops the enemy character during the super reach effect may be performed in the first half, and a red light-emitting effect that indicates the appearance of the hidden button effect may be more likely to occur in the first half. The hidden button effect is an effect in which a specific effect (here, a light-emitting effect) appears when the player operates the effect button 109 at a specified timing, even though no button image or button operation instructions are displayed on the screen, and is performed in the first half here. The light-emitting effect is an effect that changes the color of the decorative lamps 111 around the effect display device 60 and the color of the effect display simulating light (color as an image) on the effect display device 60, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of the light-emitting colors from blue to green to red (the degree of expectation of development to the latter half or the degree of expectation of a big win increases). In addition, the back button effect can also be automatically repeated by pressing and holding the effect button 109. As a modified example, if a screen deformation effect that stops the enemy character is executed in the latter half of the super reach effect rather than in the first half, when the screen deformation effect is executed in the latter half, compared to when the screen deformation effect is not executed, in the repeated pressing of the effect button 109 in the first half of the super reach effect (automatic repeated pressing is possible by pressing and holding the effect button 109), the color of the light of the decorative lamps 111 around the effect display device 60 and the color of the effect display simulating light on the effect display device 60 may be configured to be red, which suggests that the development to the latter half of the super reach effect is certain or has a high degree of expectation, rather than blue or green.

When the screen transformation effect is executed, a button image that is not a normal color (e.g., white), such as a red button image or a rainbow button image that indicates a relatively high probability of winning, is more likely to be displayed. The button image here may be a button image before the reach state or a button image during a super reach effect, and an effect other than a button image is displayed when the player actually operates the effect button 109 while this button image is displayed. For example, when a button image is displayed before the reach state and the effect button 109 is operated, a dialogue preview effect (an effect in which the expectation of a jackpot varies depending on the dialogue content and the color of the speech bubble) is displayed, and when a button image is displayed during a super reach effect (at the end of the second half) and the effect button 109 is operated, a cut-in effect (an effect in which a cut-in screen of an ally character is displayed, and an effect in which the expectation of a jackpot varies depending on the type of character displayed in the cut-in and the color of the cut-in) is executed. Here, when a non-normal color button image is displayed, it is more likely that a type of effect with a higher probability of winning (a dialogue preview effect in red rather than blue for a dialogue preview effect, or a cut-in effect in red rather than blue for a cut-in effect) will be displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 109 than when a normal color button image is displayed, rather than when a normal color button image is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, when a screen deformation effect is executed before the button image is displayed, a non-normal color button image is more likely to be displayed than a normal color button image, compared to when a screen deformation effect is not executed. Note that an effect that instructs (prompts) a player to operate by displaying a button image is referred to as an operation instruction effect (button effect).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, there is a button appearance teasing performance, which is a performance that teases whether or not the operation instruction performance (button performance) will start. In this button appearance teasing performance, a silhouette image representing the silhouette of the performance button 109 is displayed on the screen in advance, which creates a performance that makes the player expect that a button image imitating the performance button 109 will appear thereafter (i.e., the operation instruction performance will start). In this button appearance teasing performance, if the silhouette image of the performance button 109 gradually changes to a button image, the teasing is successful. On the other hand, if the silhouette image of the performance button 109 fades out from the screen in this button appearance teasing performance, the teasing is unsuccessful. Note that when a button image is displayed, it is not necessary to execute such a button appearance teasing performance, and the button image may be displayed suddenly without going through the button appearance teasing performance. Here, the button appearance teasing performance may have multiple display modes, and if configured in this way, it may be configured so that, for example, a button appearance teasing performance accompanied by a red effect is more likely to change to a button image than a button appearance teasing performance accompanied by a blue effect. As another variation, when a button appearance prompting effect is executed, it may always change to a button image. In this case, it may be configured so that a button appearance prompting effect accompanied by a red effect has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a button appearance prompting effect accompanied by a blue effect, or it may be configured so that there are multiple types of button images (such as a blue button image and a red button image, where a red button image is more likely to result in a high expectation preview effect than a blue button image; for example, a red line preview effect is more likely to be executed than a blue line preview effect), and so that a button appearance prompting effect accompanied by a red effect becomes a more specific button image (for example, a red button image) than a button appearance prompting effect accompanied by a blue effect. In the case where the button appearance prompting effect is always changed to a button image when it is executed, other than the above, it may be configured so that a long-term (e.g., 4 seconds) button appearance prompting effect has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a short-term (e.g., 2 seconds) button appearance prompting effect, or a long-term (e.g., 4 seconds) button appearance prompting effect may be configured to have a specific button image (e.g., a red button image) than a short-term (e.g., 2 seconds) button appearance prompting effect. In addition, when multiple types of display modes of the button appearance prompting effect are provided, it may be configured so that a button appearance prompting effect with a higher expectation is more likely to be executed in the latter half of the variable display (a specific timing after the reach) than in the first half of the variable display (a specific timing before the reach), or it may be configured so that the button appearance prompting effect is not executed in the first half of the variable display (a specific timing before the reach), and only the latter half of the variable display (a specific timing after the reach) can be executed.

During the execution of the operation instruction performance, an operation effective period (input effective time) during which the operation of the performance button 109 is effective is set. The operation effective period is the period during which the operation of the performance button 109 is effectively accepted when the performance button 109 is operated. "Effectively accepting the operation of the performance button 109" means that when the performance button 109 is operated, the operation of the performance button 109 is effectively accepted by the sub-board 300, and a predetermined process is performed based on the effective operation. The predetermined process corresponds to a process of proceeding with the dialogue preview performance triggered by the operation of the performance button 109. During this operation effective period, the performance button 109 (the LED element built into the performance button 109) is illuminated, and a button image imitating the performance button 109 and an indicator image visually indicating the remaining period of the operation effective period are displayed on the screen to notify that the operation of the performance button 109 is effective or to prompt the user to input an operation. In addition, a ring-shaped effect image (referred to as a "specific image") that emits sparks is displayed around the button image on the screen. This specific image gradually expands as the effective operation period elapses. If the effect button 109 is operated during the effective operation period, the effect progresses to a dialogue preview effect. When the effect button 109 is operated, the display mode of the specific image is forcibly changed to the final display mode. The final display mode of the specific image is the display mode when the specific image is displayed at its maximum enlargement. This operation instruction effect (button effect) is an effect (button effect pattern A) in which the specific image is displayed while the button image and indicator image are displayed (during the effective operation period), but other button effects (button effects other than the operation instruction effect) in this embodiment are effects (button effect pattern B) in which the specific image is not displayed while the button image and indicator image are displayed (during the effective operation period).

In the dialogue preview performance, when one of the multiple characters (the aforementioned ally characters and enemy characters) appears and utters a specific line, a specific image is continuously displayed around the character in the final display mode. In this dialogue preview performance, the expected probability of a big win is suggested according to the display mode (display color) of the line uttered by the character. In this embodiment, three types of display colors for the lines are set: "blue", "red", and "giraffe pattern", and the expected probability of a big win increases by one step in the order of "blue" < "red" < "giraffe pattern". When the dialogue preview performance starts (when the performance button 109 is operated), the button image and indicator image are hidden, but the specific image is continuously displayed. As a modified example of this embodiment, the dialogue preview performance may be configured as a step-up type performance. This step-up effect divides the display process of the preview effect into multiple stages, and the number of stages displayed is variable, so that the greater the number of stages, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. In this embodiment, this is an evolving type of effect in which the performance mode (characters and lines) changes stepwise according to a predetermined order, and suggests or notifies the high expectation of a jackpot according to the number of stages that evolve. For example, the step-up effect may be configured with two performance steps (Step Up 1, Step Up 2), and the performance mode (characters and lines) displayed in Step Up 1, the first performance step, may be different from the performance mode (characters and lines) displayed in Step Up 2, the second performance step.

The flow of the performance is as follows:
(A) When the button appearance prompting performance starts, a silhouette image showing the silhouette of the performance button 109 is displayed on the screen. When this silhouette image gradually changes into a button image and the prompting is successful, the operation instruction performance starts.
(B) When the operation instruction performance is started, the operation valid period of the performance button 109 is set, the performance button 109 is illuminated, and a button image imitating the performance button 109 and an indicator image visually indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period are displayed on the screen. In addition, a specific image (effect image) in the shape of a ring emitting sparks is displayed around the button image. Such a display encourages the user to operate the performance button 109 within the button operation valid period.
(C) As the button operation valid period elapses, the display mode (remaining period) of the indicator image changes, and the specific image is enlarged and displayed around the button image. At this time, if the effect button 109 is operated within the operation valid period, the operation instruction effect is switched to the dialogue preview effect. At this time, the button image and the indicator image are hidden. Meanwhile, the effect image is forcibly changed to the final display mode and continues to be displayed as it is.
(D) When the line preview performance starts, a character and the line "This is your big chance" are displayed on the screen, and the color of the line indicates the likelihood of a big win. A specific image is continuously displayed around the character and line in the final display mode. By displaying the specific image across the operation instruction performance and the line preview performance in this way, it is possible to indicate to the player that the line preview performance will occur when the performance button 109 is operated (it is suggested that the current button performance is a line preview performance).

As a modified example of the above embodiment, the execution of the button appearance prompting effect may be determined by lottery, and the probability of winning in the variable display may be relatively higher when the button appearance prompting effect is executed than when the button appearance prompting effect is not executed. The longer the execution time of the button appearance prompting effect (the display time of the silhouette image) is, the higher the probability of winning in the variable display may be, or a highly accurate effect indicating whether or not a win has occurred may be generated by the button operation. In that case, when the dialogue preview effect (button appearance prompting effect) is executed at the timing of the win/loss branch (a specific timing after the reach, which is the latter half of the variable display described above), it is preferable that the performance time of the button appearance prompting effect (the display time of the silhouette image) is set to a longer time than the effective operation period of the effect button 109. Conversely to this configuration, the performance time of the button appearance prompting effect (the display time of the silhouette image) may be set to a shorter time than the effective operation period of the effect button 109. As another modification, a plurality of display modes (e.g., blue button image, red button image, rainbow button image, large button image, small button image, etc.) may be prepared as the display mode of the button image. In that case, the execution possibility of the button appearance teasing performance and the performance time when it is executed may be made different according to the display mode of the button image to be executed thereafter. As a further modification, the line preview performance may be executed (button image may be displayed) even during one or more variable displays (pre-reading variable displays that are variations before the target) before the operation reserved ball of the pre-reading target is consumed, and the possibility of the button appearance teasing performance being executed during the execution of the pre-reading variable display may be lower than the possibility of the variable display (the relevant variable display) when the operation reserved ball of the pre-reading target is consumed, or the possibility of the button appearance teasing performance with a high expectation (such as the button appearance teasing performance with the red effect as described above or the button appearance teasing performance for a long time (e.g., 4 seconds)) being executed may be lower than the possibility of the variable display (the relevant variable display) when the operation reserved ball of the pre-reading target is consumed during the execution of the pre-reading variable display. As another variation, in the case where the button appearance prompting performance is not executed in the first half of the variable display (a predetermined timing before the reach) (or a button appearance prompting performance with a low expectation is executed without executing a button appearance prompting performance with a high expectation) and the button appearance prompting performance is executed in the second half of the variable display (a specific timing after the reach) (or a button appearance prompting performance with a high expectation is executed instead of a button appearance prompting performance with a low expectation), the expectation of a big win may be increased the longer the period between the predetermined timing before the reach, which is the first half of the variable display, and the specific timing after the reach, which is the second half of the variable display (for example, 90 seconds rather than 60 seconds), or the button image at the specific timing after the reach, which is the second half of the variable display, is likely to be an image with a high expectation (for example, a red button image rather than a blue button image). Also, the button presentation pattern A may be used in the first half of the variable display (a predetermined timing before the reach), and the button presentation pattern B may be used in the second half of the variable display (a specific timing after the reach). In addition, although details will be described later, timing for displaying a button image at a predetermined timing before the reach, which is the first half of the changing display, may start from the start of the changing display, and timing for displaying a button image at a specific timing after the reach, which is the second half of the changing display, may start from the start of a specific presentation (normal reach presentation or super reach presentation), and the timing for displaying a button image at a specific timing after the reach, which is the second half of the changing display, may be configured to be longer than the timing for displaying a button image at a predetermined timing before the reach, which is the first half of the changing display.

A screen deformation effect may be executed as a preview effect by looking ahead. In such a configuration, the screen deformation effect is not executed from the pattern change being executed at the new ball entry timing, which is the look-ahead timing, but from the next change (the next change after the change with the new ball entry). Specifically, in the change with the new ball entry, the pattern change is normal (the screen does not deform and the normal decorative pattern 502 changes), and immediately after the start of the next change (for example, 0.5 seconds after the start of the change), the pattern change is also normal (the screen does not deform and the normal decorative pattern 502 changes), but from then on, the pattern change continues after the screen deformation effect is executed until the middle of the target change that was the subject of the look-ahead (for example, 10 seconds after the start of the target change). The pattern change after the screen deformation effect is executed is, for example, the change display of the normal decorative pattern 502 when the screen is tilted or reduced. As mentioned above, in the case of a target change that is the subject of a pre-read, the screen deformation effect continues until halfway through, after which it switches to the normal pattern change effect. Note that it switches at least until it develops into a Super Reach effect. Even if a power outage or other power abnormality occurs in the change before the target that is partway through a screen deformation effect that continues across multiple pattern change effects, and the power is restored from that outage, as a general rule, the original screen deformation effect will not be restored in the change before the target. However, the screen deformation effect may be executed again in the case of a target change that is the subject of a pre-read.

If an error occurs before the screen transformation performance is executed, causing the performance before transformation that should be displayed in the frame image to be transformed to not start, the screen transformation performance will not be executed even when it is time to start the performance before transformation. For example, this is the case when a malfunction occurs in the timer that measures the timing of the performance using the timing means 307 of the sub-board 300, causing the performance before transformation that should be displayed in the frame image to be transformed to not start. As a variant, even if the performance before transformation does not start due to a malfunction of the timer, the screen transformation performance may be executed with only the background performance being displayed as the target of transformation.

The standby demo screen is displayed on the presentation layer 524, but is not subject to transformation by the screen transformation presentation. In a modified example, the standby demo screen may be displayed on the game status layer 523.

When the screen transformation effect is to be executed in response to the player's operation of the effect button 109, the timing at which the screen transformation effect starts to be executed depends on the timing at which the effect button 109 is started to be operated. Note that the button image is also displayed on the effect layer 524, but is not subject to transformation by the screen transformation effect, and the screen transformation effect is executed after the effect button 109 is operated and the button image is erased. In a modified example, the button image may be displayed on the game status layer 523. In a further modified example, if the timing to display the button image is reached during the execution of the screen transformation effect, the button image may also be subject to (transformation target) for the screen transformation effect, and the effect displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 109 while the button image is displayed may also be subject to (transformation target) for the screen transformation effect. In addition, when a button image begins to be displayed while a screen transformation effect is being executed, if the timing at which the display of the button image ends is earlier than the timing at which the execution of the screen transformation effect ends, the button image will be displayed as a screen transformation effect from its start to its end, but if the timing at which the display of the button image ends is later than the timing at which the execution of the screen transformation effect ends, the button image will be displayed as a screen transformation effect from its start to a middle point, and then displayed in the normal form (without transformation) until the end. The same is true for the effect that is displayed when the effect button 109 is operated while the button image is displayed; if an effect that is displayed when the effect button 109 is operated while the button image is displayed starts to be displayed while a screen transformation effect is being executed, and if the display end timing of the effect that is displayed when the effect button 109 is operated while the button image is displayed is earlier than the end timing of the execution of the screen transformation effect, the effect that is displayed when the effect button 109 is operated while the button image is displayed will be displayed as a screen transformation effect from the start to the end of its display, but if the display end timing of the effect that is displayed when the effect button 109 is operated while the button image is displayed is later than the end timing of the execution of the screen transformation effect, the effect that is displayed when the effect button 109 is operated while the button image is displayed will be displayed as a screen transformation effect from the start to the middle of its display, and will then be displayed in the normal mode (without transformation) until the end.

When a screen transformation effect is being executed, even if a hold corresponding to a new ball is generated and the advance information corresponding to that hold is information that allows a look-ahead preview effect to be executed (for example, a hold with a high expectancy that allows a super reach effect to be executed, or a hold that will result in a jackpot), the execution of the look-ahead preview effect is restricted. For example, while the screen transformation effect is being executed, control may be exercised so that a look-ahead preview effect triggered by a new ball is not executed, or control may be exercised so that look-ahead itself is not executed.

When a screen transformation performance is executed, the simple decorative pattern 504 is displayed in a form that is included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523 that is not the target of transformation in the screen transformation performance. Therefore, the simple decorative pattern 504 that was displayed in a position within the performance screen 500, i.e., in a position overlapping with the framed image 514, before the start of the screen transformation performance, may be displayed outside the framed image 514, for example, in a position overlapping with the frame image 510 which is the special first image or the background image 518 which is the second image, when the framed image 514 is reduced in the screen transformation performance (such a display relationship is established at a predetermined timing (e.g., the middle) during the execution of the screen transformation performance). On the other hand, the normal decorative pattern 502 is not included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523 in the screen transformation performance, but may be included in the frame image that is the target of transformation in the performance layer 524. Therefore, in the screen transformation performance, the normal decorative pattern 502 may be displayed in a position overlapping the framed image 514, which is the special first image, but not in a position overlapping the background image 518, which is the second image. It is preferable that such a display relationship is always satisfied while the screen transformation performance is being performed, but as a modified example, such a display relationship may be achieved at least at a predetermined timing (e.g., the middle) during the execution of the screen transformation performance (if it is not the predetermined timing, it may be displayed in a position overlapping the background image 518). In addition, as another modified example, the normal decorative pattern 502 may also be displayed in a form that is included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523.

When a screen transformation effect is executed, the simple pending image 507 is displayed in a form that is included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523, which is not the target of transformation in the screen transformation effect. On the other hand, the normal pending image 506 is not included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523 in the screen transformation effect, but may be included in a frame image that is the target of transformation in the effect layer 524. As a variant example, the normal pending image 506 may also be displayed in a form that is included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523.

As described above, in addition to the normal decorative pattern 502 changing (e.g., moving from top to bottom), when the pattern starts to change, immediately after a temporary stop, after a reach is reached, during a temporary stop, etc., if the pattern is configured to be displayed with a specified action (action at the start of the change, action at the temporary stop, action at the reach is reached, swinging action), a further specified action may be configured to be executable, such as a jackpot action in which the pattern is enlarged when three patterns are lined up to form a jackpot pattern combination, such as "777". In such a configuration, it is preferable that the screen deformation effect is not executed when a jackpot action is executed, but that the screen deformation effect is executed when other specified actions are executed, and it is also preferable that the jackpot action is not executed while the screen deformation effect is being executed, but that other specified actions are executed.

If a new hold occurs while a screen transformation effect is being executed, the normal pending image 506 may be included in the target of transformation by the screen transformation effect, or the normal pending image 506 may not be included in the target of transformation by the screen transformation effect. In the case of a change that develops into a Super Reach effect, this is preferably the specification for the period of change leading up to the development into a Super Reach effect. Since the normal pending image 506 is not displayed while the Super Reach effect is being displayed, in either case, when a screen transformation effect is executed for a Super Reach effect, it is not included in the target of transformation by the screen transformation effect. Note that the duration of the process of transforming the frame image in the screen transformation effect (i.e. the execution period of the screen transformation effect) is set to be longer than the time of the animation display when the hold occurs, regardless of the effect that is the target of transformation.

When a hold is stored during a normal performance, the performance display device 60 displays a normal hold image 506 indicating the number of holds. The normal hold image 506 corresponding to the lottery value at which the pattern change display has started is switched to a changing image 508 indicating that the pattern is changing. Here, while the screen transformation performance is being performed, the normal hold image 506 is hidden, while the changing image 508 continues to be displayed. The frame still performance, which is one of the screen transformation performances, is a performance in which the performance that has been displayed up until that point is stopped as if it were paused, and the frame image, which is a still image, is transformed, and since it is preferable from a performance standpoint to not include an image with movement in the frame image, the normal hold image 506 is hidden. On the other hand, the changing image 508 does not increase or decrease during the pattern change, so it continues to be displayed as it is even during the execution of the screen transformation performance. In a modified example, the changing image 508 may also be hidden during the execution of the screen transformation performance.

The simple hold image 507 continues to be displayed while the screen transformation performance is being performed. As a result, even if a new hold occurs while the screen transformation performance is being performed, the normal hold image 506 is not additionally displayed, but the number of holds shown in the simple hold image 507 is increased without disrupting the screen transformation performance.

When executing a still-in-frame performance, which is one of the screen transformation performances, the normal hold image 506 may be included in the frame image, which is a still image in which the performance that was displayed up until that point is frozen as if paused. If an animation display was being executed when the hold occurred, that animation display is also included in the frame image in a still state. The display of the changing image 508 may also be included in the frame image, and that animation display is also included in the frame image in a still state. Note that while the screen transformation performance is being executed, the simple hold image 507 continues to be displayed. As a result, even if a new hold occurs while the screen transformation performance is being executed, no additional normal hold image 506 is displayed, but the number of holds shown in the simple hold image 507 is increased without impeding the screen transformation performance.

When executing a still-in-frame effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, the normal decorative pattern 502 may be hidden without being included in the frame image, which is a still image in which the effect that was displayed up until that point is stopped as if it were a paused display. On the other hand, the simple decorative pattern 504 continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Note that the time during which the effect is stilled in the screen transformation effect is longer than the time it takes for the simple decorative pattern 504 to change one revolution (for example, as mentioned above, if the type of the simple decorative pattern 504 is "1" to "7", and the display changes as follows, "123" → "234" → "345" → "456" → "567" → "671" → "712" → "123" → ..., one revolution is from the first "123" to the next "123"). In this way, if it is possible to recognize that the simple decorative pattern 504 makes at least one revolution during the screen transformation effect, it is possible to distinguish whether the current game situation is paused or truly stopped (the game is not progressing).

Also, unlike configuration 32, when executing a still-in-frame performance, which is one of the screen transformation performances, the normal decorative pattern 502 may be included in a frame image, which is a still image that freezes the performance that has been displayed up until that point, as if it were paused, but in that case, the normal decorative pattern 502 is a fixed display. In other words, the normal decorative pattern 502 does not display a variable display or an animation display. On the other hand, the simple decorative pattern 504 continues to display a variable display. Note that the still time of the performance in the screen transformation performance is longer than the time it takes for the simple decorative pattern 504 to change one cycle (for example, as mentioned above, if the type of simple decorative pattern 504 is "1" to "7", and the display changes as follows, "123" → "234" → "345" → "456" → "567" → "671" → "712" → "123" → ..., one cycle is from the first "123" to the time when the next "123" is displayed). In this way, if it can be recognized that the simple decorative pattern 504 rotates at least once during the screen transformation performance, it is possible to distinguish whether the current game situation is paused or has actually stopped (the game is not progressing).

In a still-framed effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, a still image in which the effect that has been displayed is made to freeze as if in a paused state may be included in the target object 516 as the still-framed image 514, and the stillness and color inversion may be processed simultaneously, or the transformation process may be performed simultaneously. However, while a still-framed effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, is being executed, it is also possible to execute an still-framed effect in which a frame image, which is a still image in which the effect is made to freeze as if in a paused state, is the subject of transformation, but the transformation process is not started while the effect is frozen.
Even during the screen transformation performance, the volume setting image 532 can be displayed and the volume can be adjusted.
When a screen transformation effect is executed under the condition that the volume setting image 532 is displayed before the occurrence of the screen transformation effect, the display of the volume setting image 532 continues as is, and in parallel, the volume can also be adjusted through operation by the player.

If a screen transformation performance is performed under a situation where an error warning image 536 is displayed due to an error occurring before the execution of the screen transformation performance, the display of the error warning image 536 continues as is. Note that even if the error warning sound is output at the maximum volume, which is the specified volume, the volume can be adjusted in parallel through the player's operation, and the volume setting image 532 can be displayed on the volume light display layer 522 in FIG. 33. However, the volume setting image 532 is not included in the target of transformation in the screen transformation performance. More specifically, if the volume setting image 532 is displayed by the player's operation during the execution of the screen transformation performance, and the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed by the player's operation during the execution of the screen transformation performance and while the volume setting image 532 is displayed, the volume setting image 532 during the execution of the screen transformation performance and before the display change (for example, the display of "volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 during the execution of the screen transformation performance and after the display change (for example, the display of "volume level is 2") are both displayed in a display mode without screen transformation. In addition, if the volume setting image 532 is displayed by a player operation immediately before the screen transformation effect is executed, and the screen transformation effect is executed immediately thereafter (while the volume setting image 532 is displayed), and the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed by the player operation while the volume setting image 532 is displayed and while the screen transformation effect is being executed, the volume setting image 532 before the screen transformation effect is executed and before the display change (for example, displaying "volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 after the screen transformation effect is executed and after the display change (for example, displaying "volume level is 2") are both displayed in a display mode without screen transformation.

When a still frame effect (such as pausing the effect that was displayed up until that point), which is one of the screen transformation effects, is executed during the animated display of normal hold image 506 when a hold occurs, if the display of normal hold image 506 is to be maintained, the animated display of normal hold image 506 may be stopped (i.e., the display of normal hold image 506 continues, but is displayed without animation). The animated display of normal hold image 506 here refers to the animated display when a normal hold occurs, and does not include displays that change the color or pattern of normal hold image 506 as a preview preview effect.

In a screen transformation effect, when a frame image of a video that was displayed up until that point (a single frame image frozen as in a paused display in the case of a still-framed effect, or multiple frame images switched sequentially in the case of a video-in-framed effect) is the subject of color inversion (subject to transformation), a volume setting image 532 can be displayed even during color inversion, and volume adjustment via operation by the player is possible in parallel. Note that in subsequent "color inversions," both the frame image frozen as in a paused display in a still-framed effect, and the multiple frame images switched sequentially in a video-in-framed effect, are subject to color inversion processing.
In a situation where a volume setting image 532 is displayed before color inversion is performed, even if color inversion is subsequently performed, the display of the volume setting image 532 continues as is, and in parallel, the volume can also be adjusted through operation by the player.
In a situation where an error occurs before color inversion and the error warning image 536 is displayed, even if color inversion is subsequently performed, the display of the error warning image 536 continues as is. Even if the error warning sound is output at the maximum volume, which is the specified volume, the volume can be adjusted in parallel through an operation by the player, and the volume setting image 532 can be displayed on the volume light amount display layer 522 in FIG. 33. However, the volume setting image 532 is not subject to color inversion. More specifically, when the volume setting image 532 is displayed by a player operation during color inversion, and the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed by a further player operation during color inversion and while the volume setting image 532 is being displayed, the volume setting image 532 during color inversion and before the display change (for example, display of "volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 during color inversion and after the display change (for example, display of "volume level is 2") are both displayed in a display mode that is not color inverted. In addition, if the volume setting image 532 is displayed by a player operation immediately before color inversion is performed, and then color inversion is performed immediately thereafter (while the volume setting image 532 is being displayed), and the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed by a player operation while the volume setting image 532 is being displayed and the color inversion is being performed, the volume setting image 532 before the color inversion is performed and before the display change (for example, displaying "volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 after the color inversion is performed and the display change (for example, displaying "volume level is 2") are both displayed in a non-color inverted display mode.
When color inversion is performed during the animation display of normal hold image 506 when a hold occurs, if the display of normal hold image 506 is to be maintained, the animation display of normal hold image 506 may be stopped (i.e., the display of normal hold image 506 continues, but is displayed without animation). The animation display of normal hold image 506 here refers to the animation display when a normal hold occurs, and excludes displays that change the color or pattern of normal hold image 506 as a preview preview performance.

FIG. 35 shows a schematic diagram of a plurality of buffer areas obtained by dividing a frame buffer.
The performance display control means 305 includes a frame buffer 338 that temporarily stores frame images that constitute a moving image to be displayed on the performance display device 60. The frame buffer 338 is divided to include five buffer areas, a first buffer area 540, a second buffer area 542, a third buffer area 544, a fourth buffer area 546, and a fifth buffer area 548, each of which has a capacity capable of storing a frame image.
In a presentation pattern that executes a screen transformation presentation, for example, three buffer areas, namely, a first buffer area 540, a second buffer area 542, and a third buffer area 544, are used.

FIG. 36 shows a schematic diagram of the relationship between the display size of a frame image and the capacity of a frame buffer area.
The frame buffer 338 of this embodiment includes at least a first buffer area 540 having a capacity capable of storing a frame image of a first display size that exceeds the screen area size of the performance display device 60, and a second buffer area 542 that is an area different from the first buffer area 540 and has a capacity capable of storing a frame image of a second display size that is the same as or smaller than the screen area size of the performance display device 60. As shown in FIG. 36, the first buffer area 540 has a capacity capable of storing an image of the target object 516 (i.e., the above-mentioned "frame image of the first display size"). The second buffer area 542 has a capacity capable of storing the framed image 514 (i.e., the above-mentioned "frame image of the second display size"), but is not capable of storing the entire target object 516. When the image of the target object 516 is displayed and controlled at 100% size, the display size exceeds the screen area size of the performance display device 60, and mainly the frame image 510 is outside the screen area, so that only the frame image 514 is actually displayed on the performance display device 60 so that it can be seen by the player. In other words, when the target object 516 is displayed and controlled at 100% size, most of the frame image 510 is not displayed on the performance display device 60, or even if it is partially displayed, it is hidden by the center decoration 64 and is almost difficult to see by the player. When displaying at least a performance that can be the target of the screen deformation performance, the first buffer area 540 is used as a frame buffer, and when displaying a performance that is not the target of the screen deformation performance, the second buffer area 542 is used as a frame buffer. The multiple types of performance patterns include a first special performance pattern in which a performance that can be the target of the screen deformation performance is determined, and a second special performance pattern in which a performance that is not the target of the screen deformation performance is determined.

As shown in FIG. 35, the third buffer area 544, the fourth buffer area 546, and the fifth buffer area 548 also have the same capacity as the second buffer area 542, and have the capacity to store the framed image 514, but not the entire target object 516. In this way, the first buffer area 540 is the only buffer area that can store the target object 516 including the frame image 510, and the other buffer areas are limited to a level where they cannot store the target object 516 but can store the framed image 514. As a result, even if the frame buffer 338 does not necessarily have an abundant data capacity, five buffer areas can be secured by limiting the capacity of each buffer area to the minimum necessary. This also makes it possible to avoid contention in the use of buffer areas in the drawing process, suppress the processing burden, and efficiently diversify the presentation.

The first special effect pattern is a performance pattern in which the first buffer area 540 is used as a frame buffer, and a new frame image is generated in sequence by synthesizing an image obtained by deforming a frame image of a first display size stored in the first buffer area 540 at a predetermined timing so that the image can be displayed within the screen area of the performance display device 60, an image showing a game status, and a background image, and the new frame image is stored in the first buffer area 540, thereby displaying a moving image on the performance display device 60. The second special effect pattern is a performance pattern in which the second buffer area 542 is used as a frame buffer, and a new frame image is generated in sequence by synthesizing an image obtained by deforming a frame image of a second display size stored in the second buffer area 542 at a predetermined timing, an image showing a game status, and a background image, and the new frame image is stored in the second buffer area 542, thereby displaying a moving image on the performance display device 60, and a second special effect different from the first special effect is defined.
For each of the plurality of types of special effect patterns, it is determined which of the plurality of buffer areas is to be used as a frame buffer.

For example, the first special effect pattern uses the first buffer area 540, the second special effect pattern uses the second buffer area 542, and the third special effect pattern uses the third buffer area 544 and the fourth buffer area 546. In this way, it is possible to define a plurality of types of special effect patterns that use different buffer areas according to the size of the frame image to be transformed by the screen transformation effect, and it is possible to provide diversity in the effects while maintaining the efficiency of the drawing process and the utilization efficiency of the frame buffer 338.
There may be multiple types of special effect patterns that use overlapping buffer areas, such as the fourth special effect pattern being determined to use the first buffer area 540 like the first special effect pattern, and the fifth special effect pattern being determined to use the second buffer area 542 like the second special effect pattern.
The first special effect pattern and the second special effect pattern are not executed simultaneously in parallel (by design, they are not executed within the same fluctuation, or even if they are executed within the same fluctuation, the execution timings do not overlap). The fourth special effect pattern and the fifth special effect pattern are also not executed simultaneously in parallel (by design, they are not executed within the same fluctuation, or even if they are executed within the same fluctuation, the execution timings do not overlap). The third special effect pattern is not executed simultaneously in parallel with the first special effect pattern, the second special effect pattern, the fourth special effect pattern, and the fifth special effect pattern (by design, they are not executed within the same fluctuation, or even if they are executed within the same fluctuation, the execution timings do not overlap).

For multiple special effect patterns that are scheduled to be displayed simultaneously (design-wise executable within the same variation, and execution timing may overlap within the same variation), it is specified that different buffer areas are used for each. However, for multiple special effect patterns that are not scheduled to be displayed simultaneously (design-wise not executed within the same variation, or execution timing may not overlap even if executed within the same variation), if it is decided to display a performance by one special effect pattern while displaying a performance by the other special effect pattern, the performance by the other special effect pattern that was determined later is displayed with priority over the performance by the one special effect pattern that was displayed earlier. For example, if the first special effect pattern and the fourth special effect pattern that use the same first buffer area 540 are executed simultaneously in parallel, the performance of the special effect pattern that was executed earlier is stopped, and the performance of the special effect pattern that was commanded later is started with priority. Similarly, if the second special effect pattern and the fifth special effect pattern, which use the same second buffer area 542, are executed simultaneously in parallel, the execution of the special effect pattern that was executed first is stopped, and the execution of the special effect pattern commanded later is started as a priority.

Here, "stop the execution of the special effect pattern that was executed earlier" may be a process of canceling the execution of the screen deformation effect that was executed up to that point and returning to the playback of the video image before the screen deformation effect was started. This makes it possible to avoid processing problems in advance when the buffer area to be used conflicts, even if the number of special effect patterns to be transformed by the screen deformation effect is increased. In addition, even if the screen deformation effects overlap, normal image processing can be maintained and the burden on image processing can be reduced by switching between the cancellation of the screen deformation effect and the effect to be prioritized. In addition, as a modified example, the design may be configured so that multiple types of special effect patterns that use the same buffer area are executed simultaneously in parallel (that is, they may be designed to be executed simultaneously in parallel in advance). In such a case, for example, when the first special effect pattern and the fourth special effect pattern that use the same first buffer area 540 are executed simultaneously in parallel, the execution of the special effect pattern that was executed earlier is stopped, and the effect of the special effect pattern commanded later is started with priority. Similarly, when a second special effect pattern and a fifth special effect pattern that use the same second buffer area 542 are executed simultaneously in parallel, the execution of the special effect pattern that was executed first is stopped, and the execution of the special effect pattern that was commanded later is started as a priority.

Figure 37 shows a schematic diagram of the process of transforming a frame image stored in a buffer area. First, at a predetermined timing when the screen transformation performance is started, a frame image stored in the first buffer area 540 of the frame buffer 338 is read into the drawing memory 334 (S900). This frame image is a target object 516 including a frame image 514 and a frame image 510, and is one frame of the moving image that has been displayed up until that point. This frame image is read into the drawing memory 334 and transformed, and the frame image that follows the moving image that has been displayed up until that point is the frame image that was originally to be displayed, but from now on, a new frame image that will be generated by the transformation process and the synthesis process will be displayed in place of that frame image. Therefore, in the still frame performance, the enemy character included in the content of this frame image, which has been displayed in motion up until that point, becomes still in this frame image, so that it becomes like a captured image of the moving image. In the case of the moving image performance within the frame, the frame images read into the drawing memory 334 are sequentially switched, and the enemy character included in the content of those frame images is displayed in motion.

At the time when the target object 516 is stored in the first buffer area 540 and displayed on the performance display device 60, the frame image 510 is located outside the screen area of the performance display device 60, and is in a state where it is not substantially visible to the player, or where only a small part is visible. The target object 516 is reduced (S902) so that the frame image 510 fits within the screen area of the performance display device 60, thereby making the entire target object 516 visible. For convenience, in this figure, the size of the target object 516 in S10 is set to 100%, and in S12, the target object 516 is reduced to approximately 80%. However, in the actual drawing process of a moving image, instead of instantaneously switching from 100% to 80%, it is a gradual reduction process in which microscopically, drawing is repeated by reducing the size by, for example, 1% each time a new frame image is generated. The foreground image 517 and the background image 518 are superimposed on the target object 516 thus reduced (S904). In this diagram, an example of a foreground image 517 is shown in which a lightning-shaped object is overlaid on the foreground of the target object 516, but other images showing the game status, such as simple decorative pattern 504 and simple hold image 507, are also overlaid on the foreground while updating their content for each frame image. The images overlaid in S14 are combined to form the next frame image 519 (S906), and are written into the first buffer area 540 to become the next frame image that will make up the moving image.

The target object 516 of S14 is gradually deformed when drawing the subsequent frame images. For example, the target object 516 of S14 is color-inverted, another foreground image 517 is overlaid on the image (S908), and an image showing the game status such as the updated simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple reserve image 507 and a background image 518 are overlaid, and these overlaid images are synthesized to form a new frame image 519 (S910), which is written into the first buffer area 540 to become the next frame image that constitutes the moving image. Thereafter, the target object 516 is sequentially deformed for each subsequent frame image, and the foreground image 517 and background image 518 are overlaid, and an image showing the game status such as the updated simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple reserve image 507 is overlaid (S912), and thus a new frame image is synthesized to form the moving image.

In the first and fourth special effect patterns, a main image portion having a display size equal to the screen area size of the effect display device 60 and a frame image 510 formed to surround the outer periphery of the main image portion constitute one effect image, and a moving image is displayed on the effect display device 60 by sequentially generating new frame images in which an image showing the game status and an image in which the display ratio and shape of the effect image are changed so that at least a part of the frame image 510 located outside the screen area of the effect display device 60 can be displayed within the screen area of the effect display device 60. In this way, when the screen deformation effect is performed, the frame image 510, which is normally difficult to see, is intentionally made visible while being deformed by enlarging/shrinking or swaying, thereby making it possible to create an even more dynamic effect. If the frame image 510 is to be displayed in the normal reserved image 506, the image including the normal reserved image 506 may be deformed by the screen deformation effect.

The second special effect pattern, the third special effect pattern, and the fifth special effect pattern are produced by constructing a single effect image with a main image portion having a display size equal to the screen area size of the effect display device 60, and displaying a moving image on the effect display device 60 by sequentially generating new frame images that combine an image in which the display ratio and shape of the effect image have been changed with an image showing the game status.
In the second special effect pattern, the third special effect pattern, and the fifth special effect pattern, the frame image 510 is not displayed. Note that the frame image 510 is not displayed under specific circumstances such as during a standby demo screen or a jackpot.

Figure 38 shows an example screen of the third special effect pattern. The third special effect pattern is an effect involving a screen transformation effect in which the timing of the transformation is determined by the operation input of the effect button 109. In the third special effect pattern, a button image 550 is displayed at a predetermined timing, prompting the player to operate the effect button 109. When the player operates the effect button 109, the frame image is transformed by the screen transformation effect. The button image 550 is displayed multiple times, and each time the effect button 109 is operated in accordance with the button image 550, the frame image is transformed by the screen transformation effect.

In the third special effect pattern, when the effect button 109 is operated, new frame images are generated in sequence by synthesizing an image obtained by modifying the frame image at the timing of the operation input with an image showing the game status, and the new frame images are stored in the first buffer area 540, causing a moving image to be displayed on the effect display device 60. Furthermore, when the effect button 109 is operated, new frame images are generated in sequence by synthesizing an image obtained by modifying the frame image stored in the first buffer area 540 at the timing of the operation input with an image showing the game status, and the new frame images are stored in the second buffer area 542, causing a moving image to be displayed on the effect display device 60.

Figure 39 shows a schematic diagram of the process of using the buffer areas in the third special effect pattern. In the third special effect pattern, frame images are stored alternately in the third buffer area 544 and the fourth buffer area 546 each time the player operates the effect button 109. That is, frame images of the currently displayed moving image are stored sequentially in the third buffer area 544, and the button image 550 is displayed at a predetermined timing (S920). When the player operates the button image 550, a frame image is read from the third buffer area 544 (S922), an image is generated with deformation added by the screen deformation effect (S924), and the image is stored in the fourth buffer area 546 as the next frame image (S926). Frame images of the moving image are stored sequentially in the fourth buffer area 546, and the button image 550 is displayed again at a predetermined timing.

When the player operates the button image 550, a frame image is read from the fourth buffer area 546 (S928), an image with deformation due to the screen deformation effect is generated (S930), and the image is stored in the third buffer area 544 as the next frame image (S932). Frame images of the moving image are stored sequentially in the third buffer area 544, and the button image 550 is displayed again at a predetermined timing. When the player operates the button image 550, a frame image is read from the third buffer area 544 (S934), an image with deformation due to the screen deformation effect is generated (S936), and the image is stored in the fourth buffer area 546 as the next frame image (S938). Frame images of the moving image are stored sequentially in the fourth buffer area 546.

In this way, the third buffer area 544 and the fourth buffer area 546 are alternately used to repeatedly store frame images that have been moved little by little. This allows the player to clearly see the progress and display of effects that must be visually recognized by the player when a screen transformation effect is executed, such as the effect button 109 and images showing the game status, while still maintaining the sense of dynamism, thereby achieving both a sense of dynamism in the effect and visibility of the performance progress. Furthermore, when executing effects that place a high processing load, such as repeated screen transformation effects, the buffer area can be divided into multiple areas and processed alternately, distributing the processing load and avoiding malfunctions.

In the third special effect pattern, the button image 550 is not included in the target of transformation by the screen transformation effect.
The sixth special effect pattern may further be included. The effect by the sixth special effect pattern is not subject to the transformation by the screen transformation effect, but includes an effect state as if the screen transformation effect was executed. However, since it is not a screen transformation effect, both the first display element and the second display element are operated in a dramatic manner, but it is not a dramatic operation in which the first display element and the second display element are completely synchronized like the screen transformation effect, but is a dramatic operation in which the first display element and the second display element are not synchronized (for example, the first display element is a background display, and the second display element is a normal decorative pattern 502 or a display object specific to that effect, etc.).

During the execution of the special game in this embodiment, a count-up effect can be executed on the screen of the effect display device 60, which counts up the total number of prize balls based on the detection of a ball entering the large prize opening in the special game (for example, if the number of prize balls currently acquired is "2000" and there are 15 prize balls, the effect of counting up by one, such as 2000 → 2001 → 2002 → ... 2015). In addition, when the number of prize balls on the display displayed in the count-up reaches a specific number, a highlight display can be executed to emphasize that the specific number has been reached (for example, when the number of prize balls on the display displayed in the count-up reaches 2500, a display of "2500" is displayed larger than the number of prize balls on the display displayed in the count-up). For these effects and displays, the specifications described below may be adopted. When the large prize opening 20 is opened in one unit game, it is closed when nine game balls enter (the number of prize balls for one ball entering is "15"). In this way, the number of game balls that is the end condition for a unit game (the condition for closing the large prize opening 20) is called the specified count number.

(1) When an over-winning (a ball that exceeds the specified count) occurs while a count-up effect corresponding to the entry of game balls within a specified count number (particularly a count-up effect corresponding to the ninth count, which is the specified count number) is being performed and the count-up of 15 balls has not yet been completed, it is desirable to configure the count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning to start after all count-up effects that have not yet completed the count-up of 15 balls have been completed (after 15 balls have been counted). Here, if the over-winning is detected just before the end of the interval period (the pause time from when the end of each unit game is set until the setting of the next unit game or end demo is started), the count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning will overlap with the execution period of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period has elapsed). However, even if a ball enters the large winning opening 20 during the execution of the count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning that is executed during the execution of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period has elapsed), if the ball enters while the count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning is being executed and the count-up of 15 balls has not yet been completed, it is preferable that the count-up effect corresponding to the ball entering the large winning opening 20 in the next round will start after the count-up effect that has not yet completed the count-up of 15 balls has been completed (after the count-up of 15 balls has been completed).

(2) The time required to count up one prize ball (the time required to count up from "N" to "N+1") is set to "0.03 seconds", that is, the count up is performed in increments of "0.03 seconds". The execution time of the count up performance is derived by multiplying the time required to count up one prize ball by the value of the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) awarded when one game ball enters the large prize opening 20, and the execution time of the count up performance is "15 (unit number of prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count up interval) = 0.45 seconds". However, even if a special game is being played, the count up performance is configured not to be executed during the execution of the start demo and the end demo. In addition, the execution time of the count up performance is set to be shorter than the interval time (also called the "interval period") set after the end of each unit game. The interval time is a waiting time set between each unit game or between the final unit game and the end demo, and is the unit game waiting time or end demo waiting time during which the large prize winning opening 20 is kept closed from the start of its closing operation, and is set to "2 seconds" for all round games. In addition, by configuring the count-up performance time (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the interval time (2 seconds), even if a count-up performance is performed based on a game ball entering the large prize winning opening 20 just before the end of a certain unit game, the count-up performance will be completed within the interval time after the end of the unit game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the count-up performance will be performed beyond the interval period and extend to the next unit game or the end demo (if an over-winning occurs, the interval period may be exceeded), and the division between each unit game or the division between the final unit game and the end demo can be clearly defined.

(3) The count-up presentation time is set to be shorter than the execution time of the end demo. As mentioned above, the count-up presentation time is set to "0.45 seconds." The execution time of the end demo is set to "20 seconds" for all jackpot types (performance during jackpot). The execution time of the end demo is the waiting time from the time when the interval time after the end of the final unit game in the special game has elapsed until the special game ends. In other words, the execution time of the end demo does not include the interval time set after the end of the final unit game. That is, the interval time after the end of the final unit game is set as the remaining time (grace time) of the unit game during which the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 20 may be effectively detected (i.e., detected as a target for prize ball payout, not determined as illegal entry), but the execution time of the end demo is set as a preparation time for a game (presentation mode) after the end of a special game separated from the unit game during which the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 20 may not be effectively detected. By configuring the count-up presentation time (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the execution time of the end demo (20 seconds), even if the count-up presentation is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 20 just before the end of the final unit game, or even if an over-entry occurs in the final unit game, or even after the closing of the large prize opening 20 after the final unit game (even during the end demo period), if the count-up presentation is performed, the count-up presentation will be completed within the end demo period. This means that the count-up effect will not extend beyond the end demo period and into the variable display after the special game ends, making it possible to clearly distinguish between the end of the special game and the start of the variable display for the first spin.

(4) When a specified number of game balls enter the jackpot opening 20 in one unit game, the total time of the count-up presentation for the specified number of counts in this one unit game (the count-up presentation for the number of prize balls that can be won in one unit game) is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo. Specifically, the total time of the count-up presentation for the specified number of counts is "0.45 seconds (count-up presentation time) x 10 balls (specified count number) = 4.5 seconds." Meanwhile, as mentioned above, the execution time of the jackpot end demo is set to "20 seconds" common to all jackpot types (presentations during jackpot). In this embodiment, the total time of the count-up performance for the specified count number (4.5 seconds) is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo (20 seconds). Therefore, even if multiple count-up performances are performed consecutively based on multiple game balls entering the jackpot entry port 20 in succession just before the end of the final unit game, or even if the count-up performance is performed after the jackpot entry port 20 is closed after the final unit game (even during the jackpot end demo period), the count-up performance will be completed within the jackpot end demo period. Therefore, the count-up performance will not be performed beyond the jackpot end demo period and before the variable display after the special game ends, and the division between the end of the special game and the start of the variable display for the first rotation can be clearly defined.

<Types of scoring conditions>
The states relating to the ease of scoring a ball into the second starting hole 12 include a low base state (also called the "normal game state") which is a normal state of ease of scoring a ball (a state where it is not easy to score a ball), and a high base state which is a state where the ease of scoring a ball is higher than that in the low base state. The high base state is one aspect of the "specific game state" and the "easy to score a ball state".

The specific game control means 270 can set the game state to either a low base state or a high base state.
(1) Low base state In the low base state, which is a state where it is not easy to score a ball (non-time-saving state), when the normal symbol lottery (also called the "opening lottery") is won and the normal symbol is displayed in a winning state, a short opening of 0.1 seconds is executed to open the normal electric device 90. As a modified example, in the low base state, all the normal symbol lotteries may be lost and the normal electric device 90 may not be opened.
(2) High Base State In the high base state, when the normal symbol lottery is won and the normal symbol is displayed in a stopped state in a winning manner, a long opening of 5 seconds is executed to open the normal electric device 90.

<Change performance settings (custom function for frequency of pre-reading performance)>
The effect setting change, which changes the execution frequency of a predetermined look-ahead effect, can be executed by the player by operating the effect button 109 or the cross key 110. This effect setting change is a so-called custom function that allows the player to freely change the settings of various effects according to their preferences.
For example, if a player changes the setting to relatively lower the frequency of the pre-reading effects, the occurrence rate of the pre-reading effects will decrease when the pre-determination result is neither a big win nor a small win. In this case, the occurrence rate of the pre-reading effects when the pre-determination result is a big win or a small win will not necessarily be reduced, so the proportion of the limited pre-reading effects that are big wins or small wins will ultimately increase, and the expectation of special games with the pre-reading effects will increase. Hereinafter, such a performance mode that increases the expectation by lowering the frequency of the pre-reading effects will be referred to as a "pre-reading chance mode."

Figure 40 shows an example of a guide screen for the custom function. Figure 40 (a) is an example of the first custom guide screen, Figure 40 (b) is an example of the second custom guide screen, and Figure 40 (c) is an example of the standby demo screen. When 5 seconds have passed since the pattern change stopped in a non-playing state, the first custom guide is displayed. The first custom guide displays that the performance setting can be changed by pressing the performance button 109, but does not display how to adjust the volume or light intensity. Note that the display of the first custom guide is semi-transparent, so that the decorative pattern can be seen even if it is overlapped with the display of the first custom guide. In addition, by pressing the performance button 109 while the first custom guide is displayed, it is possible to execute the actual machine custom function (change of performance setting).

After the first custom guide is displayed, if 70 seconds have passed in a non-playing state, i.e., 75 seconds have passed since the non-playing period began, the second custom guide is displayed. In addition to the display mode of the first custom guide, the second custom guide displays a volume adjustment guide image and a light intensity adjustment guide image at the bottom of the display area, i.e., below the first custom guide. The second custom guide is translucent, just like the first custom guide.

After the second custom guide is displayed, if 165 seconds have passed in the non-play state, i.e., 240 seconds have passed since the non-play period began, the standby demo screen is displayed. In the standby demo screen, the first and second custom guide displays are erased, and a story display, etc., is displayed. Note that the standby demo screen is not semi-transparent, and is configured so that when the standby demo screen display and the decorative pattern are displayed overlapping, the decorative pattern is not visible or is difficult to see (the display area of the decorative pattern display is smaller than that of the standby demo screen display, the decorative pattern display is displayed in a layer behind the standby demo screen display, etc.). Note that, if the volume adjustment prohibition flag is on, the second custom guide is configured so that no display related to the on adjustment is displayed.

Figure 41 shows an example of a screen for changing the pre-reading chance mode. Figure 41 (a) is an example of a screen for selecting the target for which settings are to be changed by changing the effect settings. The player can switch the target for which settings are to be changed by pressing the up or down button on the directional pad 110. The example shown in the figure shows a state in which "pre-reading chance mode" is displayed as a target for setting changes. When the player presses the effect button 109 in this state, the selection of "pre-reading chance mode" is confirmed.

Figure 41 (b) is an example of a screen for setting the "pre-reading chance mode" on and off. The player can switch the "pre-reading chance mode" on and off by pressing the left and right buttons of the cross key 110. When the player presses the performance button 109 in this state, the on and off setting of the "pre-reading chance mode" is confirmed. It is possible to display the change screen for the pre-reading chance mode not only when the fluctuation is stopped (waiting to play) but also when the fluctuation is in progress, and the player can switch the target for which the setting is to be changed by pressing the up and down buttons of the cross key 110, and the "pre-reading chance mode" can be switched on and off by pressing the left and right buttons of the cross key 110. It is possible to configure the configuration so that, when the fluctuation is in progress, the on and off setting is confirmed at the time when the "pre-reading chance mode" is switched on and off by pressing the left and right buttons of the cross key 110 without the need to press the performance button 109. In addition, a cross key dedicated to customizing effects that is different from the cross key for adjusting the volume and light intensity may be provided, and if configured in this way, it will be possible to switch the "preview chance mode" on and off while adjusting the volume and light intensity.

Note that even if you set the frequency of pre-reading effects to be low, the performance stage or background image will not change. The only difference in appearance with a setting that increases the frequency of pre-reading effects is, for example, whether or not a custom name is displayed on the edge of the screen. Performance settings can be changed not only while waiting to play, but also while the patterns are changing (however, excluding reach performances such as Super Reach).

When a look-ahead effect such as a hold change effect is being executed, a look-ahead effect in progress flag is turned on, indicating that a look-ahead effect is being executed. A hold change effect is an effect in which a change in the hold lamp image indicates that the preliminary judgment result of a new ball entry corresponds to a high expectation effect. The look-ahead effect in progress flag that has been turned on remains on until the end of the pattern change corresponding to the hold that was the subject of the hold change effect.

While the look-ahead performance flag is on, even if a new ball is entered into the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12, the execution of a normal look-ahead performance based on the advance information related to the new ball is restricted. For example, while the look-ahead performance flag is on, the advance information related to the new ball entered into the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12 may not be read out, the advance information may be read out but the determination of whether or not a high expectation performance based on the advance information can be made, or the determination of whether or not a high expectation performance related to a new ball is executed may be made but the execution of a new look-ahead performance based on the result of the determination may be restricted. This is because if multiple look-ahead performances are executed at the same time, the reliability of the look-ahead performance displayed first may be lost, or the expectation of the look-ahead performance executed later may be higher. In this case, it is assumed that the player will ignore the look-ahead performance executed earlier and expect the look-ahead performance executed later, and will deliberately interrupt the game.

<Special pre-reading effect when the ball goes in>
The ball-entering special pre-reading effect is a pre-reading effect that suggests a high expectation of a special game immediately after a ball is entered if the advance information related to the ball entry corresponds to a predetermined result (big win or small win). The ball-entering special pre-reading effect outputs a loud notification sound when a new ball is entered into the first start hole 11 or the second start hole 12, and executes a winning flashing effect (also called a "winning flash") that causes the decorative lamp 111 to emit intense light. The ball-entering special pre-reading effect is different from the normal pre-reading effect that is executed at a predetermined timing based on the start of the pattern change effect, and is executed at the timing when a new ball is entered into the first start hole 11 or the second start hole 12, so that it is realized in a way that takes you by surprise at a timing unrelated to the pattern change effect being executed.

In the embodiment, the special look-ahead presentation mode that can execute the special look-ahead presentation when the ball is scored can be turned on or off, i.e., whether or not the special look-ahead presentation when the ball is scored can be set to the player's preference by changing the presentation settings. The player can execute the special look-ahead presentation mode by operating the presentation button 109 or the cross key 110 to change the presentation settings. Such a presentation mode that allows the execution of the special look-ahead presentation when the ball is scored is hereinafter referred to as the "goal-scoring pre-reading mode."

Figure 42 shows an example of a screen for changing the scoring pre-reading mode. Figure 42 (a) is an example of a screen for selecting the target for which settings are to be changed by changing the effect settings. The player can switch the target for which settings are to be changed by pressing the up or down button on the directional pad 110. The example in the figure shows the state in which "scoring pre-reading mode" is displayed as the target for setting changes. When the player presses the effect button 109 in this state, the selection of "scoring pre-reading mode" is confirmed.

Figure 42 (b) is an example of a screen for setting the "goal-reading mode" on and off. The player can switch the "goal-reading mode" on and off by pressing the left and right buttons of the cross key 110. When the player presses the effect button 109 in this state, the on and off setting of the "goal-reading mode" is confirmed. It is possible to display the change screen for the goal-reading mode not only when the fluctuation is stopped (waiting to play) but also when the fluctuation is in progress, and the player can switch the target for which the setting is to be changed by pressing the up and down buttons of the cross key 110, and the "goal-reading mode" can be switched on and off by pressing the left and right buttons of the cross key 110. It is possible to configure the configuration so that, when the fluctuation is in progress, the on and off setting is confirmed at the time when the "goal-reading mode" is switched on and off by pressing the left and right buttons of the cross key 110 without the need to press the effect button 109. In addition, a cross key dedicated to customizing effects that is different from the cross key for adjusting the volume and light intensity may be provided, and if configured in this way, it will be possible to switch the "ball entry pre-reading mode" on and off while adjusting the volume and light intensity.

The probability of a big hit or small hit occurring when the special ball-entering special pre-reading effect is executed may be set to 100%, or may be set to less than 100%. If it is set to less than 100%, it may be executed even when a ball enters the jackpot that does not actually correspond to a big hit or small hit. Also, even if the special pre-reading effect mode is set to on, the special ball-entering special pre-reading effect may not be executed even if a ball enters the jackpot that corresponds to a big hit or small hit.

<Changes to stage background and production settings>
43 shows the relationship between the presence or absence of a stage background image and the possibility of changing the presentation settings. In a low base state, a stage background image corresponding to the current presentation stage can be displayed, including during a normal reach presentation (normal reach period 670). In the normal reach period 670, in which a stage background image corresponding to the current presentation stage before the development into a predetermined high expectation reach presentation (for example, a so-called super reach presentation) is displayed, presentation settings can be changed according to the player's operational input.

On the other hand, if the performance develops into a specified high expectation reach performance, the stage background image is hidden during the developed high expectation reach performance (Super Reach period 672). While the stage background image is hidden after the performance develops into a specified high expectation reach performance, the performance settings cannot be changed. When a Super Reach performance or the like is being executed, the video of the Super Reach performance is preferentially displayed on the entire screen in place of the stage background image corresponding to the current performance stage, and no performance setting changes are made so as not to interfere with the Super Reach performance.

In addition, during the specific period (stop display period 674) during which the stage background image is displayed after the development into a specified high-expectation reach performance, the execution of performance setting changes is restricted. The stop display period 674 is the period during which, if the Super Reach performance ends with a miss, the screen goes black, returns to the normal stage background image, and the special symbol is displayed still. The stop display period 674 is the display period for the stage background image from the end of the Super Reach to the stopping of the special symbol, but no performance setting changes are executed, and even if the player operates the cross key 110 during this period to instruct a performance setting change, the performance setting change will not be reflected in the performance until the next change.

Note that even during periods when it is not possible to change the presentation settings, the player can press the cross key 110 to display the presentation setting change screen and can give instructions to change the presentation settings, but the change in presentation settings will not actually be reflected until the next change. Note that during periods when it is not possible to change the presentation settings, the configuration may be such that even if the player presses the cross key 110, the presentation setting change screen will not be displayed and it is not possible to give instructions to change the presentation settings.

In a modified example, the effect setting change can be executed even during the execution of a special game (during the execution of a unit game). However, when a player achieves 10 or 20 consecutive jackpots (a consecutive win), a video congratulating the player on the achievement can be displayed. In this case, in order to draw attention to the congratulatory video, the effect setting change cannot be executed while the congratulatory video is being displayed, as this is an invalid period. Also, if the effect setting change is already being executed when the invalid period for the effect setting change is reached, the effect setting change screen may be made invisible and the effect setting change may be forcibly executed. For example, if the moment the cursor is positioned to input "Yes" on a screen that displays "Do you want to execute the effect setting change?", and the game progresses to a super reach effect, "Yes" may be forcibly selected and the effect setting change may be reflected.

The decorative patterns include normal decorative patterns that are displayed as the main patterns on the performance display device 60 at least when the special patterns are stopped, and simple decorative patterns that are displayed in a display form that is simpler than the normal decorative patterns at least when the normal decorative patterns are difficult to see. The normal decorative patterns are patterns that are displayed in a larger size than the simple decorative patterns. The normal decorative patterns are composed of three patterns, and in principle, they are stopped one by one in order after the variable display. The simple decorative patterns are also composed of three patterns, but all three are stopped simultaneously after the variable display. The combinations of the stopped patterns of the simple decorative patterns are the same as the combinations of the stopped patterns of the normal decorative patterns.

It is also possible to display a button image that resembles the effect button 109. This button image is displayed as a button image before the reach state or as a button image during the super reach effect, and when the player actually operates the effect button 109 while this button image is displayed, an effect other than the button image is displayed. For example, when a button image is displayed before the reach state and the effect button 109 is operated, a line preview effect (an effect in which the expectation of a jackpot varies depending on the content of the lines and the color of the speech bubble) is displayed, and when a button image is displayed during the super reach effect (the end of the second half) and the effect button 109 is operated, a cut-in effect (an effect in which a cut-in screen of an ally character is displayed, and the expectation of a jackpot varies depending on the type of character displayed in the cut-in and the color of the cut-in) is executed. Here, when a button image that is not in a normal color is displayed, it is more likely that an effect with a higher expectation of a jackpot (a line preview effect in red rather than blue for a line preview effect, and a cut-in effect in red rather than blue for a cut-in effect) will be displayed when the effect button 109 is operated. In addition, the effect of displaying a button image to instruct (encourage) the player to perform an operation is referred to as an operation instruction effect (button effect).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, there is a button appearance teasing performance, which is a performance that teases whether or not the operation instruction performance (button performance) will start. In this button appearance teasing performance, a silhouette image representing the silhouette of the performance button 109 is displayed on the screen in advance, which creates a performance that makes the player expect that a button image imitating the performance button 109 will appear thereafter (i.e., the operation instruction performance will start). In this button appearance teasing performance, if the silhouette image of the performance button 109 gradually changes to a button image, the teasing is successful. On the other hand, if the silhouette image of the performance button 109 fades out from the screen in this button appearance teasing performance, the teasing is unsuccessful. Note that when a button image is displayed, it is not necessary to execute such a button appearance teasing performance, and the button image may be displayed suddenly without going through the button appearance teasing performance. Here, the button appearance teasing performance may have multiple display modes, and if configured in this way, it may be configured so that, for example, a button appearance teasing performance accompanied by a red effect is more likely to change to a button image than a button appearance teasing performance accompanied by a blue effect. As another variation, when a button appearance prompting effect is executed, it may always change to a button image. In this case, it may be configured so that a button appearance prompting effect accompanied by a red effect has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a button appearance prompting effect accompanied by a blue effect, or it may be configured so that there are multiple types of button images (such as a blue button image and a red button image, where a red button image is more likely to result in a high expectation preview effect than a blue button image; for example, a red line preview effect is more likely to be executed than a blue line preview effect), and so that a button appearance prompting effect accompanied by a red effect becomes a more specific button image (for example, a red button image) than a button appearance prompting effect accompanied by a blue effect. In the case where the button appearance prompting effect is always changed to a button image when it is executed, other than the above, it may be configured so that a long-term (e.g., 4 seconds) button appearance prompting effect has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a short-term (e.g., 2 seconds) button appearance prompting effect, or a long-term (e.g., 4 seconds) button appearance prompting effect may be configured to have a specific button image (e.g., a red button image) than a short-term (e.g., 2 seconds) button appearance prompting effect. In addition, when multiple types of display modes of the button appearance prompting effect are provided, it may be configured so that a button appearance prompting effect with a higher expectation is more likely to be executed in the latter half of the variable display (a specific timing after the reach) than in the first half of the variable display (a specific timing before the reach), or it may be configured so that the button appearance prompting effect is not executed in the first half of the variable display (a specific timing before the reach), and only the latter half of the variable display (a specific timing after the reach) can be executed.

During the execution of the operation instruction performance, an operation effective period (input effective time) during which the operation of the performance button 109 is effective is set. The operation effective period is the period during which the operation of the performance button 109 is effectively accepted when the performance button 109 is operated. "Effectively accepting the operation of the performance button 109" means that when the performance button 109 is operated, the operation of the performance button 109 is effectively accepted by the sub-board 300, and a predetermined process is performed based on the effective operation. The predetermined process corresponds to a process of proceeding with the dialogue preview performance triggered by the operation of the performance button 109. During this operation effective period, the performance button 109 (the LED element built into the performance button 109) is illuminated, and a button image imitating the performance button 109 and an indicator image visually indicating the remaining period of the operation effective period are displayed on the screen to notify that the operation of the performance button 109 is effective or to prompt the user to input an operation. In addition, a ring-shaped effect image (referred to as a "specific image") that emits sparks is displayed around the button image on the screen. This specific image gradually expands as the effective operation period elapses. If the effect button 109 is operated during the effective operation period, the effect progresses to a dialogue preview effect. When the effect button 109 is operated, the display mode of the specific image is forcibly changed to the final display mode. The final display mode of the specific image is the display mode when the specific image is displayed at its maximum enlargement. This operation instruction effect (button effect) is an effect (button effect pattern A) in which the specific image is displayed while the button image and indicator image are displayed (during the effective operation period), but other button effects (button effects other than the operation instruction effect) in this embodiment are effects (button effect pattern B) in which the specific image is not displayed while the button image and indicator image are displayed (during the effective operation period).

In the dialogue preview performance, when one of the multiple characters (the aforementioned ally characters and enemy characters) appears and utters a specific line, a specific image is continuously displayed around the character in the final display mode. In this dialogue preview performance, the expected probability of a big win is suggested according to the display mode (display color) of the line uttered by the character. In this embodiment, three types of display colors for the lines are set: "blue", "red", and "giraffe pattern", and the expected probability of a big win increases by one step in the order of "blue" < "red" < "giraffe pattern". When the dialogue preview performance starts (when the performance button 109 is operated), the button image and indicator image are hidden, but the specific image is continuously displayed. As a modified example of this embodiment, the dialogue preview performance may be configured as a step-up type performance. This step-up effect divides the display process of the preview effect into multiple stages, and the number of stages displayed is variable, so that the greater the number of stages, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. In this embodiment, this is an evolving type of effect in which the performance mode (characters and lines) changes stepwise according to a predetermined order, and suggests or notifies the high expectation of a jackpot according to the number of stages that evolve. For example, the step-up effect may be configured with two performance steps (Step Up 1, Step Up 2), and the performance mode (characters and lines) displayed in Step Up 1, the first performance step, may be different from the performance mode (characters and lines) displayed in Step Up 2, the second performance step.

The flow of the performance is as follows:
(A) When the button appearance prompting performance starts, a silhouette image showing the silhouette of the performance button 109 is displayed on the screen. When this silhouette image gradually changes into a button image and the prompting is successful, the operation instruction performance starts.
(B) When the operation instruction performance is started, the operation valid period of the performance button 109 is set, the performance button 109 is illuminated, and a button image imitating the performance button 109 and an indicator image visually indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period are displayed on the screen. In addition, a specific image (effect image) in the shape of a ring emitting sparks is displayed around the button image. Such a display encourages the user to operate the performance button 109 within the button operation valid period.
(C) As the button operation valid period elapses, the display mode (remaining period) of the indicator image changes, and the specific image is enlarged and displayed around the button image. At this time, if the effect button 109 is operated within the operation valid period, the operation instruction effect is switched to the dialogue preview effect. At this time, the button image and the indicator image are hidden. Meanwhile, the effect image is forcibly changed to the final display mode and continues to be displayed as it is.
(D) When the line preview performance starts, a character and the line "This is your big chance" are displayed on the screen, and the color of the line indicates the likelihood of a big win. A specific image is continuously displayed around the character and line in the final display mode. By displaying the specific image across the operation instruction performance and the line preview performance in this way, it is possible to indicate to the player that the line preview performance will occur when the performance button 109 is operated (it is suggested that the current button performance is a line preview performance).

As a modified example of the above embodiment, the execution of the button appearance prompting effect may be determined by lottery, and the probability of winning in the variable display may be relatively higher when the button appearance prompting effect is executed than when the button appearance prompting effect is not executed. The longer the execution time of the button appearance prompting effect (the display time of the silhouette image) is, the higher the probability of winning in the variable display may be, or a highly accurate effect indicating whether or not a win has occurred may be generated by the button operation. In that case, when the dialogue preview effect (button appearance prompting effect) is executed at the timing of the win/loss branch (a specific timing after the reach, which is the latter half of the variable display described above), it is preferable that the performance time of the button appearance prompting effect (the display time of the silhouette image) is set to a longer time than the effective operation period of the effect button 109. Conversely to this configuration, the performance time of the button appearance prompting effect (the display time of the silhouette image) may be set to a shorter time than the effective operation period of the effect button 109. As another variation, multiple types of display modes for the button images (for example, blue button images, red button images, rainbow button images, large button images, small button images, etc.) may be prepared. In that case, the possibility of executing the button appearance teasing effect and the duration of the effect if executed may be varied depending on the display mode of the button image that is scheduled to be executed subsequently.

As a further variation, the dialogue preview effect can be executed (a button image can be displayed) even during one or more variable displays before the pending activation ball that is the pre-reading target is consumed (a pre-reading variable display that is a variable before the target), and the likelihood of a button appearance teasing effect being executed can be lower during the execution of the pre-reading variable display than during the execution of the variable display when the pending activation ball that is the pre-reading target is consumed (the relevant variable display), and the likelihood of a high-expectation button appearance teasing effect (such as a button appearance teasing effect accompanied by a red effect as described above or a long-lasting (for example, 4 seconds) button appearance teasing effect) being executed can be lower during the execution of the pre-reading variable display than during the execution of the variable display when the pending activation ball that is the pre-reading target is consumed (the relevant variable display). As another variation, in the case where the button appearance prompting performance is not executed in the first half of the variable display (a predetermined timing before the reach) (or a button appearance prompting performance with a low expectation is executed without executing a button appearance prompting performance with a high expectation) and the button appearance prompting performance is executed in the second half of the variable display (a specific timing after the reach) (or a button appearance prompting performance with a high expectation is executed instead of a button appearance prompting performance with a low expectation), the expectation of a big win may be increased the longer the period between the predetermined timing before the reach, which is the first half of the variable display, and the specific timing after the reach, which is the second half of the variable display (for example, 90 seconds rather than 60 seconds), or the button image at the specific timing after the reach, which is the second half of the variable display, is likely to be an image with a high expectation (for example, a red button image rather than a blue button image). Also, the button presentation pattern A may be used in the first half of the variable display (a predetermined timing before the reach), and the button presentation pattern B may be used in the second half of the variable display (a specific timing after the reach). In addition, although details will be described later, timing for displaying a button image at a predetermined timing before the reach, which is the first half of the changing display, may start from the start of the changing display, and timing for displaying a button image at a specific timing after the reach, which is the second half of the changing display, may start from the start of a specific presentation (normal reach presentation or super reach presentation), and the timing for displaying a button image at a specific timing after the reach, which is the second half of the changing display, may be configured to be longer than the timing for displaying a button image at a predetermined timing before the reach, which is the first half of the changing display.

During the execution of the special game in this embodiment, a count-up effect can be executed on the screen of the effect display device 60, which counts up the total number of prize balls based on the detection of a ball entering the large prize opening in the special game (for example, if the number of prize balls currently acquired is "2000" and there are 15 prize balls, the effect of counting up by one, such as 2000 → 2001 → 2002 → ... 2015). In addition, when the number of prize balls on the display displayed in the count-up reaches a specific number, a highlight display can be executed to emphasize that the specific number has been reached (for example, when the number of prize balls on the display displayed in the count-up reaches 2500, a display of "2500" is displayed larger than the number of prize balls on the display displayed in the count-up). For these effects and displays, the specifications described below may be adopted. When the large prize opening 20 is opened in one unit game, it is closed when nine game balls enter (the number of prize balls for one ball entering is "15"). In this way, the number of game balls that is the end condition for a unit game (the condition for closing the large prize opening 20) is called the specified count number.

(1) When an over-winning (a ball that exceeds the specified count) occurs while a count-up effect corresponding to the entry of game balls within a specified count number (particularly a count-up effect corresponding to the ninth count, which is the specified count number) is being performed and the count-up of 15 balls has not yet been completed, it is desirable to configure the count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning to start after all count-up effects that have not yet completed the count-up of 15 balls have been completed (after 15 balls have been counted). Here, if the over-winning is detected just before the end of the interval period (the pause time from when the end of each unit game is set until the setting of the next unit game or end demo is started), the count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning will overlap with the execution period of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period has elapsed). However, even if a ball enters the large winning opening 20 during the execution of the count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning that is executed during the execution of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period has elapsed), if the ball enters while the count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning is being executed and the count-up of 15 balls has not yet been completed, it is preferable that the count-up effect corresponding to the ball entering the large winning opening 20 in the next round will start after the count-up effect that has not yet completed the count-up of 15 balls has been completed (after the count-up of 15 balls has been completed).

(2) The time required to count up one prize ball (the time required to count up from "N" to "N+1") is set to "0.03 seconds", that is, the count up is performed in increments of "0.03 seconds". The execution time of the count up performance is derived by multiplying the time required to count up one prize ball by the value of the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) awarded when one game ball enters the large prize opening 20, and the execution time of the count up performance is "15 (unit number of prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count up interval) = 0.45 seconds". However, even if a special game is being played, the count up performance is configured not to be executed during the execution of the start demo and the end demo. In addition, the execution time of the count up performance is set to be shorter than the interval time (also called the "interval period") set after the end of each unit game. The interval time is a waiting time set between each unit game or between the final unit game and the end demo, and is the unit game waiting time or end demo waiting time during which the large prize winning opening 20 is kept closed from the start of its closing operation, and is set to "2 seconds" for all round games. In addition, by configuring the count-up performance time (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the interval time (2 seconds), even if a count-up performance is performed based on a game ball entering the large prize winning opening 20 just before the end of a certain unit game, the count-up performance will be completed within the interval time after the end of the unit game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the count-up performance will be performed beyond the interval period and extend to the next unit game or the end demo (if an over-winning occurs, the interval period may be exceeded), and the division between each unit game or the division between the final unit game and the end demo can be clearly defined.

(3) The count-up presentation time is set to be shorter than the execution time of the end demo. As mentioned above, the count-up presentation time is set to "0.45 seconds." The execution time of the end demo is set to "20 seconds" for all jackpot types (performance during jackpot). The execution time of the end demo is the waiting time from the time when the interval time after the end of the final unit game in the special game has elapsed until the special game ends. In other words, the execution time of the end demo does not include the interval time set after the end of the final unit game. That is, the interval time after the end of the final unit game is set as the remaining time (grace time) of the unit game during which the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 20 may be effectively detected (i.e., detected as a target for prize ball payout, not determined as illegal entry), but the execution time of the end demo is set as a preparation time for a game (presentation mode) after the end of a special game separated from the unit game during which the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 20 may not be effectively detected. By configuring the count-up presentation time (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the execution time of the end demo (20 seconds), even if the count-up presentation is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 20 just before the end of the final unit game, or even if an over-entry occurs in the final unit game, or even after the closing of the large prize opening 20 after the final unit game (even during the end demo period), if the count-up presentation is performed, the count-up presentation will be completed within the end demo period. This means that the count-up effect will not extend beyond the end demo period and into the variable display after the special game ends, making it possible to clearly distinguish between the end of the special game and the start of the variable display for the first spin.

(4) When a specified number of game balls enter the jackpot opening 20 in one unit game, the total time of the count-up presentation for the specified number of counts in this one unit game (the count-up presentation for the number of prize balls that can be won in one unit game) is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo. Specifically, the total time of the count-up presentation for the specified number of counts is "0.45 seconds (count-up presentation time) x 10 balls (specified count number) = 4.5 seconds." Meanwhile, as mentioned above, the execution time of the jackpot end demo is set to "20 seconds" common to all jackpot types (presentations during jackpot). In this embodiment, the total time of the count-up performance for the specified count number (4.5 seconds) is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo (20 seconds). Therefore, even if multiple count-up performances are performed consecutively based on multiple game balls entering the jackpot entry port 20 in succession just before the end of the final unit game, or even if the count-up performance is performed after the jackpot entry port 20 is closed after the final unit game (even during the jackpot end demo period), the count-up performance will be completed within the jackpot end demo period. Therefore, the count-up performance will not be performed beyond the jackpot end demo period and before the variable display after the special game ends, and the division between the end of the special game and the start of the variable display for the first rotation can be clearly defined.

<Suppression notification effect>
In this embodiment, the gaming machine is equipped with a suppression function. The details will be described later, but this function is to stop the game and notify when a predetermined count value "MY" reaches a predetermined specified value. The MY counter is a counter for counting MY. "MY" is a count value based on the difference in the number of balls between the safe number and the out number, and is an index showing the number of game values (balls held by the player or balls dispensed by the gaming machine) given to the player, where MY=number of safes (number of winning balls planned)-number of outs (number of balls played).

The MY counter has a suppression function activation flag that indicates that the count value of the MY counter has reached a predetermined threshold value (a specified value of "95,000" described below), i.e., that the suppression function activation condition described below has been satisfied. The suppression function activation flag is ON when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied. The suppression function activation flag is also OFF when the power is turned on with RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch). The MY counter is updated (added or subtracted) when a game ball enters each winning hole or out hole. Specifically, the safe number is added to the count value of the MY counter. The "safe number" means the number of game balls (safe balls) that are scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entering each winning hole, that is, the planned number of prize balls. In other words, the safe number is not the actual number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout device, but the planned number of prize balls that have been decided to be paid out. When one game ball enters the first start port, the MY counter adds "3" as the number of safes (planned number of prize balls) to be paid out when one game ball enters the first start port. When one game ball enters the second start port, the MY counter adds "1" as the number of safes (planned number of prize balls) to be paid out when the game ball enters the second start port. When one game ball enters the general prize port, the MY counter adds "3" as the number of safes (planned number of prize balls) to be paid out when the game ball enters the general prize port. When one game ball enters the large prize port, the MY counter adds "15" as the number of safes (planned number of prize balls) to be paid out when the game ball enters the large prize port. The MY counter also subtracts the number of outs from the count value of the MY counter. The "number of outs" refers to the number of game balls (out balls) that have been shot into the game area and used in the game, that is, the number of game balls (out balls) that have entered each winning port (first starting port, second starting port, general winning port, large winning port, etc.) of the game area or the out port and discharged to the back side of the game board. The MY counter subtracts "1" as the number of outs every time one game ball enters the out port (referred to as an out ball or played ball). However, when the MY counter is "0", the MY counter is not subtracted even if an out ball (played ball) is detected. In other words, the count value of the MY counter does not become a value less than "0" (a negative value), and even if an out ball (played ball) occurs in a situation where the count value of the MY counter is "0", the value corresponding to the number of outs is not subtracted, and the count value of the MY counter remains "0". Each time the MY counter is updated, a performance command (called a "ball difference signal") is generated and output to determine the count value of the MY counter. Based on this ball difference signal, the suppression function-related performance (pre-alert performance, suppression notification performance) described below is executed.

The suppression function is activated when the count value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined threshold value (referred to as the "prescribed value"). That is, the condition for the suppression function (referred to as the "suppression function activation condition") is that the count value of the MY counter reaches the prescribed value. The prescribed value is set to "95000", and the suppression function activation condition is met when the count value of the MY counter reaches the prescribed value "95000". As described above, when the suppression function activation condition is met, the suppression function activation flag is turned ON. Also, when the count value of the MY counter reaches the prescribed value "95000" and the suppression function activation condition is met, even if a safe ball or an out ball occurs until the suppression function is released (until the suppression function activation flag is turned OFF), the count value of the MY counter is not updated (added or subtracted), and the count value of the MY counter maintains the prescribed value "95000". That is, the upper limit value of the MY counter is "95000", and even if MY exceeds "95000", the value of the MY counter will not be updated from "95000". To add, even if MY falls below "95000" after reaching or exceeding "95000", the value of the MY counter will not be updated from "95000". In other words, before MY reaches "95000", the MY counter will be updated in conjunction with the update of MY. As a modified example, even if MY exceeds "95000", the value of the MY counter may also be updated in conjunction, that is, updated to exceed "95000", and even if MY falls below "95000" after reaching or exceeding "95000", the value of the MY counter may also be updated in conjunction, that is, updated to fall below "95000". Even when configured in this way, the suppression function activation flag is turned ON when the MY counter reaches "95000", so the suppression function can be activated reliably. As another variation, when MY exceeds "95000", the MY counter value may be set to "95000" and then switched to "0" (initialized (cleared)), and the MY counter may not be updated (fixed at "0"). Even when configured in this way, the suppression function activation flag is turned ON when the MY counter reaches "95000", so the suppression function can be activated reliably.

When the suppression function is activated, the game transitions to a game stop state and the game progress is halted. As an example, when the suppression function is activated, special symbol win/loss determination, symbol determination, fluctuation pattern determination, etc. are not performed, and high base states and special games are also not executed. In addition, when the suppression function is activated, the operation of the launching device is restricted, and the launching of game balls is stopped regardless of how the launching device is operated. However, even when the suppression function is activated, if there are game balls to be paid out (prize balls based on winning before the suppression function was activated), the payout operation is permitted, and the payout of the game balls is executed without delay. That is, since the MY counter is counted not based on the actual number of prize balls actually paid out, but on the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out, even in a situation where all the prize balls corresponding to the scheduled number of prize balls have not been paid out, if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000" due to the addition of the scheduled number of prize balls, the suppression function is activated (because the suppression function activation condition is naturally satisfied), but even in that case, the remaining part of the scheduled number of prize balls (the remaining number of prize balls that have not been paid out at the time the suppression function starts to operate) is paid out firmly to the end. Therefore, as will be described in detail later, even during the operation of the suppression function, a prize ball error (payout error) may occur in the gaming machine due to the payout of game balls during the operation of the suppression function, and in that case, an error notification corresponding to the prize ball error will be executed. In addition, even if a special game is not being played, the prize balls that trigger the count value of the MY counter to reach the specified value "95000" (for example, when the count value of the MY counter is "94998" and a game ball enters the general winning port and "3" prize balls are paid out), the prize balls that exceed the count value of the MY counter "95000" (the remaining prize ball in the above example) are also paid out until the end (however, naturally, prize balls are not paid out based on subsequent wins). When the suppression function is activated, the game stops and the firing stops, but this configuration is not limited to this, and the suppression function may be configured to switch to the game stop state but not to the firing stop state when it is activated.

In addition, the timing of the suppression function activation differs between when the MY counter count value reaches the specified value "95000" while special play is not being played (when the suppression function activation condition is met) and when the MY counter count value reaches the specified value "95000" while special play is being played (when the suppression function activation condition is met).

If the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied while a special game is not being played, the suppression function is activated at the same time or approximately at the same time as the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied. In other words, if the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied while a special game is not being played, the timing when the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied and the suppression function is activated are substantially the same. If the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied while a special game is not being played, the suppression function is activated when the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied (when the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000") regardless of whether the display is a miss display or a jackpot display. Therefore, if the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied while a pattern display is being played, the suppression function is activated when the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied, without waiting for the display to stop (even before the display to stop), and the display to stop is forcibly terminated halfway. Therefore, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of the jackpot variable display, the player cannot enjoy the special game that would normally be played after the variable display ends, and cannot obtain the profit (prize balls) that can be obtained in the special game. The reason is that even if the game is forcibly stopped during the jackpot variable display, the player cannot know the result of the game (that he has won the jackpot) at this point, so even if the game suddenly stops during the variable display, the player is unlikely to feel dissatisfied or distrustful. In addition, even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000" due to a prize ball based on the entry of a game ball into the second start port in the open state while the second start port is open for 5 seconds x 1 time in the high base state, or even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000" due to a prize ball based on the entry of a game ball into another general winning port, it is preferable to forcibly close the second start port when the specified value is reached (even if the opening time remains).

On the other hand, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a special game, the suppression function will not be activated until the special game (big win end demo) ends, and will be activated after the special game (big win end demo) ends. In other words, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a special game, it is possible to continue playing from the time the suppression function activation condition is satisfied until the special game ends, and the timing when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied and the suppression function activation are substantially different. The reason for this is that if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a special game, even if the special game is not immediately stopped and the game is continued, the player will only win a limited number of prize balls in the remaining round game (unit game), and the player will not win excessive profits (no sense of unfairness with other players will occur), and if the suppression function is suddenly activated during the execution of a special game and the game is stopped, it may cause the player to feel distrustful or dissatisfied. As a modified example, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a special game, the suppression function may not be activated until the end of the final round of the special game, and the suppression function may be activated after the end of the final round. Also, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a special game, the suppression function may not be activated until the start of the big win end demo of the special game, and the suppression function may be activated after the start of the big win end demo. As a further modified example, even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000" during the execution of a special game (even if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied), if a safe ball and an out ball are generated until the special game ends (until the suppression function is activated), the count value of the MY counter may be updated. In that case, even if the count value of the MY counter falls below the specified value "95000" after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (even if it returns to the state before the suppression function activation condition is satisfied), a configuration in which the suppression function is activated after the special game ends can be applied. In other words, once the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a special game, the operation of the suppression function may be guaranteed when the special game ends, even if the count value of the MY counter increases or decreases from the specified value "95000" until the special game ends. Note that even in this modified example, after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a special game, prize balls can be paid out based on game balls entering the large prize opening, etc., until the special game ends.

Next, a method for canceling the suppression function will be described. When the suppression function is activated, the operation of the suppression function can be cancelled by performing a RAM clear process when the power is turned on. That is, when the suppression function is activated, the suppression function activation flag can be switched from ON to OFF by performing a power recovery accompanied by a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch) after the gaming machine is turned off, and the operation of the suppression function can be cancelled. Here, the power recovery accompanied by a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch) is a power recovery in the case where the transition mode when the gaming machine is turned on (when the power is restored) is a transition mode to a "RAM clear mode". In addition, the power recovery without a RAM clear is a power recovery in the case where the transition mode when the gaming machine is turned on (when the power is restored) is a transition mode to a "game mode". In addition, when the suppression function is activated, if the gaming machine is turned off and then the power is restored without a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch), the suppression function activation flag does not switch from ON to OFF, and the suppression function is not cancelled. In that case, the suppression function is activated even after the power is restored, and the game stop state and the launch stop state continue. In addition, if the suppression function activation conditions are met during the execution of a special game (if the suppression function activation flag is ON), and the power is turned off before the special game ends and the power is restored with RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch), the suppression function activation flag will switch from ON to OFF when the power is restored, and the suppression function will not be activated even if the special game resumed after the power is restored ends. On the other hand, if the suppression function activation conditions are met during the execution of a special game (if the suppression function activation flag is ON), and the power is turned off before the special game ends and the power is restored without RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch), the suppression function activation flag will not switch from ON to OFF when the power is restored, and the suppression function will be activated when the special game resumed after the power is restored ends.

Next, the method of initializing the MY counter will be described. If the gaming machine is powered off and powered back on before the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied (when the suppression function activation flag is OFF), the MY counter is cleared (the MY counter becomes "0") when the power is restored, whether the power is restored with RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch) or without RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch). In other words, before the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied, the MY counter is cleared (the count value before the power cut is erased) when the gaming machine is powered on, regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch when the power is turned on. Therefore, before the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied, the MY counter is cleared when the power is restored, regardless of whether the transition mode when the gaming machine is powered on (when the power is turned on) is the above-mentioned RAM clear mode or the game mode. On the other hand, when the gaming machine is powered off and powered back on after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (when the suppression function activation flag is ON), if the power is restored without RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch), the MY counter is not cleared when the power is restored, and the count value before the power is removed (95,000) is inherited. In addition, when the gaming machine is powered off and powered back on after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (when the suppression function activation flag is ON), if the power is restored with RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch), the MY counter is cleared when the power is restored (the count value before the power is removed is erased). As a modified example, the MY counter may be configured to be initialized (cleared) when the count value of the MY counter reaches a specified value "95,000", that is, when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied. In addition, as a further modified example, an operation means (called a "count continuation switch") for prohibiting the initialization of the MY counter may be installed. For example, even if the power is cut off before the suppression function activation conditions are met during the execution of the advance warning performance described below and the power is restored without clearing the RAM, if the power is restored while the count continuation switch is being operated (power is restored without clearing the RAM), the MY counter will not be initialized (cleared) when the power is restored, and the count value before the power was cut will continue.

Next, the external information signal related to the suppression function will be described. Among the external information signals, there are a suppression function pre-activation signal and a suppression function activation signal as external information signals related to the suppression function (also referred to as an external signal or external information). The suppression function pre-activation signal is an external information signal indicating that the suppression function is scheduled to be activated soon. The suppression function pre-activation signal is output continuously for a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds) at a predetermined opportunity before the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000". The predetermined opportunity is when the count value of the MY counter reaches a specific value (for example, any numerical value greater than or equal to 90000 and less than 95000 can be applied). As the specific value, for example, "94500", which is 500 values before the specified value "95000", is adopted. Therefore, the output start timing of the suppression function pre-activation signal is not the same or approximately the same timing as the execution start timing of the advance notification performance described later (it is not substantially the same timing). As a modified example, when the count value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined value "90000", a suppression function pre-activation signal may be output, and the output timing of the suppression function pre-activation signal and the execution timing of the advance notification performance described below may be configured to be the same or approximately the same (they may be substantially the same). The suppression function activation signal is an external information signal indicating that the suppression function is activated. The suppression function activation signal is continuously output from when the suppression function is activated until the activation of the suppression function is released. In other words, the suppression function activation signal starts to be output when the suppression function is activated, and stops to be output when the power is restored with the RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch). Therefore, the output start timing of the suppression function activation signal is the same or approximately the same (substantially the same) as the activation start timing of the suppression function.

<Advance notice performance>
Next, the contents of the suppression function related performance will be described. The suppression function related performance includes a pre-notification performance (notification performance before the suppression function is activated) and a suppression notification performance (notification performance when the suppression function is activated). The pre-notification performance is performed before the suppression function is activated, and suggests or notifies that the suppression function is scheduled to be activated soon. The pre-notification performance is performed when the count value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined value. That is, the execution condition of the pre-notification performance (referred to as the "pre-notification condition") is established when the count value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined value. "90000" is set as the predetermined value. The specified value, which is the count value of the MY counter ("95000") that is the execution condition of the suppression notification, may be referred to as the first specified value, and the specified value, which is the count value of the MY counter (here, "90000") that is the pre-notification condition, may be referred to as the second specified value. The predetermined value is not limited to "90000" and can be set by the manager at will (however, it is preferable that the predetermined value is "90000" or less). That is, the execution condition of the advance notification effect (advance notification condition) is set as a variable condition (fluid condition) that can be set by the manager at will. On the other hand, the specified value is limited to "95000" and cannot be set by the manager at will. That is, the operation condition of the suppression function (suppression function operation condition) is set as a fixed condition that cannot be set by the player at will. The "manager" is a person who manages the gaming machine, and typically corresponds to a clerk of the gaming store or an employee of the gaming machine manufacturer. The advance notification effect includes an advance notification display effect and an advance notification sound output effect. In addition, unless otherwise specified, the description of "advance notification effect" hereinafter refers to "advance notification display effect only" or "advance notification effect and advance notification sound output effect".

The pre-notification display includes, as image displays, a first message display saying "When today's ball output reaches 95,000, the suppression function will be activated. After activation, play will end and firing will stop" and a second message display saying "Approximately **** balls remaining until activation." Note that "****" indicates the remaining MY value until the suppression function is activated. This "****" value is updated based on the difference ball count signal. The first and second message displays are displayed continuously from the time the pre-notification condition is satisfied until the suppression function is activated (except when the count value of the MY counter falls to a predetermined lower limit value "89,000" described later). The first message display is always a fixed message display during the execution of this pre-notification display (pre-notification display) without depending on the increase or decrease of the MY counter, etc. (the first message display does not change). On the other hand, the second message display is updated and displayed each time the count value of the MY counter increases by "500", starting from the time when the advance warning condition is satisfied (when the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "90000") In other words, the second message display is a message display that depends on the count value of the MY counter, and the "****" portion is updated and displayed each time "500" is added from the specified value "90000". Specifically, first, when the count value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined value of "90,000", the second message display displays the message "Approximately 5,000 shots remaining until activation", when the count value of the MY counter reaches "90,500", the second message display switches to "Approximately 4,500 shots remaining until activation", when the count value of the MY counter reaches "91,000", the second message display switches to "Approximately 4,000 shots remaining until activation", when the count value of the MY counter reaches "91,500", the second message display switches to "Approximately 3,500 shots remaining until activation", and similarly, the second message display switches each time the count value of the MY counter is increased by "500", and finally, when the count value of the MY counter reaches "94,500", the second message display switches to "Approximately 500 shots remaining until activation". Although the second message display is updated in units of 500, this is not limited to this configuration and may be updated in units of a different number (for example, in units of 1, 10, 100, 1000, etc.). In addition, the advance notification display effect does not have a dedicated background image, and a background image corresponding to the current game situation (stage background image, reach background image, jackpot background image) is displayed behind the first message display and the second message display.

The display priority of this advance warning display effect (layer priority, priority of whether to display it on the front or back compared to other images) is set higher than the display priority of the background image and normal decorative patterns, and lower than the priority (layer priority) of the right-hit notification image (text effect suggesting the recommended firing position, such as "right hit"), simple decorative patterns, and variable rights display (icon display indicating a hold, hold icons which can display up to four corresponding to up to four holds, and variable icon which is an icon display that appears when the first hold icon moves after a hold is consumed, and can display only one icon indicating that the ball is changing). In addition, when a volume adjustment operation or a light intensity adjustment operation is performed by the player, the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification display effect is set lower than the display priority (layer priority) of a volume adjustment screen (a screen showing the current volume level, in which the display mode of the image showing the volume level changes due to the volume adjustment operation, for example, a screen in which a musical note mark image is accompanied by one of number images 1 to 5 indicating the current volume level, in which the number in the number image changes due to the volume adjustment operation) and a light intensity adjustment screen (a screen showing the current light intensity level, in which the display mode of the image showing the light intensity level changes due to the light intensity adjustment operation, for example, a screen in which a light bulb mark image is accompanied by one of number images 1 to 5 indicating the current light intensity level, in which the number in the number image changes due to the light intensity adjustment operation). In addition, when a predetermined error occurs in the gaming machine, the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification display effect is set lower than the display priority (layer priority) of the error notification image (an image that notifies the occurrence of an error and is displayed in a display mode that allows the type of error currently occurring to be determined; for example, when magnetism is detected, a text image of "magnetic error" is displayed, when a door opening is detected, a text image of "door opening error" is displayed, and when prize ball payout stops, a text image of "prize ball error" is displayed). Note that although the normal decorative pattern can be displayed superimposed with the advance notification display effect, it is preferable that the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification display effect is set higher. Therefore, when the advance notification display effect is executed while the normal decorative pattern is being operated at the start of the fluctuation, the temporary stop operation, the reach establishment operation, or the swing operation, the display of each operation and the display of the advance notification display effect are displayed superimposed, while the advance notification display effect has a higher display priority (layer priority), so the advance notification display effect is displayed in front. However, it is preferable that the simple decorative pattern is not superimposed on the advance notification display effect. Also, the standby demo effect (a screen that is displayed when the fluctuation has stopped and there is no reserve for a predetermined period of time, such as 255 seconds, and indicates that the game is waiting to be played) can be superimposed on the advance notification display effect, but it is preferable that the display priority (layer priority) be set higher for the advance notification display effect. It is preferable that the volume adjustment screen, light intensity adjustment screen, and right-hit notification image are not superimposed on the advance notification display effect.

The pre-alarm sound output effect is an effect in which a predetermined pre-alarm sound is output from the speaker. The pre-alarm sound is, for example, a sound such as "The suppression function will be activated with **** shots remaining." Note that "****" is the remaining MY (number of balls difference) value until the suppression function is activated, and is a value that matches the "****" in the second text display. This pre-alarm sound is output from the speaker once or multiple times when the count value of the MY counter reaches "90000", "90500", "91000", "91500", "92000", "92500", "93000", "93500", "94000", or "94500", that is, when the second text display is updated and displayed. During the output of this pre-alarm sound, that is, during the display of the first text display and the second text display and the output of the pre-alarm sound, other production sounds (such as background music and sound effects) are muted. Then, after the advance warning sound is output, i.e., while the first and second wording displays are displayed and the advance warning sound is not being output, the original sound effects (such as background music and sound effects) are restored. As a variation, while the first and second wording displays are displayed and the advance warning sound is being output, other sound effects (such as background music and sound effects) may be simultaneously executed, and in such a configuration, while the first and second wording displays are displayed and the advance warning sound is being output, the volume of the other sound effects (such as background music and sound effects) may be reduced to make the advance warning sound easier to hear (after the advance warning sound is output, i.e., while the first and second wording displays are displayed and the advance warning sound is not being output, the original volume is restored).

This pre-notification effect ends when the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95,000" (when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied). In other words, when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied, the pre-notification effect switches to the suppression notification effect. However, if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95,000" while a special game is being played (when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied), the pre-notification effect continues to be executed until the end of the special game, at which point the pre-notification effect ends and the suppression notification effect begins. In addition, as a modified example, when the count value of the MY counter reaches a specified value "95000" during the execution of a special game (when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied), the pre-notification display effect may be switched to a special message saying "Today's ball output has reached 95000 balls, so the game will end after the special game ends and the firing will stop" when the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000", and this special message may be configured to be displayed continuously until the end of the special game. This special message is also a type of pre-notification effect, and may be called a special pre-notification effect (special pre-notification display effect). In addition, as a further modified example, the pre-notification effect may be configured not to be executed during the execution of a special game. In other words, when a special game is started during the execution of a pre-notification effect, the pre-notification effect being executed may be interrupted when the special game is started, and the interrupted pre-notification effect may be resumed when the special game is ended. When configured in this way, it is preferable to resume the pre-notification performance in a display mode based on the counter value of the MY counter after the special game ends. Also, if the pre-notification condition is satisfied during the execution of a special game, the pre-notification performance may be configured not to start during the execution of the special game (by waiting to execute the pre-notification performance until the end of the special game), and to start the pre-notification performance after the end of the special game. When configured in this way, it is preferable to start the pre-notification performance in a display mode based on the counter value of the MY counter after the end of the special game.

The advance notification performance also ends when the count value of the MY counter falls to a predetermined lower limit (e.g., "89000"). In other words, even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90000" and the advance notification performance starts, if the count value of the MY counter falls to the predetermined lower limit "89000" without reaching the specified value "95000", the advance notification performance ends without progressing to the suppression notification performance. Here, when the advance notification performance starts, even if the count value of the MY counter falls to less than the predetermined value "90000" without reaching the specified value "95000", the advance notification performance continues to be executed until it falls to the predetermined lower limit "89000". Note that, if the count value of the MY counter falls to the predetermined lower limit "89000", the advance notification performance is not executed again even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90000" again. However, if a special condition is satisfied after the count value of the MY counter falls to a predetermined lower limit "89000" and before the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90000" again, the pre-notification performance may be executed again when the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90000" again. For example, when the count value of the MY counter falls to the predetermined lower limit "89000", the special condition may be satisfied when the count value of the MY counter subsequently falls to "80000", which is a value smaller than the predetermined lower limit "89000", and when the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90000" again from there, the pre-notification performance may be executed again. As another variation, when the count value of the MY counter falls to a predetermined lower limit of "89000", the count value of the MY counter may then fall to the initial value of "0" (when it reaches the bottom value where MY is not subtracted even if there is an out ball, or when it is cleared), which satisfies a special condition, and when the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value of "90000" again, a pre-notification effect may be executed again. Also, if the MY counter count value falls below the predetermined value of "90000" and before it falls to the predetermined lower limit of "89000", a so-called consecutive win break occurs (when the consecutive win state ends), the execution of the pre-notification effect may be canceled even if the count value of the MY counter has not fallen to the predetermined lower limit of "89000".

As a further modified example, it may be configured so that, without requiring any special conditions, when the count value of the MY counter falls to a predetermined lower limit value of "89,000", a pre-announcement performance is executed again when the count value of the MY counter again reaches the predetermined value of "90,000". As for the second text display, as mentioned above, the display is updated (the difference between the thresholds is increased by 500) each time the count value of the MY counter reaches each threshold (90000, 90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500) that triggers an update of the pre-alarm performance. Conversely, the display is also updated (the difference between the thresholds is decreased by 500) when the count value of the MY counter falls below each threshold (90000, 90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500) that triggers an update of the pre-alarm performance. For example, if the MY counter is subtracted from "91000" to "90999", the second message display is updated (decremented) from "Approximately 3500 shots remaining until activation" to "Approximately 4000 shots remaining until activation". However, even if the count value of the MY counter falls below the specified value of "90000", the second message display is not updated and continues to display "Approximately 5000 shots remaining until activation" until it falls to the specified lower limit of "89000". In other words, even if the count value of the MY counter is subtracted from "90000" to "89999", the second message display continues to display "Approximately 5000 shots remaining until activation" (continues until it falls below the specified lower limit of "89000").

In addition, as a modified example, when the count value of the MY counter falls below each threshold value (90000, 90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500) that triggers the update of the pre-alarm effect, the second message display may not be updated and the current display (original display) may be continued. In the following explanation, for convenience, MY500, which is the update cycle of the second message display, is taken as one unit, and among the series of pre-alarm effects, the pre-alarm effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter is between "90000" and "90499" (the pre-alarm effect when "Approximately 5000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "first unit notification effect." Also, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter is between "90500" and "90999" (the advance notification effect when "Approximately 4500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "second unit notification effect." Also, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter is between "91000" and "91499" (the advance notification effect when "Approximately 4000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "third unit notification effect." Also, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter is between "91500" and "91999" (the advance notification effect when "Approximately 3500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "fourth unit notification effect." Also, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter is between "92000" and "92499" (the advance notification effect when "Approximately 3000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "fifth unit notification effect." Also, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter is between "92500" and "92999" (the advance notification effect when "Approximately 2500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "sixth unit notification effect." Also, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter is between "93000" and "93499" (the advance notification effect when "Approximately 2000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "seventh unit notification effect." In addition, the advance notification effect that is performed when the MY counter count value is between "93,500" and "93,999" (the advance notification effect when "Approximately 1,500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "8th unit notification effect." In addition, the advance notification effect that is performed when the MY counter count value is between "94,000" and "94,499" (the advance notification effect when "Approximately 1,000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "9th unit notification effect." In addition, the advance notification effect that is performed when the MY counter count value is between "94,500" and "94,999" (the advance notification effect when "Approximately 500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "10th unit notification effect."

The suppression notification effect is an effect that suggests or notifies that the count value of the MY counter has reached the specified value "95000", that is, that the suppression function has been activated and the game has transitioned to a stopped state. This suppression notification effect is executed when the suppression function is activated. Specifically, if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000" while a special game is not being played, the suppression notification effect is executed when the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000", and if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000" while a special game is being played, the suppression notification effect is executed after the special game ends. The suppression notification effect includes a suppression notification image display effect and a suppression notification sound output effect. Note that, while the suppression notification effect is being played, although not shown in the figure, the frame lamp (the lamp arranged on the frame) is fully lit (or fully flashes) in red, and the board lamp (the lamp arranged on the game board) is turned off. The suppression notification display effect is an effect that displays a dedicated screen (suppression screen) that notifies that the suppression function has been activated. This suppression screen includes a special message display and a special background image. The special message display includes a message display such as "Today's ball output has reached 95,000 balls, the suppression function has been activated, today's game will end, please be careful not to forget to take your cards." The special background image is a special background image displayed behind the special message display, and is composed of, for example, a blackout image. The display priority of this suppression screen is set higher than the display priority of any other effect image (i.e., it is set as the top priority layer), and when this suppression screen is displayed, any other effect image (normal game screen) becomes invisible or difficult to see. Note that, when a predetermined error (for example, an error with high priority or importance) occurs, an error notification image corresponding to this predetermined error may be displayed in front of the suppression screen. The suppression notification sound output effect is an effect that outputs a suppression notification sound from a speaker. The suppression notification sound is, for example, a sound saying "The suppression function has been activated." This suppression notification sound output performance repeatedly outputs the suppression notification sound while the suppression function is operating. The suppression notification sound output performance may be configured to output a specific error sound for a short time and then repeatedly output the suppression notification sound. The suppression notification performance ends when the suppression function is released. That is, the suppression function is released and the suppression notification performance ends when the RAM clear operation is performed when the power is turned on. The suppression notification display performance continues until the suppression function is released, while the suppression notification sound output performance may continue for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) after the suppression function is activated. In this case, if a power outage occurs before the predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the suppression notification performance was executed and the power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), it is preferable that the suppression notification display performance continues to be executed after the power is restored, while the suppression notification sound output performance is not executed (even if there is a remaining time of the above-mentioned predetermined time).

When a special game is not being played (when the changing patterns are being displayed), if the count value of the MY counter reaches a specified value of "95,000" (for example, the specified value of "95,000" is reached upon winning at the general winning port), a suppression notification effect is executed, suggesting or informing the player that the suppression function has been activated. The game state immediately before this suppression function is activated is a high base state, and the activation of the suppression function ends the high base state. Therefore, when the suppression function is activated, the flag indicating the high base state is turned OFF, and if the second starting port is open, it is forcibly closed in the middle of the opening, and the changing display in the high base state (the changing display currently being executed) is forcibly ended. In addition, even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000" during a round play in a special game, the suppression function will not operate until the special game (big win end demo) ends, and the advance notification effect (10th unit notification effect) will continue to be executed until the special game (big win end demo) ends. Note that if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000" during the execution of a special game, the count value of the MY counter will not be updated even if a safe ball (scheduled number of winning balls) and an out ball (played ball) are generated until the special game ends (the count value of the MY counter will hold the specified value "95000"). In addition, if the suppression function activation conditions are met during the execution of a special game (if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95,000"), the most recent advance notification effect (10th unit notification effect: approximately 500 balls remaining until activation) will continue to be displayed until the end of the special game, but this configuration is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to display a message saying "The suppression function will be activated after the jackpot ends," or, as mentioned above, to switch from the advance notification display effect to a special message saying "Today's ball output has reached 95,000 balls, so play will end after the special game ends and firing will stop," and this special message may be displayed continuously until the end of the special game. When configured in this way, the advance notification effect (tenth unit notification effect) continues to be executed even in the tenth round (final round), but is not limited to a configuration in which the advance notification effect (tenth unit notification effect) continues to be executed. For example, a message saying "The suppression function will be activated after the big win ends" may be displayed, or as described above, the advance notification display effect may be switched to a special message saying "Today's ball output has reached 95,000 balls, so the game will end after the special game ends and firing will stop," and this special message may be displayed continuously until the special game ends. After that, when the special game ends, a suppression notification effect is executed, suggesting or notifying the player that the suppression function has been activated.

Here, the cumulative prize ball count display area displays the cumulative number of prize balls won up to the present time based on game balls entering the big prize opening during special games during consecutive wins (cumulative prize ball count), and this cumulative prize ball value (cumulative prize ball display) is updated and displayed by executing a prize ball count-up effect (also simply referred to as a count-up effect). Here, the prize ball count-up effect is an effect that adds and displays the value of the number of prize balls paid out based on a game ball entering the big prize opening when a game ball enters the big prize opening during the execution of special games during consecutive wins to the cumulative prize ball count displayed in the cumulative prize ball count display area. Since the specifications are such that "10" prize balls are paid out when one game ball enters the large prize opening (the unit prize ball number of the large prize opening is 10), when a game ball enters the large prize opening, the value of the cumulative prize ball number displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area is counted up in units of "10" (a prize ball count-up effect is performed in which "10" is added to the value of the cumulative prize ball number). Here, the cumulative prize ball number display area can display a five-digit number, and more specifically, it can display 100,000 numbers from "0" to "99999" as the cumulative prize ball number display. Therefore, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball number display is "99999". At this time, if the cumulative prize ball number display has reached the upper limit value of "99999", even if a game ball enters the large prize opening, the cumulative prize ball number display does not change and maintains the upper limit value of "99999". In this way, the upper limit value "99999" of the cumulative prize ball number display is set as a value larger than the specified value "95000" which is the upper limit value of MY. In other words, since the cumulative prize ball number display when the upper limit value "99999" is reached can have a value larger than the specified value "95000" of MY notified in advance in the advance notification performance, it is possible to accurately notify the player that the number of prize balls acquired by the player has exceeded the specified value "95000" of MY, and it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction and accomplishment. In addition, since the cumulative prize ball number display is a value that does not take into account out balls and can have a value that exceeds the specified value "95000" of MY, it is preferable to configure it so that it can display up to the upper limit value "99999". As a modified example, even if the cumulative prize ball number display reaches the upper limit value "99999", if a game ball enters the large prize entrance, a pseudo prize ball count-up performance (variable display of the cumulative prize ball number display) may be executed. For example, the pseudo prize ball count-up effect may be 99999 → 91111 → 92222 → 93333 → ... → 98888 → 99999, where the initial value (99999) and the final value (99999) are the same, but the values between them are displayed randomly, making it look as if the cumulative prize balls are being counted up. As a further modification, when the cumulative prize ball display reaches the upper limit value "99999", if a new prize ball is paid out (when a game ball enters the big prize), "FFFFF" may be displayed as the cumulative prize ball display to suggest or inform that the cumulative prize ball display has exceeded the display limit (is in an overflow state). As a further modified example, when the cumulative prize ball count display reaches the upper limit value "99999", or when a new prize ball payout occurs after the cumulative prize ball count display reaches the upper limit value "99999", the display may be switched to "FFFFF" (no "99999" is displayed thereafter), and the display of "FFFFF" may be always maintained regardless of whether or not a new prize ball is paid out thereafter. As a further modified example, the upper limit value of the cumulative prize ball count display may be set to "94999", which is the value just before the MY specified value "95000", and when that value is exceeded, a text image of "Limit Reached" may be displayed, and the cumulative prize ball count display may not be updated thereafter, and the text image of "Limit Break" may be continuously displayed. As a modified example, when that value is exceeded, the cumulative prize ball count display may be hidden, and instead, the text image of "Limit Break" may be displayed in the display area where the cumulative prize ball count display was displayed. Similarly, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball count display may be set to "95000", which is the same number as the MY specified value "95000", and when the value is exceeded, a text image of "Limit Reached" is displayed, and the cumulative prize ball count display is not updated thereafter, and the text image of "Limit Break" is continuously displayed. Even in such a configuration, when the value is exceeded, the cumulative prize ball count display may be hidden, and instead, the text image of "Limit Break" may be displayed in the display area where the cumulative prize ball count display was displayed. As a further modified example, in order to prevent excessive gambling from being aroused in the player, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball count display may be set to a value (for example, "50000") sufficiently smaller than the specified value "95000", and when the value is exceeded, a text image of "Limit Reached" is displayed, and when the value is exceeded, the cumulative prize ball count display is not updated thereafter, and the text image of "Limit Break" is continuously displayed. Even when configured in this way, if the value is exceeded, the cumulative prize ball count display may be hidden, and instead a text image of "Limit Break" may be displayed in the display area where the cumulative prize ball count display was displayed. In this way, the display conditions for "Limit Break" can be set as appropriate, but while "Limit Break" is displayed, it is preferable not to highlight the cumulative prize ball count (a presentation that notifies the player that the cumulative prize ball count has reached a predetermined specific value when a game ball enters the large prize opening during the execution of a special game) even if the cumulative prize ball count is a specific value.

The emphasis effect is an effect that notifies the player that the cumulative number of prize balls has reached a predetermined specific value when a game ball enters the big prize opening during the execution of a special game. The specific value is a number corresponding to a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls (2500 balls), and is set in units of 2500 balls, such as "2500", "5000", "7500", "10000", "12500", etc. The value of the predetermined number of prize balls, "2500", is set to a value smaller than the difference value "5000" obtained by subtracting the predetermined value "90000" from the MY specified value "95000". As a result, the cumulative number of prize balls will reach the specific value (multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls) at least once during the period from when the count value of the MY counter reaches the expected value "90000" to when it reaches the specified value "95000", that is, between when the advance notification effect is started and when the suppression function is activated, and the emphasis effect will be executed at least once. This ensures that at least one highlight effect will be performed even if the suppression function is about to be activated, and gives the player a sense of satisfaction and accomplishment.

Even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000" during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect during the execution of a special game and the suppression function activation condition is satisfied, the prize ball count-up effect being executed is not interrupted and the executed prize ball count-up effect is continued. In other words, even if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect (when the suppression function activation flag is turned ON), the suppression function is not activated (the suppression screen is not displayed) until the end of the special game, and the special game is continued as is. Therefore, the prize ball count-up effect being executed is not interrupted midway, but is completed (executed to the end). Although the details will be described later, when a later prize ball count-up performance based on a game ball entering a second large prize entry port (a prize that triggers the count value of the MY counter to reach the specified value "95000") is executed during the execution of a previous prize ball count-up performance based on the entry of a game ball into a first large prize entry port, the previous prize ball count-up performance and the later prize ball count-up performance are seamlessly connected, and these previous and subsequent prize ball count-up performances are configured as continuous and integrated count-up performances, so that even if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of the prize ball count-up performance, the prize ball count-up performance being executed can be continued without interrupting the currently executed prize ball count-up performance. As a result, the prize ball count-up performance can be shown to the player until the end without being interrupted, so that the player's motivation to play can be maintained even after the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000". In other words, if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000" during the execution of a special game, the game is not immediately stopped (the suppression function is not immediately activated), but the special game is continued as is, so even if the execution of the prize ball count-up effect is permitted, no particular harm will occur. On the contrary, if the execution of the prize ball count-up effect is hindered, there is a risk that the player's motivation to play will be reduced. Note that the winning that triggers the count value of the MY counter to reach the specified value "95000" is "a game ball entering the large winning hole," but this configuration is not limited to this, and the winning that triggers the count value of the MY counter to reach the specified value "95000" may also be "a game ball entering the general winning hole."

During the execution of a special game, even if the count value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined value "90000" during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect and the advance notification condition is satisfied, the prize ball count-up effect being executed is not interrupted and the execution is continued. In other words, even if the advance notification condition is satisfied during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect (the execution of the advance notification effect is started), the suppression function is not activated (the suppression screen is not displayed) until the end of the special game, and the special game is continued as is. Therefore, the prize ball count-up effect being executed is not interrupted midway, but the prize ball counter-up effect being executed is completed (executed to the end). Although the details will be described later, when a later prize ball count-up performance based on a game ball entering a second large prize entry port (a prize that triggers the count value of the MY counter to reach the predetermined value "90000") is executed during the execution of a previous prize ball count-up performance based on the entry of a game ball into the first large prize entry port, the previous prize ball count-up performance and the later prize ball count-up performance are seamlessly connected, and these previous and subsequent prize ball count-up performances are configured as continuous and integrated count-up performances, so that even if the advance notification condition is satisfied during the execution of the prize ball count-up performance, the prize ball count-up performance being executed can be continued without interrupting the currently executed prize ball count-up performance. As a result, the prize ball count-up performance can be shown to the player until the end without being interrupted, so that the player's motivation to play can be maintained even after the count value of the MY counter has reached the predetermined value "90000". In other words, even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90000" during the execution of the special game, the special game will continue as it is until the suppression function is activated, so there is no particular harm even if the execution of the prize ball count-up effect is allowed, and if the execution of the prize ball count-up effect is hindered, there is a risk that the player's motivation to play will be reduced. In addition, when the prize ball count-up effect and the advance notification effect are displayed in an overlapping manner, the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification effect is higher than the display priority (layer priority) of the prize ball count-up effect, and the advance notification effect is displayed on the front side than the prize ball count-up effect. In addition, the winning that triggers the count value of the MY counter to reach the predetermined value "90000" is "entering the large winning hole", but this configuration is not limited to this, and the winning that triggers the count value of the MY counter to reach the predetermined value "90000" may be "entering the general winning hole".

Even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000" during the execution of an emphasis effect during the execution of a special game and the suppression function activation condition is satisfied, the emphasis effect being executed is not interrupted and the execution is continued. In other words, even if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of an emphasis effect (when the suppression function activation flag is ON), the suppression function is not activated (the suppression screen is not displayed) until the end of the special game, and the special game is continued as is, so the emphasis effect being executed is not terminated midway, but is completed (executed to the end). This allows the player to see the emphasis effect to the end without interruption, so that the player's desire to play can be maintained even after the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000". In other words, if the count value of the MY counter reaches the set value of "95,000" while a special game is being played, the game will not be immediately stopped (the suppression function will not be immediately activated), but the special game will continue as is, so even if the execution of the emphasis effect is permitted, no real harm will occur. On the contrary, if the execution of the emphasis effect is hindered, there is a risk that the player's motivation to play will be diminished.

During the execution of a special game, even if the count value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined value "90000" during the execution of an emphasis effect and the advance notification condition is satisfied, the emphasis effect being executed is continued without being interrupted. In other words, even if the advance notification condition is satisfied during the execution of an emphasis effect (when the execution of an advance notification effect is started), the suppression function is not activated (the suppression screen is not displayed) until the end of the special game, and the special game is continued as is, so that the emphasis effect being executed is not terminated midway, but is completed (executed to the end). As a result, the emphasis effect can be shown to the player to the end without being interrupted, so that the player's desire to play can be maintained even after the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90000". In other words, even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90000" during the execution of a special game, the special game will continue as is until the suppression function is activated, so no actual harm will occur even if the execution of the emphasis effect is permitted, and if the execution of the emphasis effect is hindered, there is a risk that the player's motivation to play will be diminished. Note that when the emphasis effect and the advance notification effect are displayed in an overlapping manner, the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification effect is higher than the display priority (layer priority) of the emphasis effect, and the advance notification effect is displayed in front of the emphasis effect.

The time required for the count-up display of one prize ball (the time required for the count-up display from "N" to "N+1") is set to "0.03 seconds". In other words, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball display area is counted up in increments of "0.03 seconds". Therefore, the execution time of the prize ball count-up effect, which is performed when one game ball enters the large prize opening, is derived by multiplying the time value required to count up one prize ball by the value of the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) awarded when one game ball enters the large prize opening. In other words, the execution time of this prize ball count-up effect (the time value from the start to the end of one prize ball count-up effect) is "15 (unit number of prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds". The execution time of the emphasis effect is the time value from the start to the end of the display of the highlight image (enlarged display image) of the cumulative number of prize balls, and the execution time of the emphasis effect is set to "3 seconds" even when the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches any specific value (2500, 5000, 7500, 10000 ...). The execution time of this emphasis effect (3 seconds) is set to be longer than the execution time (0.45 seconds) of the prize ball count-up effect corresponding to the entry of one game ball into the large prize winning hole. Therefore, when the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value triggered by the entry of one game ball into the large prize winning hole, the prize ball count-up effect and the emphasis effect are executed simultaneously or approximately simultaneously, but by setting the execution time of the emphasis effect to be longer than the execution time of the prize ball count-up effect executed in response to the entry of one game ball into the large prize winning hole, even when the emphasis effect and the prize ball count-up effect are executed simultaneously or approximately simultaneously, the emphasis effect with high rarity can be made to stand out, and the satisfaction and sense of accomplishment of the player when the emphasis effect occurs can be further improved. In addition, when the highlight effect and the prize ball count-up effect are displayed in an overlapping manner, the display priority (layer priority) of the highlight effect is higher than the display priority (layer priority) of the prize ball count-up effect, and the highlight effect is displayed in front of the prize ball count-up effect. In addition, the round interval (the time during which the large prize opening closes when the Nth round of play ends and the closed state is maintained until the N+1th round of play begins) may be set to a time (e.g., 1.5 seconds) longer than the execution time (0.45 seconds) of the prize ball count-up effect corresponding to the entry of one game ball into the large prize opening, but shorter than the execution time (3 seconds) of the highlight effect.

The execution time of a pre-announcement performance is the time value from when a single pre-announcement performance starts to when it ends, and is the time value from when the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "90000" to when it reaches the prescribed value "95000". However, this execution time of the pre-announcement performance does not include the execution time of the pre-announcement performance when the MY counter reaches the specified value "90000" and then falls below the specified lower limit value "89000" without reaching the prescribed value "95000". In other words, the execution time of the pre-announcement performance here is the execution time when the pre-announcement performance is completed by reaching the prescribed value. The execution time of this advance notification effect is the time value until the count value of the MY counter increases from a predetermined value "90000" to "5000 (95000-90000=5000)". Since this increase of 5000 balls requires the number of prize balls obtained in multiple special games (for example, in the case of a 10R jackpot, about 1500 balls x 3 or more), it basically requires the execution time of multiple special games from the start to the end of one advance notification effect. Therefore, the execution time of the advance notification effect is significantly longer than the execution time of the emphasis effect (3 seconds). Therefore, even if the advance notification effect and the emphasis effect are executed in overlap, the advance notification effect, which is a continuous display, is made more prominent than the emphasis effect, which is a temporary display, and the attention of the player to the advance effect can be increased, so that the player can be sure to grasp the current game situation (that the suppression function is scheduled to be activated soon). The pre-announcement performance described here is a pre-announcement display performance, but the same relationship is observed when compared with the execution time of the pre-announcement sound output performance (for example, a 5-second voice output). As described above, the pre-announcement performance is updated and displayed every time the count value of the MY counter is added by "500" from the predetermined value "90000", and progresses in the order of the first unit announcement performance → the second unit announcement performance → the third unit announcement performance → ... → the tenth unit announcement performance. The execution time of any of the unit announcement performances from the first unit announcement performance to the tenth unit announcement performance constituting this pre-announcement performance is longer than the execution time of the emphasis performance (3 seconds). In other words, the execution time of each unit announcement performance is the time value until the count value of the MY counter increases by "500", and this increase of 500 requires the number of prize balls obtained in multiple rounds of play (for example, about 150 balls x 3 rounds or more), so basically, it takes the execution time of multiple rounds of play from the start to the end of one unit announcement performance. Therefore, the execution time of the unit notification effect is longer than the execution time of the emphasis effect (3 seconds). Therefore, even if the unit notification effect and the emphasis effect are executed at the same time, the unit notification effect, which is a continuous display, is made to stand out preferentially over the emphasis effect, which is a temporary display, and the player's attention to the unit notification effect can be increased, so that the player can reliably know how many shots are left before the suppression function is activated each time the unit notification effect (second message display) switches. Since the highlighting effects are performed in units of 2500 balls, the highlighting effects are performed at most once during one special game (e.g., 10R special game: number of balls that can be obtained = approximately 1500 balls) (at most one type of highlighting effect is displayed during one special game), but since the unit notification effects are performed in units of 500 MY balls, the unit notification effects can be performed multiple times during one special game (e.g., 10R special game: number of balls that can be obtained = approximately 1500 balls) (multiple types of unit notification effects can be displayed during one special game). This allows the player to see multiple types of unit notification effects during one special game, making it possible to further increase the player's attention to the advance notification effects.

When the first game ball enters the large prize opening and the large prize opening switch (also called the large prize detection device) detects the entry of the first game ball, a prize ball count-up effect based on this first ball is started (called the "previous prize ball count-up effect"). If a second game ball (a new game ball) enters the large prize opening while the previous prize ball count-up effect is being executed and the large prize opening switch detects the entry of the second game ball, the previous prize ball count-up effect is interrupted and a prize ball count-up effect based on the second ball is started (called the "later prize ball count-up effect"). Specifically, in a previous prize ball count-up performance, if a count-up display from "1000" to "1015" is originally scheduled, if a new game ball enters the large prize entry port during the execution of the previous prize ball count-up performance and is detected by the large prize entry port switch, the previous prize ball count-up performance being executed is terminated midway (for example, the count-up display is interrupted at "1010"), and the subsequent prize ball count-up performance is started. Then, in the subsequent prize ball count-up performance, the remaining part of the previous prize ball count-up performance (the count-up display from "1011" to "1015") is omitted, and the count-up display from "1016" to "1030", which is the continuation of the final value "1015", is performed. Although a portion of the count-up display of the previous prize ball count-up performance (the count-up display from "1011" to "1015") is omitted, the end (interruption) of the previous prize ball count-up performance and the start of the subsequent prize ball count-up performance are seamlessly connected, and these previous and subsequent prize ball count-up performances are configured as a continuous and integrated count-up display. In this way, of the two prize ball count-up performances, the priority of the subsequent prize ball count-up performance is set higher than the priority of the previous prize ball count-up performance, and if the end of the previous prize ball count-up performance and the start of the subsequent prize ball count-up performance overlap in time, the execution of the previous prize ball count-up performance is interrupted and the execution of the subsequent prize ball count-up performance is started preferentially. Therefore, even if game balls enter the big prize opening successively and two prize ball count-up effects are executed successively, the first and second prize ball count-up effects can be smoothly performed without a hitch, so that it is possible to prevent a timing discrepancy between the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening and the execution of the prize ball count-up effect (which gives the player a sense of discomfort), and it is possible to properly complete the prize ball count-up effect during the execution of the special game (round game). As a modified example, when the execution of the previous prize ball count-up effect is interrupted, the count-up display may be forcibly switched to the final value "1015" (i.e., if it is interrupted at "1010", it may be switched from "1010" to the final value "1015" at once), and the count-up display of the subsequent prize ball count-up effect (the count-up display from "1016" to "1030") may be started from this final value.

If one more game ball enters the large prize opening while a special game is being played, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls will reach a specific value (a multiple of 2,500); however, if one game ball enters the general prize opening before one more game ball enters the large prize opening, there is a situation (called a "specific situation") in which the value of the cumulative number of prize balls does not reach the specific value and the count value of the MY counter reaches the set value of "95,000." Specifically, in a specific situation where the cumulative number of prize balls during the execution of a special game is "97485" and the count value of the MY counter is "94998", if one more game ball enters the large prize opening (if 15 prize balls are paid out), the cumulative number of prize balls will reach a specific value of "97500" and an emphasis effect will be executed. On the other hand, if one game ball enters the general prize opening before one more game ball enters the large prize opening (if three prize balls are paid out), the cumulative number of prize balls will not reach the specific value of "97500" and the count value of the MY counter will reach the specified value of "95000" (number of safes = 3, number of outs = 1, difference in number of balls = 3-1 = 2, MY = 94998 + 2 = 95000), and the suppression function activation condition will be satisfied (the suppression function activation flag will be ON). In this particular situation, if the power is restored after a power outage occurs in the gaming machine, the special game that was being executed when the power was off will be resumed after the power is restored if the power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch). When the special game is resumed, even if one more game ball enters the big prize slot, the highlight effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlight effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative prize ball count reached "97500") will not be executed. That is, when the power is restored, the performance information regarding the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is cleared to zero), so even if the special game (the performance during a big win) is resumed after the power is restored, the cumulative prize ball count display will be displayed again from the initial value "0", and the execution conditions for the highlight effect (the conditions until the specific value is reached) will also be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the value of the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of power outage was in a situation where it would reach a specific value with one more game ball entering the large prize opening, in the special game resumed after the power is restored, the cumulative number of prize balls display will be restarted from the initial value "0", so even if one more game ball enters the large prize opening, the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97,500") will not be executed. However, even if the value of the cumulative number of prize balls returns to the initial value "0", if the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2500") by continuing the game after the power is restored, the highlighting effect will be executed each time the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches the specific value (a multiple of "2500"). In addition, if the power is cut off and then restored (without clearing the RAM) before the suppression function activation condition is satisfied, the MY counter is initialized when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), and therefore, after the power is restored, the MY counter starts counting again from the initial value "0". Therefore, even if the count value of the MY counter at the time of the power cut reaches the specified value "95000" when one more game ball enters the large prize opening, in the special game resumed after the power is restored, the MY counter will restart from the initial value "0", and therefore, even if one more game ball enters the large prize opening, the count value of the MY counter will not reach the specified value "95000", and the suppression function activation condition will not be satisfied (the suppression function activation flag will not be ON). However, even if the MY counter returns to its initial value of "0", if you continue playing after the power is restored and the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95,000", the suppression function activation condition will be met (the suppression function activation flag will be ON).

When a special game is being played, if one more game ball enters the large prize opening, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls will reach a specific value (a multiple of 2500). However, if one game ball enters the general prize opening before one more game ball enters the large prize opening, there is a situation (called a "specified situation") in which the value of the cumulative number of prize balls does not reach the specific value and the count value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined value of "90,000". Specifically, in a predetermined situation where the value of the cumulative number of prize balls during the execution of a special game is "97485" and the count value of the MY counter is "89998", if one more game ball enters the large prize opening (if 15 prize balls are paid out), the value of the cumulative number of prize balls will reach a specific value of "97500" and an emphasis effect will be executed, whereas if one game ball enters the general prize opening before one more game ball enters the large prize opening (if three prize balls are paid out), the value of the cumulative number of prize balls will not reach the specific value of "97500" and the count value of the MY counter will reach a prescribed value of "90000" (number of safes = 3, number of outs = 1, difference in number of balls = 3-1 = 2, MY = 89998 + 2 = 90000), thereby satisfying the advance warning condition. In this predetermined situation, when the power is restored after a power outage occurs in the gaming machine, if the power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), the special game that was being executed when the power was off will be resumed after the power is restored. When the special game is resumed, even if one more game ball enters the big prize hole, the highlight effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlight effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative prize ball count reached "97500") will not be executed. That is, when the power is restored, the performance information regarding the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is cleared to zero), so that even if the special game (the performance during the big win) is resumed after the power is restored, the cumulative prize ball count display will be displayed again from the initial value "0", and the execution conditions for the highlight effect (the conditions until the specific value is reached) will be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the value of the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of power outage was in a situation where it would reach a specific value with one more game ball entering the large prize opening, in the special game resumed after the power is restored, the cumulative number of prize balls display will be restarted from the initial value "0", so even if one more game ball enters the large prize opening, the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97,500") will not be executed. However, even if the value of the cumulative number of prize balls returns to the initial value "0", if the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2500") by continuing the game after the power is restored, the highlighting effect will be executed each time the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches the specific value (a multiple of "2500"). In addition, if the power is cut off and power is restored (power is restored without clearing the RAM) before the suppression function activation condition is satisfied, the MY counter is initialized when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), so after the power is restored, the MY counter starts counting again from the initial value "0". Therefore, even if the count value of the MY counter at the time of power cut reaches the predetermined value "90000" when one more game ball enters the large prize opening, in the special game resumed after the power is restored, the MY counter will restart from the initial value "0", so even if one more game ball enters the large prize opening, the count value of the MY counter will not reach the predetermined value "90000", and the advance notification condition will not be satisfied. However, even if the MY counter returns to the initial value "0", if the game is continued after the power is restored and the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90000", the advance notification condition will be satisfied. As a modified example, in the case where the aforementioned "count continuation switch" is mounted, if the power is turned off before the suppression function activation condition is satisfied, and the power is restored while the count continuation switch is operated (without clearing the RAM), the MY counter is not initialized (cleared) when the power is restored, but the pre-notification performance may not be resumed immediately after the power is restored. For example, if the power is turned off during the execution of the second unit notification performance (approximately 4500 shots remaining until activation) (when the count value of the MY counter is between "90500" and "90999"), and the power is restored by operating the count continuation switch (without clearing the RAM), the MY counter is not initialized (cleared) when the power is restored, but the second unit notification performance (approximately 4500 shots remaining until activation) is not resumed immediately after the power is restored, and the pre-notification performance may be resumed from the third unit notification performance (approximately 4000 shots remaining until activation) when the count value of the MY counter reaches "91000". As a further variation, in the case where the aforementioned "count continuation switch" is installed, if the power is cut off before the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied, and the power is restored while the count continuation switch is being operated (without clearing the RAM), the MY counter is not initialized (cleared) when the power is restored, but the pre-alarm display is not resumed immediately after the power is restored. For example, if the power is cut off while the second unit alarm display (approximately 4500 shots remaining until activation) is being executed (when the MY counter count value is between "90500" and "90999"), and the power is restored by operating the count continuation switch (without clearing the RAM), the MY counter is not initialized (cleared) when the power is restored, and the second unit alarm display (approximately 4500 shots remaining until activation) is resumed immediately after the power is restored.

During the execution of a special game, after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (after the suppression function activation flag is turned ON), there is a situation (called "Situation A") in which the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple value of 2500) by one more game ball entering the large prize opening. Specifically, in situation A, during the execution of a special game, in a situation in which the count value of the MY counter has already reached the specified value "95000" and the value of the cumulative number of prize balls is "97485", which is 15 balls less than the predetermined specific value "97500", by one more game ball entering the large prize opening (by paying out 15 prize balls), the value of the cumulative number of prize balls will reach the specific value "97500" and an emphasis effect will be executed. In this situation A, if the power is turned off in the gaming machine and the power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), the special game that was being executed before the power was turned off will be resumed, but after the special game is resumed, even if one more game ball enters the big prize hole, the cumulative prize ball count will not reach the specified value "97500", and the highlight effect that was scheduled before the power was turned off (the highlight effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative prize ball count reached "97500") will not be executed. That is, when the power is restored, the effect information regarding the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is cleared to zero), so even if the special game (the big win effect) is resumed after the power is restored, the cumulative prize ball count display will be displayed again from the initial value "0", and the execution conditions for the highlight effect (the conditions until the specific value is reached) will be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the value of the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of power outage was in a situation where it would reach a specific value with one more game ball entering the large prize opening, in the special game resumed after the power is restored, the cumulative number of prize balls display will be restarted from the initial value "0", so even if one more game ball enters the large prize opening, the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97,500") will not be executed. However, even if the value of the cumulative number of prize balls returns to the initial value "0", if the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2500") by continuing the game after the power is restored, the highlighting effect will be executed each time the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches the specific value (a multiple of "2500"). In addition, in this situation A, if the power is restored without clearing the RAM (if the power is restored without clearing the RAM after the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied), the MY counter is not initialized when the power is restored (the count value of the MY counter "95000" is not cleared), and the suppression function activation flag remains ON. Therefore, when the special game (big win end demo) that is resumed after the power is restored ends, the suppression function is activated, and at the same time or almost at the same time, the suppression notification performance is executed.

During the execution of a special game, after the advance notification condition is satisfied, i.e., after the advance notification performance is started, there is a situation (referred to as "Situation B") in which the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple value of 2500) by one more game ball entering the large prize opening. Specifically, in Situation B, during the execution of a special game, the count value of the MY counter has already reached a predetermined value of "90000" (however, it is preferable that the count value of the MY counter is "90000" or "90500" or the like, so that there is a margin before it reaches the specified value "95000"), and the value of the cumulative number of prize balls is "97485", which is 15 balls less than the predetermined specific value "97500", when one more game ball enters the large prize opening (15 prize balls are paid out), the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches the specific value "97500" and an emphasis performance is executed. In this situation B, if the power is turned off in the gaming machine and the power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), the special game that was being executed before the power was turned off will be resumed, but after the special game is resumed, even if one more game ball enters the big prize slot, the cumulative prize ball count will not reach the specified value "97500", and the highlight effect that was scheduled before the power was turned off (the highlight effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative prize ball count reached "97500") will not be executed. That is, when the power is restored, the performance information regarding the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is cleared to zero), so even if the special game (the big win performance) is resumed after the power is restored, the cumulative prize ball count display will be displayed again from the initial value "0", and the execution conditions for the highlight effect (the conditions until the specific value is reached) will be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the value of the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of power outage was in a situation where it would reach a specific value with one more game ball entering the large prize opening, in the special game resumed after the power is restored, the cumulative number of prize balls display will be restarted from the initial value "0", so even if one more game ball enters the large prize opening, the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97,500") will not be executed. However, even if the value of the cumulative number of prize balls returns to the initial value "0", if the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2500") by continuing the game after the power is restored, the highlighting effect will be executed each time the value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches the specific value (a multiple of "2500"). In addition, even if the pre-notification conditions are satisfied, if the power is turned off and power is restored (power is restored without clearing the RAM) before the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied, the MY counter is initialized when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), so when the special game is resumed after the power is restored, the MY counter will start counting again from the initial value "0". Therefore, after the power is restored, the pre-notification conditions are returned to a state in which they are not satisfied, and after the power is restored (the special game is resumed after the power is restored), the pre-notification effect that was being executed at the time of the most recent power outage will not be resumed (the pre-notification effect will not be executed). However, even if the MY counter returns to the initial value "0", if the game is continued after the power is restored, and the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90000" (if the pre-notification conditions are satisfied), the pre-notification effect will be executed.

The device is configured so that volume and light adjustments are disabled while the suppression function is in operation (while the suppression notification performance is being executed). In other words, when the suppression function is activated and the game is stopped, even if a volume adjustment operation is performed, the volume level does not change (the volume operation is invalid). Therefore, even if a volume adjustment operation is performed during the execution of the suppression notification performance, the volume level of the suppression notification sound (the sound saying "The suppression function has been activated") does not change, and the suppression notification sound is always output at a constant volume (a predetermined constant volume). As a modified example, the suppression notification sound may be output in an output mode according to the set volume level. Similarly, when the suppression function is activated and the game is stopped, even if a light adjustment operation is performed, the light level does not change (the light operation is invalid). Therefore, even if a light adjustment operation is performed during the execution of the suppression notification performance, the light amount of the frame lamp related to the suppression notification when fully lit does not change. However, even if the suppression function activation conditions are met, if a special game is being played, the suppression function is not activated (the suppression notification effect is not being executed), so volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment are possible during the special game. Note that if a pre-notification effect is being played, the volume level changes when a volume adjustment operation is performed (the volume operation becomes effective), and the light intensity level changes when a light intensity adjustment operation is performed (the light intensity operation becomes effective). Here, the pre-notification sound output effect may be configured to always be output at a constant volume (a predetermined constant volume) rather than in an output mode corresponding to the set volume level, or may be configured to be in an output mode corresponding to the set volume level.

The relationship between the various effects (standby demo effect, effect button operation, and the specified operation of the normal decorative pattern) and the suppression function is as follows. The standby demo effect can be executed (can be started) even during the execution of the advance notification effect, but the standby demo effect is not executed (started) while the suppression notification effect is being executed. Note that the advance notification effect can be executed (can be started) even during the execution of the standby demo effect and can be executed in parallel, but the suppression notification effect can be executed (can be started) even during the execution of the standby demo effect, while the standby demo effect is forcibly terminated. Note that the effect button operation can be executed (can be started) even during the advance notification effect, but the effect button operation is not executed (started) while the suppression notification effect is being executed. Note that the advance notification effect can be executed (can be started) even during the execution of the effect button operation and can be executed in parallel, but the suppression notification effect can be executed (can be started) even during the execution of the effect button operation, while the effect button operation is forcibly terminated. In addition, the specified actions of the normal decorative pattern (action at the start of fluctuation, action at temporary stop, action at the time of reach, swinging action) can be executed (can be started) even during the execution of the advance notification effect, but the specified actions of the normal decorative pattern are not executed (started) while the suppression notification effect is being executed. Note that the advance notification effect can be executed (can be started) even during the execution of the specified actions of the normal decorative pattern, and can be executed in parallel, but while the suppression notification effect can be executed (can be started) even during the execution of the specified actions of the normal decorative pattern, the specified actions of the normal decorative pattern are forcibly terminated.

<ECO Pachinko Machine>
44 shows the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment that adopts the specifications of the ECO pachinko machine. When realizing the ECO pachinko machine, it is roughly divided into the pachinko machine and the ECO unit EU installed outside the pachinko machine (each is configured to be detachable as a separate entity from the game parlor equipment), and the pachinko machine is roughly divided into the game board side and the game machine frame side (the game machine frame side is configured to be detachable from the game parlor equipment, and the game board side is configured to be detachable from the game machine frame side).

The gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an operation unit device 1050. The operation unit device 1050 is composed of a touch panel interface 1052, a ball count display unit 54, a sub input button SB (effect button), etc., and the touch panel interface 1052 is configured to display and use the gaming machine's game status information and the gaming medium information recorded on an IC card (gaming medium recording medium) inserted into the ECO unit EU (described later) by the player's touch operation (either contact type or non-contact type touch operation). The touch panel interface 1052 also has a performance display function, and is configured to be able to execute effects related to the game by commands from the sub main. The ball count display unit 54 also displays the number of balls held {the number of game balls that can be used for the game (fired into the game area)}. The sub input button SB is a device for operating the effects by the sub main side by the player's operation.

<ECO unit>
Next, the ECO unit EU is connected to the payout control board and the operation unit device 1050, and by inserting an IC card (membership card, general card) on which the player's personal game status information (particularly, information on the number of game media owned) is recorded, the game status information recorded on the IC card can be displayed on the operation unit device 1050, and the game status information can be used by operating the operation unit device 1050, and lending control and management control for lending electronic money, etc. can be performed. In addition, the ECO unit EU is connected to the hall computer via a network and is configured to be able to output game-related information, and authentication processing of the game machine frame and game board is also performed through the ECO unit EU. Incidentally, the ECO unit EU is supplied with power from a power source different from that of the game machine, and is also connected to the operation unit device 1050, and is configured to supply power to the operation unit device 1050 from the ECO unit EU.

Figure 45 shows an image of the processing between the ECO unit and the prize ball payout control board (particularly the process of adding, subtracting, and transferring the number of balls held). In this figure, the prize ball payout control board is always sending information about the number of balls held (information related to the number of game balls that can be used in a game (fired into the game area)) to the number of balls held display unit 1054, and the number of balls held display unit 1054 is repeatedly updating the display of the number of balls held. Also, an example is shown of a case where no errors occur in each process.

<Adding balls owned>
First, the ball lending process will be described as an example of the ball number addition process. First, when a ball lending operation is performed on the touch panel interface 1052 in (1), the touch panel interface 1052 transmits "ball lending operation information" in (2) to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU that has received the "ball lending operation information" executes the balance consumption of the IC card in the ball lending control process in (3) and transmits a "request to add number of balls" in (4) to the payout control board. Next, the payout control board that has received the "request to add number of balls" adds the number of game media equivalent to the balance consumed to the current number of balls in the ball number addition process in (5). When the process in (5) is completed, the payout control board transmits "addition completion information" in (6) to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU that has received the "addition completion information" transmits "ball lending completion display instruction" in (7) to the touch panel interface 1052. Next, the touch panel interface 1052 that receives the “ball lending completion display instruction” executes the ball lending completion display (8), and the ball lending process ends.

<Number of balls held subtracted>
Next, as an example of the ball count subtraction process, the ball consumption process (particularly the process related to the wagon service) will be described. First, when the wagon service usage operation is performed on the touch panel interface 1052 in (1), the touch panel interface 1052 transmits "ball consumption operation information" in (2) to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU, which has received the "ball consumption operation information", transmits a "request to subtract number of balls" in (3) to the payout control board. Next, the payout control board, which has received the "request to subtract number of balls", subtracts the number of game media to be consumed in the wagon service from the current number of balls in the ball count subtraction process in (4). When the process in (4) is completed, the payout control board transmits "subtraction completion information" in (5) to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU that has received the "subtraction completion information" transmits a "ball consumption completion display instruction" (6) to the touch panel interface 1052. Next, the touch panel interface 1052 that has received the "ball consumption completion display instruction" executes a (7) wagon service usage completion display, and the ball consumption process ends.

<Pitch count transfer process>
Next, the IC card return process will be described as an example of the ball count transfer process. First, when a return operation (IC card return operation) is performed on the touch panel interface 1052 in (1), the touch panel interface 1052 transmits the "return operation information" in (2) to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU that has received the "return operation information" transmits the "return number of balls" in (3) to the payout control board. Next, the payout control board that has received the "return number of balls" stops the game (for example, stops the launch of the game balls) in the ball count transfer process in (4), and confirms that there are no game balls (floating balls) flowing down the game board surface (for example, waits until the counter value of the enclosed game ball counter 3313 becomes the initial value) in the ball count transfer process in (5), and transmits the "ball count information" in (6) to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU that has received the "ball count information" temporarily stores the number of balls held based on the received information in the return control process (7) and sends a "request to clear the number of balls held" (8) to the payout control board. Next, the payout control board that has received the "request to clear the number of balls held" clears (zero-clears) the current number of balls held in the ball count transfer process (9) and sends "information that the number of balls has been cleared" (10) to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU that has received the "information that the number of balls has been cleared" adds the number of balls temporarily stored in the process (7) described above to the number of balls stored in the IC card inserted in the ECO unit in the return control process (11). Next, in the return control process (12), the ECO unit EU ejects (returns) the IC card from the IC card return port and sends a "return completion display instruction" (13) to the touch panel interface 1052. Next, the touch panel interface 1052 that has received the "return completion display instruction" executes the return completion display (14), and the IC card return process between the touch panel interface 1052 and the ECO unit EU is completed. Also, upon completion of the process (12), the ECO unit EU transmits "return completion information" (15) to the payout control board. Next, the payout control board that has received the "return completion information" cancels the game suspension executed in the process (4) and returns to a playable state (16), and the IC card return process between the ECO unit EU and the payout control board is completed.

<About the ball circulation mechanism>
Next, the circulation of game balls will be explained. In this pachinko game machine, a certain number of game balls (for example, 100 balls) are circulated within the pachinko game machine to enable play (hereinafter, the circulated game balls may be referred to as enclosed game balls), and the game can be played without supplying game balls from outside the game machine or discharging (paying out) game balls to the outside of the game machine.

First, enclosed game balls are stored in an enclosed game ball tank within the enclosed game ball count management means, and the enclosed game balls in the enclosed game ball tank are sent to the launching device by a ball sending solenoid mechanism, and the launch control device launches the game balls toward the play area on the play board side. Next, the game balls launched into the play area enter one of the ball entry ports, which are game peripheral devices, and flow from the game board side to the game machine frame side. The enclosed game balls that have flowed in are detected by prize ball permission sensors and out ball detection sensors corresponding to the ball entry ports provided in the play area, and are stored again in the enclosed game ball tank. Then, while the enclosed game balls are circulating inside the pachinko machine in this way, when a game ball is shot toward the game area on the game board side, or enters a ball entry port that is eligible for prize ball payout, the payout control board will award the prize ball to the player (addition/subtraction to the ball data).

In addition, because the game balls are configured to circulate, the machine is configured so that players cannot touch the game balls; specifically, it does not have the upper or lower trays of the underlying technology. This configuration makes it possible to prevent fraud, such as mixing in illegal game balls, such as game balls with smaller diameters than normal, balls with strings attached, or balls brought in from other stores, and makes it difficult to remove game balls circulating inside the gaming machine and prevent them from performing properly, making it an effective countermeasure against fraud.

The backup power supply for supplying power to the backup area is provided on the payout control board. This backup power supply is connected to the power supply unit E (power supply board) and receives power, so that even if a power outage occurs and power supply from the power supply unit E is cut off, power can be supplied from the backup power supply to the backup area, and a ball count counter, history, and various flags can be stored, and various payout information that is important for playing the game can be retained.

A backup power supply for supplying power to a backup area for holding a ball count counter, etc. is provided on the payout control board. By configuring it in this way, it can function as a dedicated backup power supply for holding a ball count counter, etc., and even if a harness connected to the payout control board is broken or disconnected, it can supply power stably without being affected, thereby increasing the reliability of the backup. Furthermore, by supplying power only to the backup area for holding a ball count counter, etc., the backup time can be extended even if the backup power supply is made smaller, and the payout control board can be made smaller, thereby saving space. In addition, a dedicated backup power supply for holding a ball count counter, etc. may be provided in the power supply unit E. By providing it in the power supply unit E, the payout control board can be made even smaller and lighter.

The backup power supply for maintaining the ball holding counter, etc., may be shared with the backup power supply for the main board provided in the power supply unit E. By sharing the backup power supply provided in the power supply unit E, the configuration related to the backup power supply can be simplified.

Furthermore, volatile memory is used as the RAM that stores the ball count counter and other data. Using volatile memory makes it cheaper, but in the event of a power outage, a backup power source must be provided to back up the volatile memory. In contrast, non-volatile memory may be used as the RAM that stores the ball count counter and other data. For example, the non-volatile memory can be a flash memory. By configuring it in this way, the backup power source can be omitted, making it possible to make the device smaller and lighter overall.

By configuring as described above, the ball is detected by both the ball entry detection device on the game board and the prize ball permission sensors on the game machine frame, and prize balls are awarded to the player only when the winning information (e.g., information related to the winning port type and number of winning balls) sent from the main board matches the basic prize ball number information stored on the payout control board, so that it is possible to prevent the acquisition of prize balls through fraudulent acts. In addition, by providing the prize ball permission sensors on the game machine frame, it is possible to reduce the cost of the game board (because the model replacement of pachinko game machines is mainly performed by replacing only the game board, and the game machine frame is often used repeatedly). In addition, for the winning that has awarded the player a prize ball, the prize port type and the number of prize balls can be displayed on a specified display unit (e.g., a winning information display device), so that it is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine in which the player can easily understand which winning port the ball entered and how many prize balls the player has obtained.

The payout control means also has a payout process related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing information related to the winning balls, and the payout process related information temporary storage means further has each winning counter for counting the number of winnings at each winning port received from the main board, a ball counter for counting the number of balls currently held by the player (the number of game media that can be used for playing), and an enclosed game ball counter for counting the number of game balls (enclosed game balls) currently present in the game machine frame. Here, the ball counter is a counter that stores the number of balls currently held by the player (the number of game media that can be used for playing). As a result of the player's game, the value of the ball counter may become zero, in other words, the number of balls currently held by the player may become zero. In such a case, it is necessary to stop the launch of the game balls. In other words, when the value of the ball counter becomes zero, it is necessary to control the game balls so that they are not launched even if the player operates the launch handle. The launching device has a launching motor and a ball feeding device (not shown), and the operation of the launching motor and the ball feeding device is controlled by a launching control board, which is the control circuit of the launching device, and the launching of the game ball can be stopped by interrupting (prohibiting) the supply of a drive signal to the launching motor. The launching control board can also stop the launching of the game ball by interrupting (prohibiting) the supply of a control signal to the ball feeding device.

<Total score display>
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the loaned game balls and the game balls obtained by entering a predetermined winning hole may be treated as pseudo game media capable of being calculated, and the game balls to be launched may be treated as actual game balls. In such a configuration, a total score display device capable of displaying the total number of game balls that can be launched may be provided. The total score display device has nine display sections formed of seven-segment LEDs, and is provided in a position that is easily visible to the player (for example, near the sub-input button SB). The nine (nine digits) display sections are composed of five (five digits) display sections for displaying total score information, two (two digits) display sections for displaying acquired score information, and two (two digits) display sections for displaying error information. The total number of game balls that can be launched, which is displayed on the total score display device, is configured to increase when game balls are loaned or when prize balls are obtained by entering a predetermined winning hole. The total number of game balls that can be launched, which is displayed on the total score display device, is stored in a storage device such as a RAM. The storage device can be, for example, a RAM built into the CPU of the main board. In addition, the total score display device can also be configured to have a separate storage device such as a RAM, so that both the main board and the total score display device can store information related to the total number of game balls that can be shot. In this way, the total score display device of the gaming machine according to this example can not only display the total number of game balls, but also store it.

In addition, the total score display device can be made capable of displaying the following information:
(1) Total score information The total score information is information that indicates the total number of points that can be shot. Note that a game ball that can be shot may be referred to as a score (1 ball = 1 point), and the total number of game balls that can be shot may be referred to as a total score.
(2) Acquired Point Information Acquired point information is information indicating the points (also called prize balls) acquired by a single ball entering a specified winning hole.
(3) Error information Information indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the main board and/or the payout control board. Here, as described above, the total score display device has five (5-digit) display sections for displaying total score information, two (2-digit) display sections for displaying acquired score information, and two (2-digit) display sections for displaying error information, for a total of nine display sections. The display section for displaying acquired score information and the display section for displaying error information may be used together. In this case, if an error occurs when the acquired score information is displayed, the displayed acquired score information is switched to error information. As an example, when an error occurs, different display modes are displayed according to the type of error, such as "E1", "E2", "E3", etc., and "E1" is displayed as an error when power off recovery cannot be performed normally. For example, when "*8"("*" indicates off) is displayed when eight balls are paid out, a power off occurs and the power off recovery cannot be performed normally, and when the power off recovery can be performed normally, "E1" may be displayed. Furthermore, the number of display sections can be changed as appropriate; for example, the number of display sections for displaying total score information may be four, allowing up to four digits of information to be displayed, or the number of display sections for displaying total score information may be six, allowing up to six digits of information to be displayed.

In addition, in a gaming machine capable of shooting 100 gaming balls per minute, if the payout rate is 2 when balls are continuously shot for one hour, the payout rate will be "IN: 100 x 60 = 6000, OUT: 12000". If the business hours of the gaming center are 14 hours, the payout rate will be "IN: 84000, OUT: 168000". In such a case, the total score displayed on the total score display device at the time the gaming center closes will be approximately "168000 - 84000 = 84000". Therefore, in such a configuration, it is preferable that the total score display device has five display sections for displaying the total score information and that information up to five digits can be displayed.

Among the multiple types of errors, when an unrecoverable error occurs that cannot be recovered from without executing the RAM clear process when changing the settings (an error that cannot be recovered from the situation immediately before the error occurred), the RAM of the main board and/or the payout control board is cleared when recovering, but by not clearing the information on the total score as described above, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged (for example, it is possible to prevent an unrecoverable error from occurring when the total score is "2000" points and the total score becoming "0" when recovering from the unrecoverable error). Even if the area (address) of the RAM containing the information on the total score is also to be cleared, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by storing the information on the total score in the CR unit as well and configuring it to transmit the information on the total score from the connection terminal board to the main board and/or the payout control board when recovering from the unrecoverable error. Also, if the total score display device is equipped with a RAM, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged even if an unrecoverable error occurs and recovery from the unrecoverable error is achieved by storing the information on the total score in the RAM. In other words, if there is a means for backing up the total score information (a memory area for backing up the total score information) even if a power outage occurs or the RAM of the main board and/or payout control board is cleared, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged even if an irrecoverable error occurs (the total score information may be configured to be stored in a memory area in the RAM of the main board and/or payout control board and in a memory area for backup, or it may be configured to be stored only in a memory area (a memory area for backup) that is not erased even if the RAM of the main board and/or payout control board is cleared.

<Information on the difference in number of balls>
In the gaming machine according to this example, the difference in the number of game balls (scores) during a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined period from when the player starts playing) (the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of all game balls shot from the number of all game balls paid out) may be configured to be able to be confirmed. For example, a display unit that displays the difference in the number of game balls may be provided in a position that is always visible to the player, or the display may be configured to be able to be displayed on the performance display device. In addition, when the display regarding the difference in the number of game balls is configured to be able to be displayed on the performance display device, the display regarding the difference in the number of game balls may be configured to be always displayed in a part of the display area of the performance display device, or the display regarding the difference in the number of game balls may be displayed on the performance display device on a menu screen that is displayed by operating the sub-input button SB during the operation effective period (or by operating the sub-input button SB again on the menu screen) (if the player wishes to check the difference in the number of game balls, the difference in the number of game balls may be configured to be able to be checked at any time by operating the sub-input button SB). The difference in the number of balls may be an increase or decrease in the total score from a predetermined timing such as the start of the game, and for example, if the total score at the start of the game is 2000 points (balls) and the current total score is 2500 points (balls), the difference in the number of balls may be +500 points (balls), and if the total score at the start of the game is 2000 points (balls) and the current total score is 1500 points (balls), the difference in the number of balls may be -500 points (balls). In addition, when the difference in the number of balls is displayed on a predetermined display unit (for example, a performance display device), the display color (display mode) may be different depending on the value of the difference in the number of balls, such as displaying in black when the difference in the number of balls is a positive value or 0, and displaying in red when the difference in the number of balls is a negative value.

In addition, the information regarding the difference in the number of balls may be configured so that the main board measures and calculates the information regarding the current difference in the number of balls and the number of game balls obtained by subtracting the current difference in the number of balls from a predetermined number, and stores it on the main board side.In addition, the information regarding the difference in the number of balls may be configured so that the information regarding the current difference in the number of balls and the number of game balls obtained by subtracting the current difference in the number of balls from a predetermined number, are measured and calculated by a board other than the main board (for example, the payout control board KH) and stored on the main board side.The main board may also be configured to transmit the information stored therein to the sub-board side.In addition, information regarding the difference in the number of balls may be received from another device so that the main board can grasp it.

In addition, the difference in the number of balls may be configured as follows.
(1) When the difference in the number of balls reaches a predetermined number, the progress of the game is stopped. As an example, the game balls may not be shot even if the player operates the shooting handle, the balls entering the winning hole may be invalidated, and various lotteries on the main board may not be executed.
(2) Information regarding the difference in the number of balls may be electromagnetically recorded on a predetermined recording medium, and furthermore, when a player starts playing, the information stored in the recording medium may be read, and the information regarding the difference in the number of balls may be inherited to allow the player to proceed with the game. In such a configuration, even if a player plays on multiple gaming machines in one day, the difference in the number of balls can be inherited and measured, and the difference in the number of balls for the player in one day can be grasped. Also, when the difference in the number of balls for a player in one day reaches a predetermined number, the game may be stopped as described above, and information that the difference in the number of balls has reached the predetermined number for stopping the game may be recorded on the recording medium, and the player may not be able to play (cannot lend out game balls) for a predetermined period (for example, until the next business day). Furthermore, in cases where a player plays on multiple gaming machines in one day, it is preferable to configure the system so that it is possible to know which player played which game.For example, it is preferable to record identification information that can identify which player is playing on the recording medium, and to configure the system so that when playing begins, the identification information can be referenced to read out information on the difference in the number of balls for that day.

In addition, when the progress of a game is stopped, the device may be configured to transmit information to that effect to another control board, such as a sub-board. For example, when transmitting information to a sub-board, it is possible to control the display of a specified display or to control the change in the display mode of a currently running performance, etc., based on the transmitted information, as described below.
(1) When the progress of the game is stopped, the effect display device may be configured to display, as a display that the progress of the game has been stopped, (1-1) in a layer in front of the currently displayed effect, a display indicating that the game has been stopped, taking up more than half of the display area of the effect display device, (1-2) display a predetermined attention-grabbing image (for example, a display saying "Pachinko is a game that should be enjoyed in moderation") in a layer in front of the currently displayed effect, or (1-3) erase the display of the currently displayed effect and display a display indicating that the progress of the game has been stopped in the entire display area of the effect display device. Also, when displaying the display indicating that the progress of the game has been stopped, a sound dedicated to the display may be output (for example, "The game will end. Be careful not to get addicted to it"), or a game effect lamp may be lit in a lighting mode dedicated to the display.
(2) If the difference in the number of balls reaches the specified number during a jackpot, during the start of a demo time, or during a pattern change related to a jackpot pattern, (2-1) the process to stop the game progress is not executed, and the game progress is stopped when the difference in the number of balls decreases by more than the number of game balls that increased due to the jackpot, or (2-2) the game progress is stopped and the game progress can be resumed only by an operation that is impossible for the player (for example, an operation that can only be performed by the game center manager), or the game cannot be resumed unless the RAM is cleared when the settings are changed.

In addition, when the predetermined number at which the game progress stops has not been reached, information regarding the difference in the number of balls may be transmitted from the main board to the sub-board. In such a case, the sub-board may display or output a sound to the effect that the game progress is about to stop when the difference in the number of balls is reduced by a certain number to the predetermined number at which the game progress stops (for example, when the predetermined number is reached by shooting 100 more balls). In addition, for example, when the predetermined number is -2500 points (balls), the sub-board may be configured to execute a notice effect (for example, a conversation effect) more frequently during the pattern change when the difference in the number of balls is a value relatively far from the predetermined number (for example, +1000 balls) than when the difference in the number of balls is a value relatively close to the predetermined number (for example, -2000 balls).

<What happens when the total score reaches the upper limit>
In addition, the total score may increase when a payout of a game ball occurs, but an upper limit may be set for the total score, and the total score may not increase when the total score reaches the predetermined value. As an example, if the size of the memory area for the total score is 2 bytes, the total score that can be stored is 0 to 65535, and the upper limit of the total score is 65535. In such a configuration, when the total score is 65510, if a game ball enters the big prize opening and 15 balls are paid out, the score of 15 points (balls) is added to the total score, and the total score becomes 65525. On the other hand, when the total score is 65530, if a game ball enters the big prize opening and 15 balls are paid out, the score of 15 points (balls) is added to the total score, which exceeds the upper limit of 65535 for the total score, so the score of 5 points (balls) is added to the total score, and the total score becomes the upper limit of 65535. In addition, when the total score is at the upper limit, even if information to increase the total score is received from the CR unit CRU (sometimes called the ECO unit), the total score may be configured not to increase (for example, inserting bills into the CR unit CRU is disabled, or the operation of a button provided on the CR unit CRU for lending out points is disabled). In addition, when a situation occurs in which the total score reaches (exceeds) the upper limit due to winning, an error may occur and the progress of the game may be stopped. In addition, when a situation occurs in which the total score reaches (exceeds) the upper limit due to winning, the overall score may be displayed by changing the display format, such as by displaying the upper digits in hexadecimal, or by scrolling or switching the display.

<Configuration of gaming value information>
The gaming machine may be configured to transmit information indicating that the value of one gaming ball or one score is a first value (e.g., 4 yen) and information indicating that the value of one gaming ball or one score is a second value (e.g., 1 yen) lower than the first value from a connection terminal board, which is a terminal board provided in the gaming machine, to a main board (hereinafter, the main board may be a payout control board). The information indicating the first value and the information indicating the second value may be referred to as gaming value information. In addition, when configured in this way, the main board may be configured to store whether the information indicating the first value or the information indicating the second value has been received. Also, the main board may be configured to be able to check whether the game value information stored therein matches the game value information received from the connection terminal board, and the timing of the check may be (1) to check whether they match at all times, (2) every time a predetermined number of game balls are shot (for example, the number of shot balls is measured by counting the number of balls discharged), (3) every predetermined period (for example, every hour), (4) after power is restored after a power outage occurs, or (5) after a RAM clear process related to a setting change is executed. Also, if it is determined that the game value information stored in the main board and the game value information received from the connection terminal board do not match as a result of checking whether the game value information stored therein matches, for example, if the game value information stored in the main board is a first value and the game value information received from the connection terminal board is a second value, the game may be stopped until the game value information matches, and the game balls may not be shot, balls entering the winning slot may be invalidated, or the score (total score) settlement process may be made impossible.

In addition, as described above, when the main board is configured to transmit information indicating that the game has been stopped from the main board to the sub-board when the game progress is stopped, (1) when the main board stores game value information, which is the first value, and when the difference in the number of balls reaches a predetermined value, the game progress is stopped and a presentation indicating that the game progress has been stopped is executed, whereas when the main board stores game value information, which is the second value, and when the difference in the number of balls reaches a predetermined value, the game progress is not stopped and a presentation indicating that the game progress has been stopped is not executed. (2) when the main board stores game value information, which is the first value, and when the difference in the number of balls reaches a predetermined value, the game progress is stopped and a presentation indicating that the game progress has been stopped is executed. (3) When the main board stores game value information that is the first value, the game progress is stopped and a performance that the game progress is stopped is executed when the difference in the number of balls reaches a predetermined value (for example, -2500 balls), and when the main board stores game value information that is the second value, the game progress is stopped and a performance that the game progress is stopped is executed when the difference in the number of balls reaches a specific value (for example, -10000 balls) that is a value less than the predetermined value. Note that, although the game is configured to be able to execute a performance that the game progress is stopped based on the difference in the number of balls, the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance regarding the stop of the game progress may be executed based on information regarding the loan amount of the score (game value, game balls, points) that can be calculated based on the difference in the number of balls and the game value information. In addition, the presentation mode when the main board is storing the game value information, which is the first value, and the presentation mode when the main board is storing the game value information, which is the second value, and the presentation mode when the main board is storing the game value information, which is the second value, and the presentation mode when the main board is storing the game value information, and the presentation mode when the main board is storing the game value information, which is the second value, and the presentation mode when the presentation is performed, which is based on the amount of money used by the player, can be appropriately prevented from becoming addicted to the game.

<Configuration of game ending operation>
Also, the game machine may be configured to have a settlement button, and the player may operate the settlement button to transmit information relating to the score from the main board to the connection terminal board (this operation allows the game to end). If a power outage occurs while the information relating to the score is being transmitted, after the power is restored, the game machine may be configured to (1) transmit the information relating to the score again from the main board to the connection terminal board, or (2) transmit a request signal from the connection terminal board to the main board requesting that the information relating to the excess score be transmitted again, and then transmit the information relating to the score again from the main board to the connection terminal board.

In addition, if the settlement button is operated while the door unit is open, (1) the process related to the settlement of points may be executed, or (2) the process related to the settlement of points may not be executed. In addition, if the door unit is opened immediately after the settlement button is operated, the process related to the settlement of points may be configured to continue to be executed without interruption.

When the settlement button is operated in the setting confirmation state, (1) the process related to score settlement is executed when the setting value can be confirmed, (2) the process related to score settlement is executed when the setting value cannot be confirmed, (3) the process related to score settlement is not executed when the setting value can be confirmed, or (4) the process related to score settlement is not executed when the setting value cannot be confirmed.

When the settlement button is operated in the setting change mode, (1) the process related to score settlement is executed while remaining in the setting change mode, (2) the setting change mode is ended and the process related to score settlement is executed, (3) the process related to score settlement is not executed while remaining in the setting change mode, or (4) the setting change mode is ended and the process related to score settlement is not executed.

When the settlement button is operated while the main game symbols are changing, (1) the process related to the settlement of the score is executed while the main game symbols are changing, or (2) the process related to the settlement of the score is not executed while the main game symbols are changing.

When the settlement button is operated during a big win (or a small win), (1) the process related to the settlement of the points is executed while the big win (or small win) is still in progress, or (2) the process related to the settlement of the points is not executed while the big win (or small win) is still in progress.

As described above, even if an unintended event (power outage, error) occurs while score-related information is being sent or received between the main board and the connection terminal board, score-related information can be sent or received accurately. In addition to or in addition to the above-mentioned configuration, the sending side may be configured to (1) include data indicating that transmission has ended in the score-related information (e.g., have end bit information in the case of serial communication), and (2) send information indicating the end after sending the score-related information. In addition, the receiving side may be configured to send reception completion information indicating that the information has been received to the sending side after receiving the transmitted score-related information.

Figure 46 shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko machine in the second embodiment that adopts the specifications of an ECO pachinko machine. The difference from Figure 44 is the configuration of the operation unit device 1050. Specifically, the operation unit device 1050 is provided with a ball count display device MU and an ECO unit operation panel ES.

Next, FIG. 47 is a diagram showing details of the operation unit device 1050 in FIG. 46. The ball count display device MU is provided with a ball count display section 1501, a settlement number setting display section 1502, an information display section 1503, a full settlement button 1504, a partial settlement button 1505, and a settlement unit number setting button 1506, and the ECO unit operation panel ES is provided with a settled display section 601, a replay button 602, a card balance display section 603, a loan button 604, a card return button 605, and a status display section 606.

The ball count display unit 1501 is, for example, a 6-digit 7-segment LED, and can display up to "999,999" balls stored (held) on the gaming machine side. The settlement number setting display unit 1502 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and can display up to "9,999" balls per unit when settling a portion of the ball count. By operating the up or down button of the settlement unit number setting button 1506 arranged corresponding to each digit, it is possible to set the unit settlement number for each digit. The information display unit 1503 is composed of an LED that can display English characters (not shown), and can display error information when an error occurs and a settlement confirmation, which will be described later. Specifically, if there is a communication abnormality between the payout control board and the ball count display unit 1501, "E1" is displayed, and if there is a communication abnormality between the payout control board and the ECO unit EU, "E2" is displayed, and other information indicating an error is displayed. It is preferable to configure the ball count display unit 1501 so that it does not display any information other than the ball count (e.g., error information, etc.). Note that the above number of digits is merely an example, and it is okay to change it.

The full settlement button 1504 is made up of a mechanical switch or the like, and is a button that is operated when settling the game balls (held balls) stored (held) on the gaming machine side, and is configured so that its operation surface is the largest among the held ball count display device MU. Note that in order to prevent erroneous operation, the full settlement process is configured to be performed by operating it multiple times. The partial settlement button 1505 is made up of a mechanical switch or the like, and is a button that is operated when settling some of the game balls (held balls) stored (held) on the gaming machine side, and is configured so that its operation surface is smaller than that of the above-mentioned full settlement button 1504. Note that in order to prevent erroneous operation, as with the full settlement process, the partial settlement process is configured to be performed by operating it multiple times.

Next, the ECO unit operation panel ES will be described. The settled display section 601 is, for example, configured with a 6-digit 7-segment LED, similar to the ball number display section 1501, and can display up to "999,999" balls of the player managed by the ECO unit. The card balance display section 603 is, for example, configured with a 3-digit 7-segment LED, and can display the balance (points) recorded on the IC card. The loan button 604 is, for example, configured with a mechanical switch, etc., and is a button operated when lending game balls within the range of the balance (points) recorded on the IC card. The card return button 605 is, for example, configured with a mechanical switch, etc., and is a button operated by the player when removing the IC card. The replay button 602 is, for example, configured with a mechanical switch, etc., and is a button for making the settled game balls displayed on the settled display section 601 available for use when operated by the player. Although details will be described later, control in response to various button inputs on the ECO unit operation panel ES, display control, etc., are performed by the control unit on the ECO unit side.

Figure 48 shows the general electrical configuration of a pachinko game machine. The pachinko game machine is equipped with a CPU that performs various calculation processes, a ROM that stores in advance programs that define the CPU's calculation processes, and a RAM that temporarily stores data handled by the CPU (such as various data generated during play and computer programs read from the ROM). The machine is also equipped with a payout control board that controls the launch of game balls and the addition and subtraction control of the balls held data corresponding to the consumption of game balls by the awarding and launching of prize balls, a balls held number display device MU that is provided with various display units such as the balls held number display unit 1501 described above and various input operation units such as the total settlement button 1504, an ECO unit connection terminal board for relaying information sent and received between the payout control board and the ECO unit EU, and an ECO unit operation panel ES that is provided with various display units such as the card balance display unit 603 described above and various input operation units such as the loan button 604. The ECO unit connection terminal board is used to relay information sent and received between the payout control board and the ECO unit EU, and the ECO unit operation panel ES is provided with various display units such as the card balance display unit 603 described above and various input operation units such as the loan button 604. The ECO unit connection terminal board is used to communicate information with the ECO unit EU that is installed outside the pachinko game machine and is provided with appropriate control functions. In this specification, the ECO unit EU is sometimes described as part of the pachinko machine, but here it is described as a separate device from the pachinko machine.

<Dispensing control board>
The payout control board is configured to control the operation of balls held in the game (addition, subtraction, etc.) based on information from the main board and the ECO unit EU (mainly information that is used to add to the player's balls), the launch detection sensor or the ball feed sensor described below (mainly information that is used to subtract from the player's balls), etc., and to control the display of the ball information and the operation of the launch device (launch handle, launch motor, ball feed device, etc.).

The payout control board also has a transmission/reception control means for transmitting and receiving information related to the prize balls, a payout control means for controlling the processing related to the payout of the prize balls, a launch control means for controlling the processing related to the launch of the game balls, and an initial processing control means for when power is interrupted and when power is restored for controlling the processing when power is interrupted on the payout control board side.

Here, the transmission/reception control means has a reception control means for controlling the reception of information, and a transmission control means for controlling the transmission of information. The reception control means further has a main side reception information temporary storage means for temporarily storing information received from the main board, and an ECO unit side reception information temporary storage means for temporarily storing information received from the ECO unit EU.

Next, the payout control means has a temporary payout processing related information storage means for temporarily storing information related to winning balls, and the temporary payout processing related information storage means further has winning counters for counting the number of winning balls at each winning port received from the main board, a ball count counter for counting the number of balls the player currently has (the number of gaming media that can be used for playing), and an enclosed ball count counter for counting the number of gaming balls (enclosed gaming balls) currently present within the gaming machine frame.

Next, the launch control means has a launch control related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing information related to the launch control of the game ball.

Next, the power interruption/power recovery initial processing control means has a power interruption information temporary storage means for temporarily storing (backing up) information at the time of power interruption. Here, although not shown, a backup power source for supplying power to the power interruption information temporary storage means is provided on the payout control board. This backup power source is connected to the power supply unit and is powered. Even if the power supply from the power supply unit is cut off when a power interruption occurs, power can be supplied from the backup power source to the power interruption information temporary storage means. The number of unpaid balls and the number of balls held (for example, the value of the held ball counter, the number of enclosed game balls counter, etc.) stored in the payout control board at the time of power interruption and various flags can be stored and held even during the power interruption, and various payout information that is important for playing can be held. The value of the number of enclosed game balls counter may be configured to be cleared when the power is restored. Needless to say, the power interruption information temporary storage means can be configured by a RAM common to the payout processing related information temporary storage means, or by temporarily storing the payout processing related information temporary storage means itself.

<ECO unit>
Next, the ECO unit EU is similar to a card unit R and is connected to the ECO unit operation panel ES via an ECO unit connection terminal board. By inserting an IC card (membership card, general card) on which the player's personal status information (e.g., card balance and number of gaming media held) is recorded, the status information recorded on the IC card can be displayed on the ECO unit operation panel ES. It is also configured so that by operating the input operation section (loan button 604, card return button 605) of the ECO unit operation panel ES, it is possible to control the lending of gaming balls using the card balance and number of gaming media held recorded on the IC card, and to perform control processing based on various information transmitted from the gaming machine.

<ECO unit connection terminal board>
The ECO unit connection terminal board, which will be described in detail later, is a board for connecting the dispensing control board and the ECO unit EU, and the ECO unit EU and the ECO unit operation panel ES, and various signals are sent and received via this ECO unit connection terminal board.

Note that although the ECO unit connection terminal board is illustrated as receiving bidirectional inputs of signals from the dispensing control board, ECO unit operation panel ES, and ECO unit EU, the ECO unit EU is merely configured to control the ECO unit operation panel ES, and the dispensing control board is not configured to receive status information relating to the ECO unit operation panel ES.

<Pitch count display>
Next, the ball number display device MU has a ball number display section 1501 for displaying the number of balls held, a settlement number setting display section 1502 for displaying the number of game balls to be settled for partial settlement described later, an information display section 1503 capable of displaying error information etc. when an error etc. occurs, and an input operation section that can be operated by the player. The input operation section of the ball number display device MU has a full settlement button 1504 for settling all game balls acquired, a partial settlement button 503 for settling a portion of the game balls acquired, and a settlement unit number setting button 1506 for setting the number of game balls to be partially settled.

<ECO unit operation panel>
Next, the ECO unit operation panel ES has a settled display section 601 that displays the number of settled game balls, a card balance display section 603 for displaying status information (e.g., card balance) recorded on an IC card (membership card, general card) inserted into the ECO unit EU, a status display section 606 that displays an error when a communication abnormality occurs between the ECO unit EU and the ECO unit operation panel ES, and an input operation section of the ECO unit operation panel. The input operation section of the ECO unit operation panel ES has a replay button 602 that is operated when playing again with settled game balls, a lending button 604 for lending game balls, and a card return button 605 for removing the IC card (membership card, general card) inserted into the ECO unit EU.

Next, we will explain the information (e.g., information and signals) that is sent and received. First, we will explain the information sent and received between the pachinko game machine (payout control board) and the ECO unit EU. As mentioned above, information is sent and received between the game machine (payout control board) and the ECO unit EU via the ECO unit connection terminal board.

Specifically, the signals (information) transmitted from the ECO unit EU to the pachinko game machine (ECO unit connection terminal board) include an operation panel drive signal for operating the ECO unit operation panel ES, a loan request signal for loaning game balls, a unit RDY signal indicating that the ECO unit is able to receive information from the game machine (is in a ready state), and status information managed by the ECO unit, such as an error status on the ECO unit side. On the other hand, the signals (information) transmitted from the gaming machine (ECO unit connection terminal board) to the ECO unit EU include gaming machine information (setting value information, information on the ratio of features for each setting, ball entry status information, external output information (jackpot signal, probability of winning signal, pattern change signal, winning signal, prize ball signal, loan signal, etc.), ball count information, etc.), operation information (settlement information) of the input operation unit of the ball count display device, a gaming machine RDY signal indicating that information can be received from the ECO unit EU (preparation is complete), and an operation signal from the input operation unit of the ECO unit operation panel ES. The loan request signal and unit RDY signal are input to the payout control board, and the gaming machine information, settlement information, and gaming machine RDY signal are output from the payout control board.

Next, information transmitted and received between the ECO unit operation panel ES and the ECO unit EU via the ECO unit connection terminal board will be described. An operation signal is transmitted from the ECO unit operation panel ES to the ECO unit EU, indicating that the loan button 604 on the input operation section of the ECO unit operation panel ES has been operated, and that the card return button 605 has been operated. Meanwhile, an operation panel drive signal is output from the ECO unit EU to the ECO unit operation panel ES to drive the display sections such as the settled display section 601, the card balance display section 603, and the status display section 606, and various information (e.g., card balance information) recorded on the IC card inserted in the ECO unit EU is displayed on the corresponding display section (e.g., the card balance display section 603) of the ECO unit operation panel ES.

Next, we will explain the information transmitted and received between the payout control board and the ball count display device MU. The payout control board sends to the ball count display device MU ball count information (e.g., ball count counter information stored in the payout processing related information temporary storage means) and abnormality information for displaying error information, etc. on the information display unit 1503 of the ball count display device MU. The ball count display device MU sends to the payout control board input operation information of the input operation unit of the ball count display device MU (full settlement button 1504, partial settlement button 1505, settlement unit number setting button 1506).

When the full settlement button 1504 and the partial settlement button 1505 are pressed at the same time (when the pressing of both the full settlement button 1504 and the partial settlement button 1505 is detected in one timer interrupt process), the partial settlement process is configured to take priority. Also, when one button is pressed after the other, the earlier press is considered valid and processing is performed.

In addition, if the full settlement button 1504 and the partial settlement button 1505 are pressed simultaneously in one timer interrupt process, neither process may be performed. By configuring in this way, for example, when there are balls in hand and it becomes necessary to clean the ball count display device MU of the operation unit device 1050, it is possible to avoid a situation in which either the full settlement button 1504 or the partial settlement button 1505 is inadvertently pressed by wiping and cleaning while maintaining the full settlement button 1504 and the partial settlement button 1505 pressed simultaneously. At this time, it is desirable to not perform either process on the condition that the full settlement button 1504 and the partial settlement button 1505 are detected to be pressed in one timer interrupt process, but the criteria for determining simultaneous pressing are not limited to this, and if the pressing of one button is detected within a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) after the pressing of the other button is detected, it may be considered to be simultaneous pressing. Needless to say, it would be easy to adopt a similar configuration for the rental button 604 and return button 605 on the ECO unit operation panel ES.

In this way, in the full settlement process, the first operation of the full settlement button 1504 displays a settlement confirmation display (for example, a process of displaying "Are you sure you want to settle all your bills?" using the information display unit 1503, etc.), and the second operation of the full settlement button 1504 executes the full settlement. The settlement confirmation display displayed by the first operation is erased after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), and if the full settlement button 1504 is operated after it has been erased, the settlement confirmation display will be displayed again. In other words, the full settlement is not executed until the second operation is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the first operation. As a result, even if the full settlement button 1504 is operated by mistake, the full settlement is immediately performed, and the game will not stop. It is also possible to execute the full settlement process on the condition that the full settlement button 1504 is operated continuously for a certain period of time (for example, it is turned on for more than 3 seconds) as a process to prevent erroneous operation of the full settlement button 1504.

When an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine due to a communication error process or the like (for example, an abnormality that causes the progress of the game to stop), it is desirable to configure the system so that the settlement information is stored in a specific memory area and cannot be deleted by normal clearing processing. In addition, when such an abnormality occurs, it is desirable to configure the system so that the settlement number information cannot be resent to the ECO unit unless special maintenance operations are performed. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent activities using communication abnormalities.

In this way, in the partial settlement process, in order to settle the partial settlement number (settlement number displayed on the settlement number setting display section 1502) set by operating the settlement unit number setting button 1506, a settlement confirmation request process (for example, a process of displaying "Are you sure you want to settle the partial settlement?" on the information display section 1503, etc.) is performed by the first operation, and partial settlement is executed by the second operation. Note that the settlement confirmation display displayed by the first operation is erased after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, and if the partial settlement button 1505 is operated after it has been erased, the settlement confirmation display will be displayed again. In other words, partial settlement is not executed until the second operation is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the first operation. This prevents the partial settlement button 1505 from being operated accidentally when the number of balls held is low, resulting in immediate settlement and stopping the game. In addition, since the player can set the partial settlement number at will and the setting value at the time of the second settlement can be reflected, efficient partial settlement can be realized.

In addition, as a process to prevent erroneous operation of the partial settlement button 1505, it is also possible to execute the partial settlement process on the condition that the partial settlement button 1505 has been operated continuously for a certain period of time. It is also desirable to disable input to the settlement unit number setting button 1506 for a certain period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) after the partial settlement button is operated for the first time, so that the partial settlement number cannot be changed. Furthermore, it is also preferable to set the partial settlement number to a default value (e.g., 100 units) before the player operates the settlement unit number setting button 1506 for the first time, so that a certain amount of partial settlement can be executed without the player having to set the partial settlement number.

Here, we will describe some variations on how to set the partial settlement amount.

(There are several types of settlement units that are preset, for example, 250, 500, 750, 100
0, etc.)
(1) A configuration may be adopted in which multiple settlement units (e.g., 250, 500, 750, 1000, etc.) are set in advance, and when the settlement unit number setting button 1506 corresponding to each settlement unit is operated, the settlement number can be set according to that unit. Specifically, when the settlement unit number setting button 1506 corresponding to the settlement unit "250" is operated, "250" is added to the display in the settlement number setting display section 1502, and when the settlement unit number setting button 1506 corresponding to the settlement unit "500" is operated, "500" is added to the display in the settlement number setting display section 1502, etc.
(2) In the case where the settlement unit number is preset in multiple types (e.g., 250, 500, 750, 1000, etc.), if the number of balls held is less than the minimum settlement unit and the minimum settlement unit is set as the settlement number, full settlement will be performed. Specifically, when the number of balls held is "249", if the minimum settlement unit "250" is set, "249" will be settled, and when the number of balls held is "2400", partial settlement can be set up to "2250".

(Multiple settlement unit numbers are set in advance, for example, 100, 200, 300, etc.)
If the number of balls held is "99" or less, settlement is only possible with full settlement. Alternatively, if the number is set to "100" or more, settlement is configured to be based on the number of balls held. For example, if the number of balls held is "1850," partial settlement can be set up to "1800."

(A configuration in which the number of settlement units corresponding to the number of prizes exchanged at each gaming facility is prepared)
For example, if an arcade specifies that balls can be exchanged for 40 drinks or 150 cigarettes, the settlement unit numbers corresponding to these can be set in the settlement unit number setting buttons 1506 (e.g., button 1 = 40 balls, button 2 = 150 balls, etc.). This configuration allows a player to partially settle the number of balls corresponding to a desired prize with a single input or a small number of operations without having to set the number of balls, which is expected to facilitate smooth prize exchange. Note that the prize and the number of exchanged balls do not necessarily need to be displayed as a set, and only the number of exchanged balls may be displayed.

In addition, the following configuration can be applied as a display method for subtracting the number of balls displayed in the number of balls display section 1501 when the full settlement button 1504 or partial settlement button 1505 is operated.
(1) Switching the display of the number of balls in possession For example, if the number of balls in possession display section 1501 shows "1,000" and the full settlement button 1504 is operated a second time, the display in the number of balls in possession display section 1501 will switch from "1,000" to "0." If the partial settlement button is operated a second time, the value obtained by subtracting the partial settlement number set by the settlement unit number setting button 1506 will be displayed. If the number of balls in possession display section 1501 shows "1,000" and the set partial settlement number was "750," the display in the number of balls in possession display section 1501 will switch from "1,000" to "250."
(2) Decrement display For example, if the ball count display section 1501 shows "1,000" and the full settlement button 1504 is operated a second time, the ball count display section 1501 will display "1,000" ⇒ "999" ⇒ "998" ⇒ ... "0". If the partial settlement button is operated a second time, the number of balls displayed will be decremented to the value obtained by subtracting the partial settlement number set by the settlement unit number setting button 1506. If the ball count display section 1501 shows "1,000" and the partial settlement number set was "750", the ball count display section 1501 will display "1,000" ⇒ "999" ⇒ "998" ⇒ ... "250".
(3) The number of balls in possession flashes for a predetermined period of time before switching the display. For example, if the number of balls in possession display section 1501 shows "1,000" and the full settlement button 1504 is operated a second time, the number of balls in possession display section 1501 flashes "1,000" for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) and then switches to "0." If the partial settlement button is operated a second time, the number of balls in possession flashes and then displays the value obtained by subtracting the partial settlement number set by the settlement unit number setting button 1506. If the number of balls in possession display section 1501 shows "1,000" and the set partial settlement number was "750," the number of balls in possession display section 1501 flashes "1,000" for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) and then switches to "250."

In this way, various configurations can be applied to switch the display of the number of balls held at the time of settlement. However, if the display of the number of balls held is switched immediately after the settlement button is operated (examples (1) and (2) above), the settlement will be made without the player being able to check how many balls he or she had, so it is preferable to have a configuration such as (3) that makes it possible to know the number of balls held.

As a variation of the display method for subtracting the number of balls held, the following configuration is also possible.
1. The configuration of "(3) turning on the number of balls held for a predetermined time and then switching the display" does not necessarily have to be turned on and off as long as the player can grasp the number of balls held, and may be configured to turn on for only 3000 ms, for example.
2. The configuration of "(3) blinking the number of balls held for a predetermined time and then switching the display" or the configuration of "1. lighting the number of balls held for a predetermined time and then switching the display" can also be applied to the configuration of "(2) performing a decrement display." In other words, it is also possible to configure the number of balls held to be blinked/lit for a predetermined time (e.g., 3000 ms) and then perform a decrement display.

As explained above, it is also possible to change the loan request signal (contents of the request) from the ECO unit in response to the operation of the loan button 604 or the operation of the replay button 602 depending on the situation when the loan button 604 is operated. Specifically, it is assumed that only settled game balls are recorded on the IC card, or that both the balance and settled game balls are recorded, and in this case, it is possible to configure it so that the settled game balls displayed on the settled display unit 601 are used rather than using the recorded balance. Also, rather than processing the loan button 604 and the replay button 602 as independent input functions for the loan process, it is possible to configure the device so that when the replay button 602 is operated once, the replay button 602 lights up, and when the loan button 604 is operated at this time, the player can start playing with the settled game balls, and when the loan button 604 is operated again when the replay button 602 is turned off, the balance recorded on the IC card is subtracted and game balls are loaned out.

Although the term "button" has been used in the explanation, the "button" is not limited to a button as a device, but may be a button display as an image, and specifically, each display unit may be configured to be a touch panel, and by operating (pressing) the button image displayed on the display unit, full settlement, partial settlement, setting of settlement unit number, etc. may be possible. In addition, while the configuration has been such that settlement (full settlement, partial settlement) is performed by multiple operations, this is not limited, and settlement may be performed by pressing and holding, etc. In this way, by configuring settlement to be performed by multiple operations or a long press, etc., it is possible to perform settlement reflecting the player's intention, without immediately performing settlement, even if the full settlement button 1504 or partial settlement button 1505 is operated by mistake.

Figure 49 shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko machine in the third embodiment that adopts the specifications of an enclosed pachinko machine. The pachinko machine is an enclosed pachinko machine, and is broadly divided into the pachinko machine itself and a rental unit KU installed outside the pachinko machine (each of which is configured to be detachable as a separate entity from the amusement parlor equipment), and the pachinko machine is broadly divided into a game board side and a game machine frame side (the game machine frame side is configured to be detachable from the amusement parlor equipment, and the game board side is configured to be detachable from the game machine frame side). Below, the structure related to the pachinko machine will be explained in order.

First, the pachinko gaming machine has an operation unit device 1050. The operation unit device 1050 is composed of a game ball count display W10, a sub-input button SB, a cross key SB2, a count button W40 (also called a transfer button), etc., and the game ball count display W10 displays the number of balls held {the number of game balls that can be used in a game (fired into the game area)}. The sub-input button SB and the cross key SB2 are devices for operating the presentation on the sub-board side by the player's operation. The number of balls held is sometimes referred to as the counter value of the ball count counter. The game ball count display W10 is also provided in a position visible to the player.

Figure 50 shows the details of the operation unit device 1050. First, the game ball count display W10 is configured with 6-digit 7-segment numbers aligned in a horizontal row, and can display up to 999,999 balls stored (held) on the gaming machine side. The number of balls held is stored using a ball count counter. Details regarding the display of the game ball count display W10 will be described later.

The upper limit of the number of balls that can be displayed on the game ball count display W10 is set to "999,999", but with this configuration, in order to determine whether the upper limit has been exceeded, it becomes necessary to have an area that can store "1,000,000", which is one digit more than "999,999". Therefore, the upper limit of the number of balls that can be displayed may be set to "990,000", or to a value that does not change the number of digits displayed even if the number of balls exceeds the upper limit. With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether the number of balls has exceeded the upper limit with simple processing.

The frame control display (a display consisting of 6-digit 7-segment displays aligned horizontally, capable of displaying the base value (such as a value related to the base in a low base state that can be displayed on the performance display section) and the number of balls held (counter value of the ball count counter), which is installed on the rear side of the gaming machine and can be seen from the rear of the gaming machine; in other words, unlike the game ball count display W10, it is not visible to the player) can also display the number of balls held, so the upper limit of the number of balls that can be displayed is "999,999". However, just like the game ball count display W10, the frame control display may also set the upper limit to "990,000" so that the number of digits displayed does not change even if the number of balls held exceeds the upper limit.

When the number of balls held exceeds the upper limit that can be displayed, one or more of the following configurations may be applied.
(1) The RAM of the main board is not updated. (2) The RAM of the frame control board W (which controls the number of balls held, such as display control of the game ball count display W10, display control of the frame control display, and control of communication with the lending unit KU) is not updated. (3) The lending device KU does not lend game balls. (4) It is impossible to launch game balls. (5) Even if a game ball enters the winning hole, no prize ball is generated. (6) The number of balls held is counted by operating the counting button W40. (7) Special games are not played.

In addition, if the number of balls held exceeds a predetermined value (a value smaller than the upper limit of the number of balls that can be displayed, for example, 40,000 balls), an error notification may be issued, or a notification urging the player to count the number of balls held may be issued. As a specific example, if the number of balls held exceeds 40,000 balls, an error notification may be issued by a lamp on the main board, a notification to prompt the player to count may be issued by a lamp on the main board, a message "Please count" may be displayed on the performance display device SG on the sub-board, or a message "Please count" may be issued by a voice from a speaker on the sub-board. By configuring in this way, even if the number of balls held exceeds the upper limit, and a prize ball is not generated even if a game ball enters the winning hole, the player can recognize that the count should be executed at 40,000 balls, which is smaller than the upper limit, and the player can be prevented from suffering the disadvantage of not receiving a prize ball.

When configured in this way, the system may be configured so that, on the condition that the number of balls held falls below a predetermined value (40,000 in this example), the error related to the number of balls held exceeding the predetermined value is cleared, or the counting notification is terminated (the notification via a lamp or the like on the main board side is terminated, the display of "Please perform counting" on the performance display device SG on the sub-board side is hidden, the notification of "Please perform counting" via audio from the speaker on the sub-board side is terminated, etc.).

The condition for clearing the error or terminating the notification related to the count may also be set to a specific value (e.g., 37,000 balls) that is smaller than a predetermined value for the number of balls held. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of frequent errors occurring and being cleared (notifications being issued and terminated) caused by the number of balls held repeatedly exceeding and falling below the predetermined value (40,000 balls in this example).

Next, the count button W40 is a button for outputting the number of balls held to the lending unit KU. Note that outputting the number of balls held to the lending unit KU is sometimes referred to as counting the number of balls held or settling the number of balls held. The detailed action of operating the count button will be described later.

A display unit may be provided that displays the number of game balls counted by operating the count button. For example, when the count button is operated, the number of game balls counted may be displayed on a four-digit seven-segment LED for a predetermined period of time.

The sub-input button SB and cross key SB2 are similar to those described above and are connected to a sub-board, and by operating the sub-input button SB or cross key SB2, you can progress through the button performance, which is a preview performance, select and confirm each item on the menu screen, and adjust the volume and light intensity.

In this example, the game ball count display W10 and the frame control display are configured to display the counter value of the ball count counter as the number of balls the player has. Note that the counter value of the ball count counter is sometimes referred to as ball count data, and even in this case, it should be noted that the ball count data is numerical data. The counter value of the ball count counter is sometimes referred to as the number of balls held. The game ball count display W10 is sometimes referred to as the first display unit, and the frame control display is sometimes referred to as the second display unit.

When the gaming machine is turned on with the game ball count clear button turned on (operated), a game ball count clear process is executed. The game ball count clear button is located on the back side of the gaming machine and is configured so that it cannot be operated by the player. By having a game ball count clear button and being able to execute the game ball count clear process, even if the gaming arcade closes with a non-zero number of balls (such as when a player leaves one ball), it is possible to prevent a situation where the arcade starts business with balls still remaining by executing the game ball count clear process before the opening of the next day.

When the power of the gaming machine is turned on with the ball removal button turned on (operated), it is configured to transition to the ball removal state. The ball removal button is located on the back side of the gaming machine and is configured not to be operated by the player. When it transitions to the ball removal state, the gaming balls inside the pachinko gaming machine can be removed from the gaming machine (for example, part of the flow path through which the ball passes after entering the ball entrance is opened), and in the ball removal state, the shooting of the gaming balls is possible, but the progress of the game is stopped (the winning of the winning entrance is invalidated, the pattern change is not performed, the jackpot is not performed, etc.). Note that the entry of the winning entrance is invalidated may be that when a gaming ball enters the winning entrance, the entry of the gaming ball is not detected, or that the entry of the gaming ball is detected but no prize balls based on the winning are generated.

The characteristic features of this embodiment will be described below.
<Configuration 1>
The normal reserved image 506 in FIG. 30 includes a first reserved image indicating a normal reserved state and a second reserved image indicating a high expectation of a transition to a special game. The first reserved image is, for example, a reserved image that is lit in white. The second reserved image is a reserved image that is lit in a different color so that it can be distinguished from the first reserved image (the first normal reserved image 506a, the second normal reserved image 506b, and the fourth normal reserved image 506d) in appearance, such as the third normal reserved image 506c in FIG. 30(a). In particular, it is lit in a conspicuous color, such as red or rainbow, to suggest a high expectation. The normal reserved image 506 is also called a reserved icon.

While displaying the pattern change corresponding to the first reserved image (the pattern change that is executed when the reserved corresponding to the first reserved image is consumed), a screen deformation effect can be executed as a special effect. Also, while displaying the pattern change corresponding to the second reserved image (the pattern change that is executed when the reserved corresponding to the second reserved image is consumed), a screen deformation effect can be executed as a special effect. Note that the screen deformation effect is an effect described in FIG. 32, FIG. 33, etc., and is an effect that adds deformation such as enlargement, reduction, movement, distortion, shaking, tilt, cracking, color inversion, color conversion, etc. to the frame image included in the displayed image together with the frame image arranged around it. The frame images that are subject to this deformation include the normal reserved image 506 that corresponds to the remaining reserved image. Note that when simply referring to a "reserved image", it refers to the normal reserved image 506.

<Configuration 2>
When a reservation corresponding to a new ball entering the starting winning hole occurs, the normal reservation image 506 is not displayed suddenly, but is displayed with a predetermined animation that gradually appears in order to indicate that a reservation has occurred. After the normal reservation image 506 starts to be displayed with a predetermined animation display, a specific animation display that is different from the predetermined animation display (for example, an animation display in which the normal reservation image 506 swings back and forth, rotates 360 degrees clockwise, or shines for 0.2 seconds after 1.8 seconds has passed) can be displayed in a loop. The animation display state of the normal reservation image 506 is maintained by repeatedly displaying the specific animation display multiple times in a loop. The above-mentioned predetermined animation display is a part of the animation process in which the normal reservation image 506 gradually appears until it appears completely. The above-mentioned specific animation display is a part of a short animation pattern in which the normal reservation image 506, which has completely appeared in the above-mentioned predetermined animation display, swings back and forth. A specific animation display is repeatedly displayed in a loop, so that an animation in which the normal reserved image 506 continuously swings from side to side is expressed, and this animation continues until a pattern change corresponding to the normal reserved image 506 starts.

At least one of the predetermined animation display and the specific animation display can be displayed even during the execution of a screen deformation performance as a special performance (i.e., the animation display can be executed even if a new hold occurs during the execution of a screen deformation performance), and at least one of the predetermined animation display and the specific animation display can be displayed after the normal hold image 506 becomes the target of deformation in the screen deformation performance (i.e., the normal hold image 506 is displayed in a deformed state, and the animation display can be executed in a manner synchronized with the deformed state; specifically, when the normal hold image 506 is displayed tilted, the animation display is also executed in a manner in which the normal hold image 506 is tilted). This allows the screen deformation performance to have a sense of unity across the entire screen. In addition, it is preferable that the predetermined animation display in the first reserved image and the predetermined animation display in the second reserved image have different display modes (for example, the former is an animation that is gradually displayed from the bottom, and the latter is an animation that is gradually enlarged and displayed, etc.), and a reserved image generation sound corresponding to the first reserved image (for example, a sound of "pico" with an output period of 0.5 seconds and output at a low volume) may be output when the predetermined animation display in the first reserved image starts to be executed, and a reserved image generation sound corresponding to the second reserved image (for example, a sound of "boom!" with an output period of 1 second and output at a high volume) may be output when the predetermined animation display in the second reserved image starts to be executed. Alternatively, a reserved image generation sound may not be output even when the predetermined animation display in the first reserved image starts to be executed (the device does not have a reserved image generation sound corresponding to the first reserved image), and a reserved image generation sound corresponding to the second reserved image (for example, a sound of "boom!" with an output period of 1 second and output at a high volume) may be output when the predetermined animation display in the second reserved image starts to be executed. Also, it is preferable that the specific animation display in the first pending image and the specific animation display in the second pending image have the same display form (for example, an animation that swings back and forth), but they may be different display forms (for example, the former is an animation that swings back and forth, and the latter is an animation that rotates 360 degrees clockwise). Note that no sound effects are output in response to the execution of the specific animation display (there is no sound effect triggered by the start of the loop display of the specific animation display).

<Configuration 3>
When a new hold occurs while the screen transformation performance is not being performed, a first hold image can be displayed as the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the hold that has occurred, and at that time, the first hold image can be displayed with at least one of a predetermined animation display and a specific animation display, and when a new hold occurs during the execution of the screen transformation performance, a first hold image can be displayed as the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the hold that has occurred, and at that time, the first hold image can be displayed with at least one of a predetermined animation display and a specific animation display. On the other hand, when a new hold occurs while the screen transformation performance is not being performed, a second hold image can be displayed as the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the hold that has occurred, and at that time, the second hold image can be displayed with at least one of a predetermined animation display and a specific animation display, but when a new hold occurs during the execution of the screen transformation performance, the second hold image is not displayed as the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the hold that has occurred, that is, the second hold image is not displayed during the execution of the screen transformation performance. This allows screen transformation effects to be executed with priority so that situations that should be noticed do not overlap.

<Configuration 4>
The winning performance is a performance that can be executed at the start of displaying the first reserved image and at the start of displaying the second reserved image. The winning performance is, for example, a lighting performance in a predetermined manner when a reservation occurs (for example, a performance in which the frame lamp or the board lamp lights up in red, and the lighting is executed for 5 seconds or until the reservation that triggered the lighting is consumed) and a flashing performance at the time of winning (also called a "winning flash performance") that generates a sound output performance (for example, a sound of "Zubabababa!", outputted at a loud or extra loud volume for an output period of 3 seconds). The winning performance may be, for example, the special ball entry pre-reading performance described in FIG. 42, and it is desirable that the performance is a performance in which an intense notification sound is output and the decorative lamp 111 is intensely illuminated when a new ball is entered into the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12.

When the first pending image starts to be displayed while the screen transformation effect is being executed, it does not involve the execution of the winning effect. This allows the screen transformation effect to be executed with priority so that situations that should be noted do not overlap. As a variation, if the winning effect and the special winning look-ahead effect are different effects, when the first pending image starts to be displayed while the screen transformation effect is being executed, it may be configured so that it does not involve the execution of the winning effect, but may involve the execution of the special winning look-ahead effect.

<Configuration 5>
When a new reservation occurs during the execution of the screen transformation performance, the normal reservation image 506 may be transformed in the screen transformation performance and display the normal reservation image 506 corresponding to the new reservation. On the other hand, even if a new reservation occurs during the execution of the screen transformation performance, the reservation number display (simple reservation image 507 in FIG. 30) is not transformed in the special performance (i.e., without being transformed like the screen transformation performance) and is updated and displayed. For example, when a new reservation occurs when the reservation number display is 0, the reservation number display is updated from 0 to 1. More specifically, when a screen transformation performance is executed in a situation where two reservations exist and a new reservation occurs during the execution of the screen transformation performance, the normal reservation image 506 corresponding to the third reservation is transformed (e.g., enlarged or tilted) and displayed, while the reservation number display is updated from 2 to 3 without transforming (e.g., enlarged or tilted) its display mode.

The execution time of the animation display of the normal pending image 506 is longer than the update time of the pending number display, and the execution time of the screen transformation effect is longer than the execution time of the animation display of the normal pending image 506. The execution time of the screen transformation effect varies depending on the period for which the transformed state is maintained, but as an example, it is desirable that it is 5 seconds at the shortest and 60 seconds at the longest. The update time of the pending number display is, for example, the time equivalent to one frame of the video display (if the video frame rate is, for example, 30 fps, one frame is 1/30 seconds). The execution time of the animation display of the normal pending image 506 is, for example, 0.3 to 1 second. The execution time of the screen transformation effect is, for example, 5 seconds. Therefore, the relationship is: update time of the pending number display < execution time of the animation display of the normal pending image 506 < execution time of the screen transformation effect (time to maintain the transformation of the frame image).

<Configuration 6>
In the first presentation pattern in which the screen deformation presentation is executed, it is more likely that a predetermined high expectation presentation (such as a super reach presentation or a high expectation movable role presentation described later) in which the normal reserved image 506 is not displayed during the pattern change is executed than in the second presentation pattern in which the screen deformation presentation is not executed. The pattern change presentation pattern when the first presentation pattern is executed is (or is highly likely to be) a pattern change presentation pattern with high expectation (a winning or losing variation in which a super reach presentation is executed after a reach occurs), such as a pattern change presentation pattern in which a super reach presentation is executed. In addition, the pattern change presentation pattern when the second presentation pattern is executed is (or is highly likely to be) a normal losing pattern change presentation pattern (a losing variation that ends in a short time without a reach occurring).

When a specified high expectation effect is being executed, the reserved image 506 is normally hidden, but the reserved number display can be displayed. This allows the screen transformation effect to have a sense of unity across the entire screen, while allowing for a period of time during which a high expectation effect will be executed in the subsequent developments, and does not prevent the player from understanding the current game state even in such a situation.

<Configuration 7>
In the specific pattern change, which is a pattern change that is executed when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a specific result (miss) different from a predetermined result (hit), and which is a pattern change accompanied by the execution of a predetermined high expectation performance, a screen deformation performance can be executed while the stage background image is displayed before the development into the predetermined high expectation performance. The display of the stage background image before the development into the predetermined high expectation performance is a normal reach period 670 described in FIG. 43. On the other hand, the screen deformation performance is not executed while the stage background image that is redisplayed after the end of the predetermined high expectation performance in the specific pattern change is displayed. The period during which the stage background image is redisplayed after the end of the predetermined high expectation performance is a stop display period 674 described in FIG. 43. In this way, by making the execution of the screen deformation performance different before and after the execution of the high expectation performance such as the super reach performance, it is possible to concentrate the situation that requires attention only in the first half, so that the player can have expectations for the subsequent development, while not hindering the afterglow of the miss in the second half. In the normal reach period 670 and the stop display period 674, the normal reserved image 506 can be displayed, the reserved number can be displayed, the normal decorative pattern 502 can be displayed, and the simple decorative pattern 504 can be displayed, but in the entire period or at least a part of the period in which a predetermined high expectation performance is executed (super reach period 672), the normal reserved image 506 is not displayed, the reserved number can be displayed, the normal decorative pattern 502 is not displayed, and the simple decorative pattern 504 can be displayed. Also, even if a new reserved occurs in the normal reach period 670 and the stop display period 674, the first reserved image can be displayed with a predetermined animation display or a specific animation display, but the second reserved image is not displayed with a predetermined animation display or a specific animation display (it is never displayed in the first place).

<Configuration 8>
The normal decorative pattern 502 can be displayed in a second display mode (e.g., a mode in which the pattern is swaying from side to side, or a mode in which the numbers or characters are facing diagonally) when a predetermined period has elapsed since the pattern change display in the first display mode (e.g., a stationary mode, or a mode in which the numbers or characters are facing forward) has stopped. The first display mode is a pattern change mode of the normal decorative pattern 502, and is the process from the start of the change of the normal decorative pattern 502 to the stop of the change. The second display mode is, for example, a display mode in which the normal decorative pattern 502 is oscillated. If the game is in a standby state at the time when a predetermined period, for example, 3 seconds, has elapsed since the normal decorative pattern 502 stopped changing (in other words, if a new change display is not started because there is no reservation after the normal decorative pattern 502 stopped changing), the display mode is switched to the second display mode in which the normal decorative pattern 502 is oscillated.

When the normal decorative pattern 502 is in the first display mode, the screen deformation effect can be executed, whereas when the normal decorative pattern 502 is in the second display mode, the screen deformation effect is not executed. When the normal decorative pattern 502 is moving in a manner that indicates a special situation, such as in the second display mode, it is possible to ensure that the visibility of that movement is not impeded.

<Configuration 9>
The suppression notification effect in the suppression function described above is an effect (notification effect when the suppression function is activated) that notifies the end of the game when the count value MY, which is specific information related to the difference between the number of awarded balls and the number of balls used, reaches a predetermined specified value (for example, "95000"). If the suppression notification effect is executed because the specific information reaches a predetermined specified value during the execution of the screen deformation effect, the screen deformation effect is interrupted. When the count value MY, which is specific information, reaches a predetermined specified value (for example, "95000"), the suppression function activation flag is turned ON. This allows the suppression function based on the specified value to be appropriately activated and to maintain an appropriate state even after activation, thereby accurately notifying the player. Note that the count value MY may be a specification that can increment from 0 to reach the specified value of 95000, or a specification that can decrement from 95000 to reach the specified value of 0, so long as the upper limit of the count is substantially 95000.

<Configuration 10>
The suppression notification effect is not subject to deformation in the screen deformation effect (i.e., it does not deform like the screen deformation effect), and a new screen deformation effect is not executed during execution of the suppression notification effect. The suppression notification effect is not displayed, for example, on the effect layer 524 in FIG. 33, and is not subject to deformation in the screen deformation effect (i.e., it does not deform like the screen deformation effect). The suppression notification effect is displayed, for example, on the game status layer 523 or the error display layer 521 in FIG. 33, and is preferentially displayed on a layer on the front side of the effect layer 524 on which the screen deformation effect is displayed. This allows the suppression function based on the specified value to be appropriately activated, and the appropriate state to be maintained even after activation, thereby allowing the notification to the player to be performed appropriately.

<Configuration 11>
The pre-notification effect in the suppression function described above is an effect (pre-activation notification effect of the suppression function) that suggests that the suppression function is scheduled to be activated soon when the count value MY, which is specific information, reaches a specific specified value (for example, "90000"). The pre-notification effect is not subject to deformation in the screen deformation effect (i.e., it does not deform like the screen deformation effect), while a pre-notification effect is being executed, a new screen deformation effect can be executed. The pre-notification effect is not displayed on the effect layer 524 in FIG. 33, for example, and is not subject to deformation in the screen deformation effect (i.e., it does not deform like the screen deformation effect). This allows the pre-notification of the suppression function to be activated appropriately and flexibly, and the appropriate state to be maintained even after activation, thereby allowing the notification to the player to be executed appropriately.

<Configuration 12>
The advance notification effect and the screen deformation effect can be executed simultaneously (the screen deformation effect can be started while the advance notification effect is being executed, and the advance notification effect can be executed when specific information reaches a specific specified value while the screen deformation effect is being executed), while the advance notification effect is displayed in front of the screen deformation effect. The advance notification effect is displayed, for example, in the game status layer 523 or the error display layer 521 in Fig. 33, and is preferentially displayed in a layer in front of the effect layer 524 in which the screen deformation effect is displayed. This allows the advance notification of the suppression function to be activated appropriately and flexibly, and the appropriate state to be maintained even after activation, thereby allowing the notification to the player to be implemented accurately.

<Configuration 13>
The advance notification effect of the suppression function and the display of the reserved number can be executed simultaneously (the advance notification effect can be executed when the specific information reaches a specific specified value while the reserved number display is being executed), but they are not displayed overlapping each other. The reserved number display is, for example, the simple reserved image 507 in the game status layer 523 of FIG. 33, and the advance notification effect can be displayed simultaneously in a position that does not overlap with the simple reserved image 507.

<Configuration 14>
In a special situation where there is a specific hold related to a high expectation performance variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern in which a super reach performance is executed) that can execute a screen deformation performance, and the difference number until the specific information reaches a predetermined specified value is one ball, if there are two or more winning balls for a predetermined winning ball without a power outage before the specific hold is consumed, the screen deformation performance is not executed after the winning ball. This is because the suppression function is activated after the winning ball. Note that once the count value MY reaches the specified value and the suppression function activation flag is ON, even if the power is turned off and the power is restored, the suppression function activation flag is not cleared and does not become OFF, unless the power off and power restoration are accompanied by RAM clearing. Therefore, the suppression notification performance will also be activated after the power is restored.

On the other hand, in the above special situation, if there is a power outage and then a power recovery before the specific reserved ball is consumed, and there are two or more winning balls for the one specific winning ball, the screen deformation effect may be executed after the winning ball. This is because in the above special situation, if there is a power outage and then a power recovery before the specific reserved ball is consumed, and there are two or more winning balls for the one specific winning ball, the count value MY will be cleared. In this way, if no irregular situation occurs, the execution of the screen deformation effect is prioritized, and even if an irregular situation occurs, the possibility of executing the screen deformation effect remains, so that the range of effects is not narrowed.

<Configuration 15>
In a predetermined situation before the suppression notification effect is executed, a predetermined waiting effect (waiting demo screen, waiting demo effect) indicating that the game is waiting can be executed, and during the execution of the predetermined waiting effect in the predetermined situation, the screen transformation effect is not executed, but the reserved number display can be executed. The waiting effect here is, for example, an effect as shown in the screen example of Figure 40 (c), and the reserved number display such as the simple reserved image 507 may be displayed on a layer in front of the layer on which the waiting effect is displayed.

After (during) the suppression notification effect is executed, none of the specified waiting effects, screen deformation effects, or hold number display are executed. This is because the game ends due to the suppression function. In this way, while it is possible to properly notify the player of the situation while waiting to play, if the suppression function is activated from that situation, it is possible to realize a notification that does not lead the player to mistakenly believe that the game is in a waiting state and does not impair the visibility of the display content.

<Configuration 16>
In addition, even during the standby performance, it is possible to switch to the suppressed notification performance (to end the standby performance) when the specific information reaches a predetermined specified value. Also, even during the standby performance, it is possible to simultaneously execute the advance notification performance when the specific information reaches a certain specified value.

<Configuration 17>
In a situation where a launch notification effect is being executed to encourage a launch toward the big prize winning hole in a big win start demo effect executed during the start demo time, which is the start of a special game, a screen deformation effect is not executed, and even if the specific information reaches a predetermined specified value, a suppression notification effect is not executed. The launch notification effect here is not a right-hit guide displayed in a small way like the guide display 530 displayed in the game status layer 523 of FIG. 33, but a full-screen display that displays a large character string such as "Aim at the attacker!" to strongly recommend the launch direction to the player. Note that while the launch notification effect is being executed, the guide display 530 is also executed at the same time, and during the subsequent round play (especially the second round and thereafter) and the end demo time, the launch notification effect is not executed, but the guide display 530 is executed. Also, even in a high base state, the launch notification effect is not executed, but the guide display 530 is executed.

On the other hand, in a situation where the launch notification effect is being executed in the jackpot start demo effect, the screen deformation effect is not executed, but the advance notification effect can be executed simultaneously when the specific information reaches a specific specified value. In other words, the advance notification effect may be displayed on a layer in front of the layer on which the launch notification effect is displayed. In this way, both the execution of the special game, which is an opportunity to gain profits, and the notification that it is necessary to hit to the right can be executed reliably and in a manner that does not impede visibility. Note that the advance notification effect and the launch notification effect may be executed simultaneously and displayed superimposed, but it is preferable that the advance notification effect and the guide display 530 be configured to be executed simultaneously but not superimposed (display areas are separate).

<Configuration 18>
It is possible to execute a movable role performance using a movable role that is driven according to the performance content and performs a performance-oriented operation, and it is possible to execute a high-expectation movable role performance as a movable role performance that suggests a high expectation of transition to a special game. The movable role is, for example, the movable role 520 in FIG. 34, and suggests a high expectation of transition to a special game by operating at a predetermined timing. However, while the movable role 520a to 520d in FIG. 34 operate during the execution of a screen transformation performance, the high-expectation movable role performance in the configuration 18 is a performance that is not executed during the execution of a screen transformation performance. For example, it is a performance in which a performance that encourages the player to press the performance button 109 at the timing of a win/loss branch point in the final stage of a super reach performance other than the screen transformation performance is displayed, and a movable role appears when the player presses the performance button 109 and a jackpot occurs.

While the screen transformation performance is in progress, the high expectation movable role performance is not executed (and the screen transformation performance is not executed while the high expectation movable role performance is in progress), but the initial operation of the movable role, which is executed in response to the power being restored after a power outage, can be executed even while the screen transformation performance is in progress. The initial operation of the movable role is the operation of the movable role that is executed, for example, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored after a power outage, and is the operation of putting the movable role into an operating state and then returning it to its initial position. In other words, specifically, during the initial operation when the power is turned on or when the power is restored after a power outage, the variable display is started, the screen transformation performance is started at a predetermined timing in the variable display, and the initial operation has not been completed at the predetermined timing.

During the high-expectation movable role performance, the normal decorative pattern 502 and the normal reserved image 506 are hidden, but the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple reserved image 507 (reserved number display) are displayed. On the other hand, during the initial operation of the movable role, the normal decorative pattern 502, the simple decorative pattern 504, the normal reserved image 506, and the simple reserved image 507 (reserved number display) can all be displayed. This allows for the most exciting performance of the high-expectation movable role performance to be performed in conjunction with other image performances without being disturbed. On the other hand, for the initial operation of the movable role, which is the same or similar operation, the performance restriction of not displaying the normal decorative pattern 502 and the normal reserved image 506 can be removed, and the performance can be performed flexibly. In other words, the initial operation of the movable role can be performed in parallel with the initialization process after power is turned on, and the performance can proceed while prioritizing recovery from power outage.

<Configuration 19>
As shown in FIG. 40 and FIG. 41, the effect setting change for changing the effect setting regarding the execution frequency of the look-ahead effect can be executed according to the operation input of the player. When the first mode is set, the display frequency of the second reserved image is the first frequency (for example, the frequency of displaying at 30% when the jackpot is reserved and at 1% when the loss is reserved), while when the second mode is set, the display frequency of the second reserved image is the second frequency that is lower than the first frequency (for example, the frequency of displaying at 30% when the jackpot is reserved and at 0.3% when the loss is reserved, or the frequency of displaying at 20% when the jackpot is reserved and at 0.2% when the loss is reserved). By changing the effect setting on the screens such as FIG. 41 and FIG. 42, it is possible to set which mode is to be the first mode (the frequency of the look-ahead effect in which the look-ahead chance mode is turned off is normal) or the second mode (the frequency of the look-ahead effect in which the look-ahead chance mode is turned on is low).

<Configuration 20>
During the execution of the screen transformation performance, the display frequency of the first reserved image when a hold occurs is the same regardless of whether the first mode or the second mode is set. During the execution of the screen transformation performance, the execution of the look-ahead performance that displays the second reserved image may be restricted so as not to hinder the screen transformation performance. In this way, during the execution of the screen transformation performance, by making the execution frequency of the look-ahead performance uniform, it is possible to create a situation in which the attention is not drawn to the execution or non-execution of the look-ahead performance, but to the screen transformation performance that is currently being executed. In addition, as a modified example, in a change in which the screen transformation performance is executed, a super reach performance is executed after the execution of the screen transformation performance, and a miss is suggested or notified in the super reach performance (for example, the normal decorative pattern 502 is displayed in a display mode other than a double number, or a performance in which the enemy character is defeated is executed), and then the above-mentioned stop display period 674 occurs, the display frequency of the first reserved image when a hold occurs in the stop display period 674 may also be configured to be the same, and the execution of the look-ahead performance that displays the second reserved image may be restricted.

<Configuration 21>
Even during the execution of a screen transformation performance, it is possible to execute a volume setting as shown in Fig. 40(b), but it is not possible to execute a change in the performance setting on the screens as shown in Fig. 41 and Fig. 42. However, in a modified example, it is possible to execute a volume setting as shown in Fig. 40(b) even during the execution of a screen transformation performance, while it is also possible to execute a change in the performance setting on the screens as shown in Fig. 41 and Fig. 42.

<Configuration 22>
The volume adjustment screen as shown in FIG. 40(b) is not a target for transformation in the screen transformation performance (i.e., it does not transform like the screen transformation performance), and the performance setting change screen as shown in FIG. 41 or FIG. 42 is also not a target for transformation in the screen transformation performance (i.e., it does not transform like the screen transformation performance). The number of color types used in the volume adjustment screen is, for example, only one color such as green, which is less than the number of color types used in the normal decorative pattern 502. Many types of colors are used in the normal decorative pattern 502 (for example, two colors for numbers, ten colors for characters attached to the numbers, a total of 12 colors, etc.). The number of color types (for example, three colors) used in the performance setting change screen is also less than the number of color types used in the normal decorative pattern 502. The colors used in the performance setting change screen are, for example, two to three colors, such as a black character string displayed in a frame painted in white.

<Configuration 23>
The content of the presentation can be changed by a first operation by the player (for example, pressing the presentation button 109 while a specific presentation is being performed). Specifically, by pressing the presentation button 109 while the button image is being displayed (during the operation valid period), the button image is hidden, and instead a presentation triggered by the pressing (such as the aforementioned dialogue preview presentation) occurs, or, as in the aforementioned light-emitting presentation, by repeatedly pressing the button, the light-emitting color of the decorative lamps 111 around the presentation display device 60 and the color of the effect display (color as an image) that imitates light on the presentation display device 60 are changed. The volume can be adjusted by a second operation by the player (for example, pressing the up and down keys of the cross key 110 while the volume adjustment screen as shown in FIG. 40(b) is being displayed, and the same is true even during the variable display, but if the volume adjustment screen is not displayed, pressing the up and down keys of the cross key 110 displays the volume adjustment screen, and then pressing the up and down keys of the cross key 110 again from there) (the display mode of the image showing the volume level displayed on the volume adjustment screen also changes, that is, it changes to an image showing the changed volume level). Mode setting can be performed by the player through a third operation (for example, pressing the cross key 110 or the effect button 109 while the effect setting change screen as shown in Figures 41 and 42 is displayed; if a variable display is being displayed, there is no need to press the effect button 109; the effect setting change screen can be displayed by pressing the left or right key of the cross key 110, and from there the left or right key of the cross key 110 can be pressed again).

If the first operation is continued (for example, if the effect button 109 is pressed and held while a specific effect is being executed), it is regarded as a continuous input of the first operation, that is, it is processed as an automatic successive press of multiple times. On the other hand, if the second operation is continued (for example, if the up and down keys of the cross key 110 are pressed and held while the volume adjustment screen is displayed), the second operation is not regarded as a continuous input (automatic successive press), and is processed as a single press of the up and down keys. Therefore, even if the up and down keys are pressed and held, the volume does not continue to increase or decrease. Similarly, if the third operation is continued (for example, if the cross key 110 or the effect button 109 is pressed and held while the effect setting change screen is displayed), the third operation is not regarded as a continuous input (automatic successive press), and is processed as a single press of the cross key 110 or the effect button 109. Therefore, even if the cross key 110 or the effect button 109 is pressed and held, the mode setting operation is not continuously input and the setting is not continuously switched (it is not repeated from on → off → on → off → ...).

<Configuration 24>
If the second operation continues before power is turned on and continues after power is turned on, the volume is not changed after power is turned on. For example, if the cross key 110 is pressed down by mistake when power is turned on, the volume does not increase or decrease by mistake after power is turned on, and can remain at the default value. Since the second operation before power is turned on cannot detect the rising edge of the press signal indicating the button press, it is not considered to be pressed even if the button is continued to be pressed after power is turned on, and the press is not detected unless the button is pressed again and the press signal rises. In this way, it is possible to prevent unexpected events such as unintended volume changes from occurring.

<Configuration 25>
If the third operation continues before power is turned on and continues after power is turned on, the mode does not change after power is turned on. For example, if the cross key 110 or the performance button 109 is pressed down due to an erroneous operation when power is turned on, the mode is not changed by mistake after power is turned on, and the default value can be maintained. Since the third operation before power is turned on cannot detect the rising edge of the press signal indicating the button being pressed, it is not considered to be pressed even if the button is continued to be pressed after power is turned on, and the press is not detected unless the button is pressed again and the press signal rises. In this way, it is possible to prevent unexpected situations such as unintended mode changes from occurring.

<Configuration 26>
If the second operation corresponding to volume up was continuing before the power was turned on and continues after the power was turned on (for example, the up key of the cross key 110 is pressed and held), the volume does not change after the power was turned on. However, if the second operation corresponding to volume up is continuing after the power was turned on (for example, the up key of the cross key 110 is pressed and held) and a new second operation corresponding to volume down is then executed (for example, the down key of the cross key 110 is pressed), the rising edge of the press signal is detected and the volume changes.

If the second operation corresponding to volume down was ongoing before power was turned on and continues after power was turned on (for example, the down key of the cross key 110 is pressed and held), the volume will not change after power was turned on. However, if the second operation corresponding to volume down is ongoing after power was turned on (for example, the down key of the cross key 110 is pressed and held) and a new second operation corresponding to volume up is then executed (for example, the up key of the cross key 110 is pressed), the rising edge of the press signal will be detected and the volume will change.

In this way, appropriate volume changes can be achieved (preventing unintended changes to the volume in irregular situations), while allowing one side of the operation (adjustment) even in irregular situations, allowing some operations to be performed normally even in irregular situations, and allowing operations to be reflected flexibly.

<Configuration 27>
If a third operation corresponding to a mode change was continuing before power was turned on and continues after power was turned on (for example, the left key of the cross key 110 is pressed and held), the mode is not changed after power was turned on. However, if the third operation corresponding to a mode change after power was turned on continues (for example, the left key of the cross key 110 is pressed and held) and a different third operation corresponding to a mode change is newly executed (for example, the right key of the cross key 110 is pressed), a rising edge of the press signal is detected and the mode is changed.

If the third operation corresponding to the mode change was continued before power was turned on and continues after power was turned on (for example, the right key of the cross key 110 is pressed and held), the mode is not changed after power was turned on. However, if the third operation corresponding to the mode change after power was turned on continues (for example, the right key of the cross key 110 is pressed and held) and a different third operation corresponding to the mode change is newly executed (for example, the left key of the cross key 110 is pressed), the rising edge of the press signal is detected and the mode is changed.

In this way, by allowing one side of the operation (adjustment) even in irregular situations, some operations can be executed normally even in irregular situations, and operations can be reflected flexibly.

<Configuration 28>
Both the second operation (e.g., the up and down buttons of the cross key 110 for instructing a volume change) and the third operation (e.g., the left and right buttons of the cross key 110 for instructing a mode change) can be pressed and detected simultaneously, and based on this, volume adjustment and mode change can be performed in parallel at the same time, and a volume adjustment screen and a mode change screen can be displayed simultaneously.

<Configuration 29>
The period during which the volume adjustment can be performed during the pattern change is longer than the period during which the mode setting can be performed during the pattern change. Also, there are predetermined pattern changes (missing changes that end in a short time without the occurrence of a reach) which are pattern changes that are performed when the result of the win/loss judgment is a specific result different from the predetermined result and are not accompanied by a reach performance, and specific pattern changes (missing changes in which a super reach performance is performed after the occurrence of a reach) which are pattern changes that are performed when the result of the win/loss judgment is a specific result different from the predetermined result and are accompanied by a high expectation reach performance, and the difference between the period during which the volume adjustment can be performed during the predetermined pattern change and the period during which the mode setting can be performed is smaller than the difference between the period during which the volume adjustment can be performed during the specific pattern change and the period during which the mode setting can be performed. Specifically, in a miss variation (120 seconds) in which a super reach performance is executed after the occurrence of a reach, at least 55 seconds after the start of execution of the super reach performance is a period in which mode setting cannot be executed, and the rest of the time is a period in which mode setting can be executed, while the period from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the fluctuation (120 seconds) is a period in which volume adjustment can be executed, while in a miss variation (5 seconds) in which a reach does not occur and ends in a short time, the period from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the fluctuation (5 seconds) is a period in which volume adjustment can be executed and a period in which mode setting can be executed.As a modified example, since volume adjustment is executable but performance setting change is not executable during a pattern fluctuation accompanied by a high expectation reach performance, the difference between the executable period of volume adjustment and the executable period of performance setting change during a pattern fluctuation accompanied by a high expectation reach performance may be configured to be substantially equal to the executable period of volume adjustment. In this way, by making it possible to execute an exciting presentation without informing the player of the possibility of a change in presentation tendency, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty grasping the degree of anticipation for the presentation, while at the same time relaxing the restrictions on making the exciting presentation easier to sense audibly, allowing the player to instantly change the way the presentation is perceived to suit the player's own preferences.

<Configuration 30>
If the third operation is continued before the period in which mode setting cannot be executed (the aforementioned period in which changing the effect setting is invalid, the period in which changing the effect setting is not possible), the third operation is continued during the period in which mode setting cannot be executed, and the third operation is continued after the period in which mode setting cannot be executed (for example, when the left or right key of the directional pad 110 is pressed and held), the mode will not be changed during the period in which mode setting can be executed, which is the period following the period in which mode setting cannot be executed.

<Configuration 31>
If a third operation (e.g., pressing and holding the left key) for giving a first instruction to change the performance settings is continued from before the period in which the change in the performance settings cannot be executed and then a third operation (e.g., pressing the right key) for giving a second instruction to change the performance settings is newly executed after switching to the period in which the change in the performance settings can be executed, a rising edge of a press signal is detected and the change in the performance settings based on the second instruction is executed.

<Configuration 32>
During the execution of the high expectation role presentation, the volume can be adjusted and a setting screen for adjusting the volume can be displayed, but the mode setting is not executed and the setting screen for setting the mode is not displayed. However, during the execution of the initial operation of the movable role, which is executed when the power is restored after a power outage, the volume can be adjusted and a setting screen for adjusting the volume can be displayed, and the mode setting can be executed and a setting screen for setting the mode can be displayed. In this way, during the most exciting presentation of the high expectation movable role presentation, the possibility of the presentation tendency changing is not presented to the player, preventing the player from making it difficult to grasp the expectation, while relaxing the restrictions on making the presentation with a sense of hearing easier, so that the player can instantly change the way the presentation is perceived to suit him/her.

<Configuration 33>
In the high base state, a period during which mode setting is not executable is provided, and if a power outage and power return occurs during the non-executable period in the high base state and thereafter a transition is made from the high base state to the low base state, the mode set in the low base state may be different from the mode set before the non-executable period in the high base state occurred.On the other hand, if no power outage occurs during the non-executable period in the high base state and thereafter a transition is made from the high base state to the low base state, the mode set in the low base state is the same as the mode set before the non-executable period in the high base state occurred. For example, if the super reach period 672 and the stop display period 674 in the high base state are set as an unexecutable period, and the pre-reading chance mode was set to on before the unexecutable period, if a power outage and then a power return occurs during the unexecutable period, and the high base state is returned to and then a transition from the high base state to a low base state is made when a specified condition is met (the specified number of stays in the high base state has elapsed, a jackpot game or a small jackpot game that triggers a transition to the low base state has been played, etc.), the pre-reading chance mode will be set to off in the low base state rather than on, whereas if a power outage does not occur during the unexecutable period and a transition from the high base state to a low base state is made when a specified condition is met (the specified number of stays in the high base state has elapsed, a jackpot game or a small jackpot game that triggers a transition to the low base state has been played, etc.), the pre-reading chance mode will be set to on in the low base state. In this way, even if the game state changes and the mode setting is not applied and the mode setting cannot be changed, the mode can be forcibly set by the action of power interruption recovery, and if the power interruption is not recovered even in such a situation, the high base state will end and the most recent mode setting will be automatically adopted.

<Configuration 34>
The game device is provided with a transfer instruction means for receiving a player's operation to instruct the transfer of stored ball number information to an external unit. The transfer instruction means is, for example, the counting button W40 in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50. The counting button as a transfer instruction means may be called a "transfer button." When the stored ball number information is transferred by operating the transfer instruction means, a ball number transfer sound can be output that suggests or notifies the transfer of the stored ball number information. A screen deformation effect can be executed during the output of the ball number transfer sound associated with the operation of the transfer instruction means. If a suppression notification effect is executed by the specific information reaching a predetermined specified value during the execution of the screen deformation effect during the output of the ball number transfer sound, the execution of the screen deformation effect is interrupted, but the output of the ball number transfer sound is not interrupted.

<Configuration 35>
If a pre-notification effect is executed by the specific information reaching a specific prescribed value during the execution of a screen deformation effect while the ball number transfer sound is being output in response to an operation on the transfer instruction means, the execution of the screen deformation effect is not interrupted, and the output of the ball number transfer sound is not interrupted either. In this way, the screen deformation effect is executed without restrictions so that highly anticipated effects are not missed even during the transfer of game balls, but even in such a situation, if a situation arises in which the game should be ended, the screen deformation effect is forcibly interrupted, making it possible to ensure the fairness of the game and suppress excessive gambling.

<Configuration 36>
The volume can be adjusted even during output of the ball number transfer sound associated with the operation of the transfer instruction means, and a setting screen for adjusting the volume can also be displayed. The player's preferences can be reflected even during game ball transfer.

<Configuration 37>
The mode setting can be executed even during output of the ball number transfer sound accompanying the operation of the transfer instruction means, and a setting screen for mode setting can also be displayed. The player's tastes and preferences can be reflected even during game ball transfer.

<Configuration 38>
Even during periods when mode setting is not possible (periods when execution is not possible), the pitch number transfer sound associated with operation of the transfer instruction means can be output.

<Configuration 39>
In the stage background after the end of a predetermined high expectation performance (the above-mentioned stop display period 674), the performance sound is muted, but the ball number transfer sound can be output. Even in this muted period, the volume can be adjusted, but the mode setting may be either impossible or possible.

<Configuration 40>
During the pattern change, it is possible to execute a changing text effect (the aforementioned dialogue preview effect displayed in a partial or entire area of the screen, or a caption effect in which a caption corresponding to a conversation between an ally character and an enemy character is displayed at the bottom of the screen during a super reach effect). There are multiple types of text colors in a given changing text effect (for example, text in a dialogue preview effect) (white, green, red, giraffe pattern, rainbow, in order of expectation). Note that the text color in a text effect (text color in a changing text effect, a jackpot text effect, and an error text effect) is the color of the text itself, or the color around the text (the color of the speech bubble, the color of the surrounding line, or the color of the effect around the text).

<Configuration 41>
During the execution of the special game, it is possible to execute a jackpot character effect (display of lines, song titles, and lyrics corresponding to the story unfolding during the execution of the special game). The character color of a predetermined jackpot character effect (for example, characters in song titles and lyrics display) is a character color (white for lowest expectation/rainbow for highest expectation) different from the character color (green or giraffe pattern) for low expectation or very high expectation in a predetermined variable character effect (for example, characters in a dialogue preview effect). In other words, a variable character effect can be executed in which a predetermined character is displayed during the variable display, a jackpot character effect can be executed in which a specific character is displayed during a special game, and the variable character effect corresponding colors, which are the color of the character itself or the color around the character displayed in the predetermined variable character effect, have a first color (e.g., white), a second color (e.g., green, giraffe pattern), and a third color (e.g., rainbow), and the expectation of transition to the special game is higher when the second color is displayed as the variable character effect corresponding color in the predetermined variable character effect than when the first color is displayed, and the expectation of transition to the special game is higher when the third color is displayed than when the second color is displayed, and the jackpot character effect corresponding color, which is the color of the character itself or the color around the character displayed in the predetermined jackpot character effect, can display a predetermined color that can be displayed as the variable character effect corresponding color in the predetermined variable character effect, while at least the second color is not displayed. In addition, it may also be applied to the cumulative number of prize balls that are the subject of the count-up effect (the characters used when displaying the prize ball count-up) and the highlighting (the characters used when the number of prize balls reaches the dividing number in units of 2,500).

<Configuration 42>
Certain variable character effects (for example, characters in dialogue preview effects) are subject to deformation in the screen deformation effects, but certain jackpot character effects (for example, characters in song titles or lyric displays) are not subject to deformation in the screen deformation effects (in other words, they do not undergo deformation like the screen deformation effects).

<Configuration 43>
With regard to a specified jackpot character effect (for example, characters in a song title or lyric display), unlike a specified variable character effect (for example, characters in a dialogue preview effect), it can be displayed simultaneously with the cumulative prize ball number display and highlighting that are the subject of the count-up effect, but at least they are not displayed superimposed on the cumulative prize ball number display that is the subject of the count-up effect (they may or may not be displayed superimposed on the highlighting).

<Configuration 44>
During an error, it is possible to execute specified error text displays (such as the full tank detection error text ``Please remove the ball'' displayed when a full tank is detected, the door open error text ``Door is open'' displayed when the door is opened, the magnetic detection error text ``Magnetic field has been detected'' displayed when a magnetic field is detected, and the setting value error text ``Setting value error'' displayed when a setting value error occurs), but the color of the text is a different color (white for lowest expectation/red for medium expectation) from the low expectation or very high expectation text color (green or giraffe pattern) in specified variable text displays (for example, text in dialogue preview displays). In other words, the game is capable of executing a variable character effect in which a predetermined character is displayed during a variable display, is configured to be able to determine a plurality of types of errors, is capable of executing an error character effect in which a prescribed character is displayed during the occurrence of an error, has a first color (e.g., white), a second color (e.g., green, giraffe pattern), and a third color (e.g., rainbow) as a variable character effect corresponding color, which is the color of the character itself or the color around the character displayed in the predetermined variable character effect, and is configured so that the expectation of transition to a special game is higher when the second color is displayed as the variable character effect corresponding color in the predetermined variable character effect than when the first color is displayed, and the expectation of transition to a special game is higher when the third color is displayed than when the second color is displayed, and is capable of displaying a predetermined color that can be displayed as a variable character effect corresponding color in a predetermined variable character effect as an error character effect corresponding color, which is the color of the character itself or the color around the character displayed in the predetermined error character effect, while not displaying at least the second color.

<Configuration 45>
Certain variable character effects (for example, characters in dialogue preview effects) are subject to transformation in the screen transformation effects, but certain error character effects (for example, full tank detection error characters) are not subject to transformation in the screen transformation effects (in other words, they do not transform like the screen transformation effects).

<Configuration 46>
Certain error character effects (for example, magnetic detection error characters) are not subject to transformation in the screen transformation effects (i.e., they are not transformed like the screen transformation effects).

<Configuration 47>
The error character display includes a first error character display (full tank detection error characters displayed when a full tank is detected, and door open error characters displayed when the door is open) and a second error character display (magnetic detection error characters displayed when a magnet is detected, and setting value error characters displayed when a setting value error occurs).

<Configuration 48>
The first error character effect is different from a predetermined variable character effect (for example, characters in a dialogue preview effect) in that it can be displayed simultaneously with the cumulative prize ball number display and highlighting that are the subject of the count-up effect, but is displayed superimposed on at least one of the cumulative prize ball number display and highlighting that are the subject of the count-up effect (the display priority of the first error character effect is higher). On the other hand, when the second error character effect is executed, the cumulative prize ball number display and highlighting that are the subject of the count-up effect are not executed simultaneously.

<Configuration 49>
The first error character effect can be executed simultaneously with a predetermined variable character effect (e.g., characters in a dialogue preview effect) and a predetermined jackpot character effect (e.g., characters in a song name or lyric display), but the second error character effect is not executed simultaneously with a predetermined variable character effect or a predetermined jackpot character effect (only the second error character effect is executed during the second error).

<Configuration 50>
Operation of the effect button 109 can trigger the execution of a predetermined variable character effect (for example, a character effect in a dialogue preview effect that can be executed by operating the effect button), but does not trigger the execution of other predetermined character effects (predetermined character effect during a jackpot, predetermined character effect during an error). Operation of the cross key 110 can trigger the execution of a predetermined character effect during a jackpot (for example, a character effect in a song name or lyrics display for a song output during a jackpot game that can be switched to cross key operation), but does not trigger the execution of other predetermined character effects (predetermined variable character effect, predetermined character effect during an error). Neither operation of the effect button 109 nor operation of the cross key 110 triggers the execution of a predetermined character effect during an error (for example, a full tank detection error character) (operation of the effect button or cross key is not involved in the execution trigger at all). In other words, the game machine is capable of executing a variable character effect in which predetermined characters are displayed during a variable display, is capable of executing a jackpot character effect in which a specific character is displayed during a special game, is configured to be able to determine a plurality of types of errors, is capable of executing an error character effect in which predetermined characters are displayed during the occurrence of an error, has a first operation means (e.g., an effect button) and a second operation means (e.g., a cross key) as operation means that can be operated by a player, is configured to be able to execute a predetermined variable character effect triggered by operation of the first operation means, but is not configured to execute a predetermined variable character effect triggered by operation of the second operation means, is configured to not execute a predetermined jackpot character effect triggered by operation of the first operation means, but is configured to execute a predetermined jackpot character effect triggered by operation of the second operation means, and is not configured to execute a predetermined error character effect triggered by operation of the first operation means, and is not configured to execute a predetermined error character effect triggered by operation of the second operation means.

<Configuration 51>
A specific color (e.g., a giraffe pattern) in a specified variable text effect (e.g., a dialogue preview effect) is composed of multiple colors (yellow and brown), and the specific color is also used in other preview effects (e.g., full-screen previews such as stage change previews), but the fineness of the color differs from that of the specified variable text effect (the variable text effect has a narrower yellow and brown gradation width, or if it is composed of a brown pattern on a yellow background, the brown pattern is smaller, etc.).

The techniques described in the examples and variants may be specified in the following ways:

[First aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for a game ball to enter when opened;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing a lottery value corresponding to a new ball entering the start winning hole as a reserve up to a predetermined number when a pattern change corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning hole is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning hole;
a special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening when a result of the winning/losing determination by the winning/losing determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball is entered into the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the performance determination means;
Based on the advance information, a specific performance suggesting a probability of transition to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information can be executed by a pattern change prior to a pattern change related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information,
When a reservation corresponding to a new ball entering the starting winning hole occurs, a reservation image corresponding to the reservation can be displayed.
When displaying the reserved image, the display can be started with a predetermined animation display,
There are a plurality of types of the specific performance, and the expected degree of transition to a special game in the pattern change related to the reservation that triggered the execution of the specific performance differs depending on the type of the specific performance executed in the pattern change prior to the pattern change related to the reservation that triggered the execution of the specific performance,
As a performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device, at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are included,
A special effect is executed to display a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner,
The types of the reserved images include at least a first reserved image and a second reserved image having a higher expectation of transition to a special game than the first reserved image,
The special performance can be executed even during the display of a pattern change corresponding to either the first reserved image or the second reserved image,
After the reserved image starts to be displayed with the predetermined animation display, a specific animation display that is different from the predetermined animation display can be displayed in a loop;
A pinball game machine characterized in that at least one of the predetermined animation display and the specific animation display can be displayed even while the special effect is being performed, and that at least one of the predetermined animation display and the specific animation display can be displayed after the reserved image is subject to transformation in the special effect.

[Second aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for a game ball to enter when opened;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing a lottery value corresponding to a new ball entering the start winning hole as a reserve up to a predetermined number when a pattern change corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning hole is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning hole;
a special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening when a result of the winning/losing determination by the winning/losing determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball is entered into the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the performance determination means;
Based on the advance information, a specific performance suggesting an expected degree of transition to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information can be executed by a pattern change prior to a pattern change related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information;
When a reservation corresponding to a new ball entering the starting winning hole occurs, a reservation image corresponding to the reservation can be displayed.
When displaying the reserved image, the display can be started with a predetermined animation display,
There are a plurality of types of the specific performance, and the expected degree of transition to a special game in the pattern change related to the reservation that triggered the execution of the specific performance differs depending on the type of the specific performance executed in the pattern change prior to the pattern change related to the reservation that triggered the execution of the specific performance,
As a performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device, at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are included,
A special effect is executed to display a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner,
The types of the reserved images include at least a first reserved image and a second reserved image having a higher expectation of transition to a special game than the first reserved image,
After the reserved image starts to be displayed with the predetermined animation display, a specific animation display that is different from the predetermined animation display can be displayed in a loop;
A pinball game machine characterized in that, when a hold occurs during the execution of the special effect, if the hold image corresponding to the hold that has occurred is the first hold image, the first hold image can be displayed accompanied by at least one of the predetermined animation display and the specific animation display, but if the hold image corresponding to the hold that has occurred is the second hold image, the second hold image is not displayed accompanied by at least one of the predetermined animation display and the specific animation display.

[Third aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for a game ball to enter when opened;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing a lottery value corresponding to a new ball entering the start winning hole as a reserve up to a predetermined number when a pattern change corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning hole is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning hole;
a special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening when a result of the winning/losing determination by the winning/losing determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball is entered into the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the performance determination means;
Based on the advance information, a specific performance suggesting an expected degree of transition to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information can be executed by a pattern change prior to a pattern change related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information;
When a reservation corresponding to a new ball entering the starting winning hole occurs, a reservation image corresponding to the reservation can be displayed.
When displaying the reserved image, the display can be started with a predetermined animation display,
There are a plurality of types of the specific performance, and the expected degree of transition to a special game in the pattern change related to the reservation that triggered the execution of the specific performance differs depending on the type of the specific performance executed in the pattern change prior to the pattern change related to the reservation that triggered the execution of the specific performance,
As a performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device, at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are included,
A special effect is executed to display a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner,
The types of the reserved images include at least a first reserved image and a second reserved image having a higher expectation of transition to a special game than the first reserved image,
The effect can be executed when a hold occurs, and includes a winning effect as an effect that can be executed at the start of displaying the first hold image and the start of displaying the second hold image;
A pinball game machine characterized in that when the first reserved image is started to be displayed during the execution of the special effect, the winning effect is not executed.

[Fourth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for a game ball to enter when opened;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing a lottery value corresponding to a new ball entering the start winning hole as a reserve up to a predetermined number when a pattern change corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning hole is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning hole;
a special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening when a result of the winning/losing determination by the winning/losing determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball is entered into the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the performance determination means;
Based on the advance information, a specific performance suggesting a probability of transition to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information can be executed by a pattern change prior to a pattern change related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information,
When a reservation corresponding to a new ball entering the starting winning hole occurs, a reservation image corresponding to the reservation can be displayed.
When displaying the reserved image, the display can be started with a predetermined animation display,
There are a plurality of types of the specific performance, and the expected degree of transition to a special game in the pattern change related to the reservation that triggered the execution of the specific performance differs depending on the type of the specific performance executed in the pattern change prior to the pattern change related to the reservation that triggered the execution of the specific performance,
The number of reserved items stored by the reservation control means can be displayed at a predetermined position as a reservation number display separately from the reservation image,
As a performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device, at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are included,
A special effect is executed to display a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner,
When a new reservation occurs during the execution of the special performance, the reserved image may be subject to transformation in the special performance and a reserved image corresponding to the new reservation may be displayed, while the reserved number display is updated and displayed without being subject to transformation in the special performance,
The execution time of the predetermined animation display of the reserved image is longer than the update time of the reserved number display, and the execution time of the special effect is longer than the execution time of the predetermined animation display of the reserved image,
In the first presentation pattern in which the special presentation is executed, the possibility of a predetermined high expectation presentation being executed is higher than in the second presentation pattern in which the special presentation is not executed,
A pinball game machine characterized in that, during execution of the specified high expectation performance, the reserved image is not displayed but the reserved number display can be displayed.

[Fifth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for a game ball to enter when opened;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing a lottery value corresponding to a new ball entering the start winning hole as a reserve up to a predetermined number when a pattern change corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning hole is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning hole;
a special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening when a result of the winning/losing determination by the winning/losing determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
As a performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device, at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are included,
A special effect is executed to display a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner,
A stage background image set according to the stage performance can be displayed,
When the performance develops into a predetermined high expectation performance, the stage background image is hidden during the developed high expectation performance.
A pinball game machine characterized in that a pattern change is executed when the result of a win/loss determination is a specific result different from a predetermined result, and in the specific pattern change which is a pattern change accompanied by the execution of the predetermined high expectation performance, the special performance can be executed while the stage background image is displayed before the development into the predetermined high expectation performance, while the special performance is not executed while the stage background image which is redisplayed after the end of the predetermined high expectation performance in the specific pattern change is displayed.

[Sixth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for a game ball to enter when opened;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing a lottery value corresponding to a new ball entering the start winning hole as a reserve up to a predetermined number when a pattern change corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning hole is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning hole;
a special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening when a result of the winning/losing determination by the winning/losing determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
As a performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device, at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are included,
A special effect is executed to display a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner,
The display device has a decorative pattern which is a pattern which shows the result of the pass/fail judgment in a dramatic manner, and the decorative pattern includes a normal decorative pattern which is displayed as a main pattern on the performance display device, and a simplified decorative pattern which is displayed in a display form which is simplified more than the normal decorative pattern,
The normal decorative pattern can be displayed in a second display mode when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the pattern variable display was stopped in a first display mode,
A pinball game machine characterized in that the special effect can be executed when the normal decorative pattern is in the first display mode, while the special effect is not executed when the normal decorative pattern is in the second display mode.

[Seventh aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for a game ball to enter when opened;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing a lottery value corresponding to a new ball entering the start winning hole as a reserve up to a predetermined number when a pattern change corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning hole is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning hole;
a special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening when a result of the winning/losing determination by the winning/losing determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
As a performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device, at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are included,
A special effect is executed to display a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner,
When specific information, which is information regarding the difference between the number of awarded balls and the number of balls used, reaches a predetermined value, a suppression notification effect can be executed to notify the end of the game.
When the specific information reaches the predetermined value during the execution of the special effect, the suppression notification effect is executed, and the special effect is interrupted,
The pinball game machine is characterized in that the suppression notification performance is not subject to transformation in the special performance, and the special performance is not newly executed during execution of the suppression notification performance.

[Eighth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for a game ball to enter when opened;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing a lottery value corresponding to a new ball entering the start winning hole as a reserve up to a predetermined number when a pattern change corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning hole is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning hole;
a special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening when a result of the winning/losing determination by the winning/losing determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
As a performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device, at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are included,
A special effect is executed to display a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner,
When specific information, which is information regarding the difference between the number of awarded balls and the number of balls used, reaches a predetermined value, a suppression notification effect can be executed to notify the end of the game.
When the specific information reaches a specific specified value different from the predetermined specified value, a pre-notification effect is executed to notify in advance that the game is scheduled to end;
When the specific information reaches the predetermined value during the execution of the special effect, the suppression notification effect is executed, and the special effect is interrupted,
The suppression notification effect is not subject to transformation in the special effect, and the special effect is not newly executed during the execution of the suppression notification effect,
The advance notification effect is not subject to transformation in the special effect, while the special effect can be newly executed during the execution of the advance notification effect,
The pinball game machine is characterized in that the advance notification performance and the special performance can be executed simultaneously, while the advance notification performance is displayed in front of the special performance.

[Ninth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for a game ball to enter when opened;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing a lottery value corresponding to a new ball entering the start winning hole as a reserve up to a predetermined number when a pattern change corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning hole is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning hole;
a special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening when a result of the winning/losing determination by the winning/losing determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
As a performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device, at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are included,
A special effect is executed to display a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner,
When specific information, which is information regarding the difference between the number of awarded balls and the number of balls used, reaches a predetermined value, a suppression notification effect can be executed to notify the end of the game.
A pinball game machine characterized in that in a special situation in which there is a specific reserve that is a reserve related to a fluctuation pattern that can execute the special effect, and the difference between the specific information and the specified value is one ball away, if there are two or more winning balls for a specific winning ball without a power outage before the specific reserve is consumed, the special effect will not be executed after the winning ball, whereas if there is a power outage and a power recovery before the specific reserve is consumed, and there are two or more winning balls for a specific winning ball after the power outage and power recovery, the special effect may be executed after the winning ball.

[Tenth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for a game ball to enter when opened;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing a lottery value corresponding to a new ball entering the start winning hole as a reserve up to a predetermined number when a pattern change corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning hole is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning hole;
a special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening when a result of the winning/losing determination by the winning/losing determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball is entered into the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the performance determination means;
When a reservation corresponding to a new ball entering the starting winning hole occurs, a reservation image corresponding to the reservation can be displayed.
The number of reserved items stored by the reservation control means can be displayed at a predetermined position as a reservation number display separately from the reservation image,
As a performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device, at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are included,
A special effect is executed to display a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner,
When specific information, which is information regarding the difference between the number of awarded balls and the number of balls used, reaches a predetermined value, a suppression notification effect can be executed to notify the end of the game.
If it is a predetermined situation before the execution of the suppression notification effect, a predetermined waiting effect indicating that the game is waiting can be executed, and while the predetermined waiting effect is being executed in the predetermined situation, the special effect is not executed but the reserved number display can be executed;
A pinball game machine characterized in that after the suppression notification effect is executed, none of the predetermined waiting effect, the special effect, and the hold number display is executed.

[Eleventh aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for a game ball to enter when opened;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing a lottery value corresponding to a new ball entering the start winning hole as a reserve up to a predetermined number when a pattern change corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning hole is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning hole;
a special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening when a result of the winning/losing determination by the winning/losing determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
As a performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device, at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are included,
A special effect is executed to display a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner,
When specific information, which is information regarding the difference between the number of awarded balls and the number of balls used, reaches a predetermined value, a suppression notification effect can be executed to notify the end of the game.
When the specific information reaches a specific specified value different from the predetermined specified value, a pre-notification effect is executed to notify in advance that the game is scheduled to end;
A pinball game machine characterized in that, in a situation where a launch notification effect is executed in a jackpot start demo effect executed at the start of the special game, which encourages a launch toward the jackpot opening, the special effect is not executed, and the suppression notification effect is not executed, while the advance notification effect can be executed at the same time.

[Twelfth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for a game ball to enter when opened;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing a lottery value corresponding to a new ball entering the start winning hole as a reserve up to a predetermined number when a pattern change corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning hole is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning hole;
a special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening when a result of the winning/losing determination by the winning/losing determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball is entered into the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the performance determination means;
When a reservation corresponding to a new ball entering the starting winning hole occurs, a reservation image corresponding to the reservation can be displayed.
The number of reserved items stored by the reservation control means can be displayed at a predetermined position as a reservation number display separately from the reservation image,
As a performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device, at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are included,
A special effect is executed to display a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner,
The display device has a decorative pattern which is a pattern which shows the result of the pass/fail judgment in a dramatic manner, and the decorative pattern includes a normal decorative pattern which is displayed as a main pattern on the performance display device, and a simplified decorative pattern which is displayed in a display form which is simplified more than the normal decorative pattern,
It is possible to execute a movable role production using a movable role that is driven according to the performance content and performs a dramatic action,
As the movable role performance, a high expectation movable role performance that suggests or notifies that the expectation of transition to the special game is high can be executed,
While the high expectation movable role performance is not executed during the execution of the special performance, the initial operation of the movable role that is executed in response to the power recovery after the power cut can be executed even during the execution of the special performance,
A pinball game machine characterized in that while the high expectation movable device performance is being performed, the normal decorative pattern and the reserved image are not displayed, but the simple decorative pattern and the reserved number display are displayed, and while the initial operation is being performed, any of the normal decorative pattern, the simple decorative pattern, the reserved image, and the reserved number display can be displayed.

[Thirteenth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for a game ball to enter when opened;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing a lottery value corresponding to a new ball entering the start winning hole as a reserve up to a predetermined number when a pattern change corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning hole is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning hole;
a special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening when a result of the winning/losing determination by the winning/losing determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball is entered into the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the performance determination means;
Based on the advance information, a specific performance suggesting a probability of transition to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information can be executed by a pattern change prior to a pattern change related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information,
When a reservation corresponding to a new ball entering the starting winning hole occurs, a reservation image corresponding to the reservation can be displayed.
As a performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device, at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are included,
A special effect is executed to display a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner,
The mode relating to the execution frequency of the specific performance includes a first mode and a second mode, and the mode setting of whether to set the specific performance to the first mode or the second mode can be executed in response to an operation by a player;
The types of the reserved images include at least a first reserved image and a second reserved image having a higher expectation of transition to a special game than the first reserved image,
When the first mode is set, the display frequency of the second reserved image is a first frequency, whereas when the second mode is set, the display frequency of the second reserved image is a second frequency that is lower than the first frequency;
A pinball game machine characterized in that, during execution of the special effect, regardless of whether the first mode or the second mode is set, the frequency of displaying the first reserved image when a hold occurs is the same.

[14th aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for a game ball to enter when opened;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing a lottery value corresponding to a new ball entering the start winning hole as a reserve up to a predetermined number when a pattern change corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning hole is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning hole;
a special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening when a result of the winning/losing determination by the winning/losing determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball is entered into the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the performance determination means;
Based on the advance information, a specific performance suggesting an expected degree of transition to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information can be executed by a pattern change prior to a pattern change related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information;
The mode relating to the execution frequency of the specific performance includes a first mode and a second mode, and the mode setting of whether to set the specific performance to the first mode or the second mode can be executed in response to an operation by a player;
The predetermined presentation content can be changed by a first operation by a player,
a volume adjustment can be performed by a second operation by the player;
The mode setting can be executed by a third operation by a player,
When the first operation is continued, it is regarded as a continuous input of the first operation, whereas when the second operation is continued, it is not regarded as a continuous input of the second operation, and when the third operation is continued, it is not regarded as a continuous input of the third operation;
If the second operation continues before the power is turned on and continues after the power is turned on, the volume does not change after the power is turned on,
This pinball game machine is characterized in that, if the third operation is continued before power is turned on and the third operation is continued after power is turned on, the mode is not changed after power is turned on.

[Fifteenth aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for a game ball to enter when opened;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing a lottery value corresponding to a new ball entering the start winning hole as a reserve up to a predetermined number when a pattern change corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning hole is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning hole;
a special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening when a result of the winning/losing determination by the winning/losing determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball is entered into the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the performance determination means;
Based on the advance information, a specific performance suggesting a probability of transition to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information can be executed by a pattern change prior to a pattern change related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information,
The mode relating to the execution frequency of the specific performance includes a first mode and a second mode, and the mode setting of whether to set the specific performance to the first mode or the second mode can be executed in response to an operation by a player;
The predetermined presentation content can be changed by a first operation by a player,
a volume adjustment can be performed by a second operation by the player;
The mode setting can be executed by a third operation by a player,
When the first operation is continued, it is regarded as a continuous input of the first operation, whereas when the second operation is continued, it is not regarded as a continuous input of the second operation, and when the third operation is continued, it is not regarded as a continuous input of the third operation;
If the second operation continues before the power is turned on and continues after the power is turned on, the volume does not change after the power is turned on,
If the third operation is continued before power is turned on and the third operation is continued after power is turned on, the mode is not changed after power is turned on,
This pinball game machine is characterized in that if the second operation corresponding to volume up is continued before the power is turned on and the second operation corresponding to volume up is continued after the power is turned on, the volume does not change after the power is turned on, but if the second operation corresponding to volume down is executed in a situation where the second operation corresponding to volume up is continued after the power is turned on, the volume changes.

[16th aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for a game ball to enter when opened;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing a lottery value corresponding to a new ball entering the start winning hole as a reserve up to a predetermined number when a pattern change corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning hole is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning hole;
a special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening when a result of the winning/losing determination by the winning/losing determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball is entered into the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the performance determination means;
Based on the advance information, a specific performance suggesting a probability of transition to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information can be executed by a pattern change prior to a pattern change related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information,
The mode relating to the execution frequency of the specific performance includes a first mode and a second mode, and the mode setting of whether to set the specific performance to the first mode or the second mode can be executed in response to an operation by a player;
The predetermined presentation content can be changed by a first operation by a player,
a volume adjustment can be performed by a second operation by the player;
The mode setting can be executed by a third operation by a player,
The period during which the volume adjustment can be performed during the pattern change is relatively longer than the period during which the mode setting can be performed during the pattern change,
a predetermined pattern change which is a pattern change that is executed when the result of the win/loss determination is a specific result different from a predetermined result and is a pattern change that is not accompanied by a reach performance, and a specific pattern change which is a pattern change that is executed when the result of the win/loss determination is a specific result different from the predetermined result and is a pattern change that is accompanied by a high expectation reach performance, wherein the difference between the period during which the volume adjustment can be executed and the period during which the mode setting can be executed during the predetermined pattern change is smaller than the difference between the period during which the volume adjustment can be executed and the period during which the mode setting can be executed during the specific pattern change,
A pinball game machine characterized in that, if the third operation is continued before the period in which the mode setting cannot be executed, the third operation is continued during the period in which the mode setting cannot be executed, and the third operation is continued after the period in which the mode setting cannot be executed, the mode is not changed during the period in which the mode setting can be executed, which is the period following the period in which the mode setting cannot be executed.

[17th aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for a game ball to enter when opened;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing a lottery value corresponding to a new ball entering the start winning hole as a reserve up to a predetermined number when a pattern change corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning hole is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning hole;
a special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening when a result of the winning/losing determination by the winning/losing determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball is entered into the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the performance determination means;
Based on the advance information, a specific performance suggesting a probability of transition to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information can be executed by a pattern change prior to a pattern change related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information,
The mode relating to the execution frequency of the specific performance includes a first mode and a second mode, and the mode setting of whether to set the specific performance to the first mode or the second mode can be executed in response to an operation by a player;
It is possible to execute a movable role production using a movable role that is driven according to the performance content and performs a dramatic action,
As the movable role performance, a high expectation movable role performance that suggests or notifies that the expectation of transition to the special game is high can be executed,
The predetermined presentation content can be changed by a first operation by a player,
a volume adjustment can be performed by a second operation by the player;
The mode setting can be executed by a third operation by a player,
During the execution of the high expectation movable role performance, the volume adjustment can be executed, and the setting screen for the volume adjustment can also be displayed, but the mode setting is not executed, and the setting screen for the mode setting is not displayed,
A pinball game machine characterized in that, during the execution of the initial operation of the movable part, which is executed in response to the restoration of power after a power outage, the volume adjustment can be performed, a setting screen for the volume adjustment can also be displayed, the mode setting can also be performed, and a setting screen for the mode setting can also be displayed.

[18th aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for a game ball to enter when opened;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing a lottery value corresponding to a new ball entering the start winning hole as a reserve up to a predetermined number when a pattern change corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning hole is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning hole;
a special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening when a result of the winning/losing determination by the winning/losing determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball is entered into the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the performance determination means;
Based on the advance information, a specific performance suggesting a probability of transition to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information can be executed by a pattern change prior to a pattern change related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information,
The mode relating to the execution frequency of the specific performance includes a first mode and a second mode, and the mode setting of whether to set the specific performance to the first mode or the second mode can be executed in response to an operation by a player;
As a state relating to the ease of a ball entering a predetermined winning hole, there is a low base state which is a state of normal ease of a ball entering, and a high base state which is a state in which the ease of a ball entering is higher than that in the low base state,
The predetermined presentation content can be changed by a first operation by a player,
a volume adjustment can be performed by a second operation by the player;
The mode setting can be executed by a third operation by a player,
a period during which the mode setting cannot be executed is provided in the high base state;
A pinball game machine characterized in that if a power outage and power return occurs during the occurrence of the impossible period in the high base state, and thereafter a transition from the high base state to the low base state, the mode set in the low base state may be different from the mode set before the occurrence of the impossible period in the high base state, whereas if a power outage does not occur during the occurrence of the impossible period in the high base state and thereafter a transition from the high base state to the low base state, the mode set in the low base state is the same as the mode set before the occurrence of the impossible period in the high base state.

[19th aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for a game ball to enter when opened;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing a lottery value corresponding to a new ball entering the start winning hole as a reserve up to a predetermined number when a pattern change corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning hole is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning hole;
a special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening when a result of the winning/losing determination by the winning/losing determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
As a performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device, at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are included,
A special effect is executed to display a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner,
When specific information, which is information regarding the difference between the number of awarded balls and the number of balls used, reaches a predetermined value, a suppression notification effect can be executed to notify the end of the game.
When the specific information reaches a specific specified value different from the predetermined specified value, a pre-notification effect is executed to notify in advance that the game is scheduled to end;
The game device further includes a transfer instruction means for receiving an operation by a player to instruct the transfer of the stored ball number information to the external unit,
When the stored ball number information is transferred by operating the transfer instruction means, a ball number transfer sound can be output to suggest or notify the transfer of the stored ball number information;
The special effect can be executed while the ball number transfer sound is being output,
When the suppression notification effect is executed during the execution of the special effect while the ball number transfer sound is being output, the execution of the special effect is interrupted, but the output of the ball number transfer sound is not interrupted,
This pinball game machine is characterized in that when the advance notification performance is executed during the execution of the special performance while the ball number transfer sound is being output, the execution of the special performance is not interrupted and the output of the ball number transfer sound is not interrupted.

[20th aspect]
A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for a game ball to enter when opened;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing a lottery value corresponding to a new ball entering the start winning hole as a reserve up to a predetermined number when a pattern change corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning hole is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning hole;
a special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening when a result of the winning/losing determination by the winning/losing determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
When a new ball is entered into the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the performance determination means;
Based on the advance information, a specific performance suggesting a probability of transition to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information can be executed by a pattern change prior to a pattern change related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information,
The mode relating to the execution frequency of the specific performance includes a first mode and a second mode, and the mode setting of whether to set the specific performance to the first mode or the second mode can be executed in response to an operation by a player;
The game device further includes a transfer instruction means for receiving an operation by a player to instruct the transfer of the stored ball number information to the external unit,
When the stored ball number information is transferred by operating the transfer instruction means, a ball number transfer sound can be output to suggest or notify the transfer of the stored ball number information;
The predetermined presentation content can be changed by a first operation by a player,
a volume adjustment can be performed by a second operation by the player;
The mode setting can be executed by a third operation by a player,
The volume adjustment can be performed even during the output of the ball number transfer sound, and a setting screen for the volume adjustment can be displayed.
A pinball game machine characterized in that the mode setting can be executed even while the ball number transmission sound is being output, and a setting screen for the mode setting can also be displayed.

20: big prize opening; 60: performance display device; 80: game board; 81: game area; 220: win/loss determination means; 230: variation pattern determination means; 240: hold control means; 260: special game control means; 303: performance determination means; 305: performance display control means.

Claims (1)

A game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
a large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for a game ball to enter when opened;
A winning/losing determination means for performing a winning/losing determination to determine whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game, when a ball enters the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing a lottery value corresponding to a new ball entering the start winning hole as a reserve up to a predetermined number when a pattern change corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning hole is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning hole;
a special game control means for executing a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening when a result of the winning/losing determination by the winning/losing determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device on which performance content is displayed;
A performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
A performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device,
As a performance image that can be displayed on the performance display device, at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group are included,
A special effect is executed to display a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner,
A stage background image set according to the stage performance can be displayed,
When the performance develops into a predetermined high expectation performance, the stage background image is hidden during the developed high expectation performance.
A symbol change is executed when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a specific result different from a predetermined result, and in the specific symbol change which is a symbol change accompanied by the execution of the predetermined high expectation performance, the special performance can be executed while the stage background image before the development into the predetermined high expectation performance is displayed, whereas the special performance is not executed while the stage background image which is re-displayed after the end of the predetermined high expectation performance in the specific symbol change is displayed,
When specific information, which is information regarding the difference between the number of awarded balls and the number of balls used, reaches a predetermined value, a suppression notification effect can be executed to notify the end of the game.
When the specific information reaches a specific specified value different from the predetermined specified value, a pre-notification effect is executed to suggest or notify that the specific specified value has been reached or the difference number required to reach the predetermined specified value;
When the specific information reaches the predetermined value during the execution of the special effect, the suppression notification effect is executed, and the special effect is interrupted,
The suppression notification effect is not subject to transformation in the special effect, and the special effect is not newly executed during the execution of the suppression notification effect,
The advance notification effect is not subject to transformation in the special effect, while the special effect can be newly executed during the execution of the advance notification effect,
The pinball game machine is characterized in that the advance notification performance and the special performance can be executed simultaneously, while the advance notification performance is displayed in front of the special performance .

Images